Yamaha V96i User manual

Yamaha V96i User manual
Reference Manual
How to Use This
Reference Manual
The 01V96i Reference Manual (this document) allows you to
search for terms and take advantage of links in the text.
Searching for terms
To search for a term, use the search function of the software
you’re using to view this document.
If you’re using Adobe Reader, enter the term in the search box
and press the <Enter> key of your computer keyboard to
search for occurrences of that term.
Note: The latest version of Adobe Reader can be downloaded
from the following URL.
http://www.adobe.com/products/reader.html
Displaying the next/previous
view
If you’re using Adobe Reader, you can jump to the previous/
next view in your viewing history. This is a convenient way to
jump back to the previous page after you’ve used a link to
jump to a different page.
Note:
• If the Previous View / Next View buttons are not shown in the
toolbar, you can hold down your computer keyboard’s <Alt>
key and use the <←><→> keys to jump to the previous or next
view.
• For details on using other PDF-viewing software, refer to the
owner’s manual of the software you’re using.
Using the Function Tree
A function tree for the 01V96i is provided on page 4 and following. You can use this to quickly find the explanatory page
you want.
2
Contents
Contents
How to Use This Reference Manual ............................................... 1
Contents of the Owner’s Manual (Booklet) .......... 3
Function Tree .......................................................... 4
Control Surface & Rear Panel ................................. 6
Control Surface .................................................................................. 6
Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 10
Analog I/O & Digital I/O ...................................... 12
Analog Inputs & Outputs ............................................................... 12
Digital Inputs & Outputs ................................................................ 13
Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I/O Card
Inputs ................................................................................. 14
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status .................................... 14
Dithering Digital Outputs .............................................................. 15
Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates ........... 16
Input Channels ...................................................... 17
About Input Channels .................................................................... 17
Setting the Input Channels from the Display .............................. 18
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface ............... 25
Pairing Input Channels ................................................................... 26
Naming Input Channels ................................................................. 28
Bus Outs ................................................................ 29
About Stereo Out ............................................................................. 29
Bus Out 1–8 ...................................................................................... 29
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display ........ 30
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control
Surface ............................................................................... 33
Pairing Buses or Aux Sends ........................................................... 33
Attenuating Output Signals ........................................................... 34
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs .......................................... 35
Aux Outs ................................................................ 36
Aux Out 1–8 ..................................................................................... 36
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display ......................................... 36
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface ........................... 38
Setting Aux Send Levels .................................................................. 38
Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels .................... 40
Panning Aux Sends ......................................................................... 41
Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends ........................ 42
Input & Output Patching ..................................... 43
Input Patching ................................................................................. 43
Output Patching .............................................................................. 44
Patching Direct Outs ....................................................................... 46
Insert Patching ................................................................................. 47
Monitoring ............................................................ 49
Monitor ............................................................................................. 49
Monitor and Solo Setup .................................................................. 49
Using the Monitor ........................................................................... 50
Using the Solo Function ................................................................. 51
Surround Pan ........................................................ 52
About Surround Pan ....................................................................... 52
Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes .......................... 53
Surround Panning ........................................................................... 56
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters .......... 59
Grouping & Linking ........................................................................ 59
Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups ........................................ 59
Using Fader Group Master ............................................................ 61
Using Mute Group Master ............................................................. 62
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters .................................... 62
01V96i—Reference Manual
Internal Effects ..................................................... 64
About the Internal Effects .............................................................. 64
Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends ....................................... 64
Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels ................................ 65
Editing Effects .................................................................................. 66
About Add-On Effects .................................................................... 67
About Plug-Ins ................................................................................. 67
Scene Memories ................................................... 68
About Scene Memories ................................................................... 68
What is Stored in a Scene? .............................................................. 68
About Scene Numbers .................................................................... 68
Storing and Recalling Scenes .......................................................... 69
Auto Scene Memory Update .......................................................... 70
Fading Scenes ................................................................................... 71
Recalling Scenes Safely .................................................................... 72
Sorting Scenes ................................................................................... 72
Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) ............................... 73
Libraries ................................................................ 74
About the Libraries .......................................................................... 74
General Library Operation ............................................................. 74
Using Libraries ................................................................................. 75
Remote Control .................................................... 83
About Remote Function ................................................................. 83
Pro Tools Remote Layer ................................................................. 83
Nuendo/Cubase Remote Layer ...................................................... 93
Other DAW Remote Layer ............................................................. 94
MIDI Remote Layer ......................................................................... 94
Machine Control Function ............................................................. 98
MIDI .................................................................... 100
MIDI & the 01V96i ........................................................................ 100
MIDI Port Setup ............................................................................ 101
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall ...... 103
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control .. 104
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes ............. 106
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) ....... 107
Other Functions ................................................. 109
Setting Preferences ......................................................................... 109
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels
(User Assignable Layer) ................................................. 110
Cascading Consoles ....................................................................... 111
Checking the Battery and the System Version .......................... 113
Calibrating the Faders ................................................................... 113
Index ................................................................... 115
Appendix: Parameter Lists .............................. 119
USER DEFINED KEYS ................................................................. 119
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments ............................. 121
Input Patch Parameters ................................................................ 121
Initial Input Patch Settings ........................................................... 123
Output Patch Parameters ............................................................. 125
Initial Output Patch Settings ........................................................ 127
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings ..................... 128
Effects Parameters ......................................................................... 132
Effects and tempo synchronization ............................................. 146
Preset EQ Parameters .................................................................... 147
Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ...................................... 148
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ......................... 149
Dynamics Parameters ................................................................... 151
Appendix: MIDI ............................................... 156
Scene Memory to Program Change Table ................................. 156
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table ............................... 157
MIDI Data Format ......................................................................... 173
MIDI Implementation Chart ........... End of Manual
Contents of the Owner’s Manual (Booklet)
The contents of the separate Owner’s Manual booklet are as
follows.
PRECAUTIONS
Welcome
Package Contents
About the included discs
About the included DAW software
About the utility software
Firmware updates
About this Owner’s Manual
Conventions Used in this Manual
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Control Surface
Rear Panel
Installing an Optional Card
Troubleshooting
Error messages
Contents of the Reference Manual
Specifications
General Spec
Libraries
Analog Input Spec
Analog Output Specs
Digital Input Spec
Digital Output Spec
I/O SLOT Spec
MIDI/USB/WORD CLOCK I/O Spec
Dimensions
Options
Rack Mounting the 01V96i Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit
Index
01V96i Block Diagram
01V96i Level Diagram
Operating Basics
About the Display
Selecting Display Pages
Display Interface
Selecting Layers
Selecting Channels
Selecting Fader Modes
Metering
Connections and Setup
Connections
Wordclock Connections and Settings
Input and Output Patching
Tutorial
Input and Output Patching
Setting the Input Levels
Pairing Channels
Setting the Routing
EQ’ing the Input Signals
Using the EQ Library
Compressing the Input Signals
Using the Internal Effects
Recording to DAW Software via the USB Port
Adjusting the Monitor Levels from the DAW
Using Scene Memories
Changing the Channel Names
Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels
(User Assignable Layer)
Using the Oscillator
Using the User Defined Keys
Using Operation Lock
Initializing
01V96i—Reference Manual
Contents of the Owner’s Manual (Booklet)
Contents of the
Owner’s Manual
(Booklet)
3
4
Function Tree
Function Tree
BUTTON
DISPLAY ACCESS
Page numbers in parentheses ( ) are the page numbers of the
Owner’s Manual (booklet).
BUTTON
SCENE
FUNCTION
DELAY
PAN/
ROUTING
27
OUTPUT
OUTPUT PAIR
33
IN FADER
INPUT FADER GROUP
59
IN MUTE
INPUT MUTE GROUP
59
OUT FADER
OUTPUT FADER GROUP
59
OUT MUTE
OUTPUT MUTE GROUP
60
IN EQ
INPUT EQUALIZER LINK
62
OUT EQ
OUTPUT EQUALIZER LINK
62
IN COMP
INPUT COMP LINK
63
OUT COMP
OUTPUT COMP LINK
63
IN MASTER
INPUT FADER GROUP
MASTER
61
OUT MASTER
OUTPUT FADER GROUP
MASTER
61
IN PATCH
INPUT PATCH
43
INPUT INS
INPUT INSERT IN PATCH
48
64
68
IN FADE
INPUT FADE TIME
71
OUT FADE
OUTPUT FADE TIME
71
RCL SAFE
RECALL SAFE
72
SORT
SORT
72
PASTE SRC
GLOBAL PASTE SOURCE CH
SELECT
73
EFFECT
PASTE DST
GLOBAL PASTE
DESTINATION SCENE
EFFECT INPUT/OUTPUT
PATCH
73
CASCADE IN
CASCADE IN PATCH
111
WORD CLOCK
WORD CLOCK SELECT
14
IN NAME
INPUT CHANNEL NAME
28
HIGHER SAMPLE RATE
DATA TRANSFER FORMAT
14
15
16
IN LIB
INPUT PATCH LIBRARY
75
OUT PATCH
SLOT OUTPUT PATCH
44
USB OUT
USB OUT PATCH
45
OUTPUT INS
OUTPUT INSERT IN PATCH
48
DIRECT OUT
DIRECT OUT DESTINATION
46
2TR OUT
2TR OUT DIGITAL PATCH
45
OUT NAME
OUTPUT CHANNEL NAME
35
OUT LIB
OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY
76
GATE EDIT
GATE EDIT
19
GATE LIB
GATE LIBRARY
79
COMP EDIT
COMP EDIT
20
COMP LIB
COMP LIBRARY
79
EQ EDIT
EQUALIZER EDIT
21
EQ LIBRARY
EQUALIZER LIBRARY
81
IN ATT
INPUT ATTENUATOR
20
OUT ATT
OUTPUT ATTENUATOR
30
FX1 EDIT
FX1 EDIT
66
FX2 EDIT
FX2 EDIT
66
FX3 EDIT
FX3 EDIT
66
FX4 EDIT
FX4 EDIT
66
FX1 LIB
FX1 LIBRARY
76
PREFER1
PREFERENCES 1
109
PREFER2
PREFERENCES 2
110
MIDI/HOST
MIDI/TO HOST SETUP
100
MONITOR
MONITOR
49
REMOTE
REMOTE
85
MACHINE
MACHINE CONTROL
98
SURR BUS
SURROUND BAS SETUP
54
CASCADE
CASCADE IN
ATTENUATION
112
OUTPUT ATT
OUTPUT PORT
ATTENUATOR
34
SETUP
MIDI SETUP
101
PGM ASGN
PROGRAM CHANGE
ASSIGN TABLE
102
CTL ASGN
CONTROL CHANGE
ASSIGN TABLE
104
BULK
BULK DUMP
107
OSCILLATOR
 /INSERT/
LINK
SCENE MEMORY
MIDI
UTILITY
LINK
PAGE NAME
INPUT PAIR
SCENE
FORMAT
DIO/SETUP
PAGE NAME
PAIR/
GROUP
FUNCTION
INPUT
OSCILLATOR
PATCH
DYNAMICS
EQ
(45)
CH STATUS
CHANNEL STATUS
MONITOR
14
BATTERY
BATTERY CHECK
113
FX2 LIB
FX2 LIBRARY
76
USER DEF
USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN
119
FX3 LIB
FX3 LIBRARY
76
LOCK
OPERATION LOCK
(47)
FX4 LIB
FX4 LIBRARY
76
PHASE
PHASE
18
P-IN EDIT
67
INSERT
INSERT
47
PLUG-IN EFFECT CARD
EDIT
DLY 1-16
INPUT CH1-16 DELAY
18
PARAMETER
PARAMETER VIEW
DLY17-32
INPUT CH17-32 DELAY
18
23
31
37
OUT DLY
OUTPUT DELAY
30
PAN
PAN
22
FADER
FADER VIEW
ROUT1-16
INPUT CH1-16 ROUTING
22
24
32
38
INPUT CH17-32
ROUTING/ST IN
LIBRARY
CHANNEL LIBRARY
75
ROUT17-STI
22
1-16 AUX
INPUT CH1-16 AUX VIEW
40
17-STI AUX
INPUT CH17-ST IN AUX
VIEW
40
EFFECT
BUS TO ST
BUS TO STEREO
31
SURR MODE
SURROUND MODE
53
CH EDIT
SELECTED CHANNEL
SURROUND EDIT
56
SURR1-16
INPUT CH1-16 SURROUND
58
SURR17-32
INPUT CH17-32
SURROUND
58
SURR ST IN
STEREO INPUT SURROUND
58
01V96i—Reference Manual
VIEW
Function Tree
5
BUTTON
AUX1–
AUX8
HOME
(METER)
FUNCTION
PAGE NAME
Function Tree
FADER MODE
LINK
SEND
AUX1–AUX8 SEND
38
PAN
AUX1–AUX8 PAN
41
VIEW1-16
INPUT CH1-16 AUX VIEW
40
VIEW17-STI
INPUT CH17-ST IN AUX
VIEW
40
CH1-32
CH1-32 METER
8
ST IN
ST IN METER
8
MASTER
MASTER METER
8
EFFECT
EFFECT1-4 INPUT/OUTPUT
METER
8
STEREO
STEREO METER
8
POSITION
METER POSITION
8
LAYER
BUTTON
FUNCTION
PAGE NAME
LINK
1-16
8
17-32
8
8
MASTER
REMOTE
USER DEFINED
94
ProTools
83
Nuendo
93
Cubase
93
General DAW
94
USER
ASSIGNABLE
LAYER
110
01V96i—Reference Manual
6
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Control Surface
AD Input Section (p. 7)
DISPLAY ACCESS
Section (p. 8)
SCENE MEMORY Section (p. 9)
CH1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CH5-8
12
13
15
14
16
CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
R
B
IN
INPUT
OUT
2TR
(BAL)
-10dBV (UNBAL)
PHONES
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
CH15/16
2TR IN
MONITOR
2TR IN
PAD
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
FADER MODE
Section (p. 8)
DIO/SETUP
SCENE
+4 GAIN -26
-60
-16
GAIN
13
0
LEVEL
+4 GAIN -26
PEAK
14 15
SIGNAL
PEAK
16
SIGNAL
SCENE MEMORY
MIDI
UTILITY
STORE
SOLO
RECALL
SOLO Section
(p. 9)
CLEAR
OVER
PAN/
/ INSERT/
ROUTING
DELAY
10
PHONES
Monitor Out
& Headphones Section (p. 7)
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
EFFECT
VIEW
0
-3
-6
EQ
DYNAMICS
Display Section
(p. 9)
FADER MODE
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
DEC
INC
-9
-12
-15
-18
Data Entry
Section (p. 9)
-24
-30
-36
HIGH
Q
-48
STEREO
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
SELECTED
CHANNEL
Section (p. 9)
HOME (METER)
LOW-MID
LAYER
LAYER Section
(p. 8)
ENTER
1-16
17-32
LOW
GAIN
MASTER REMOTE
ST IN
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5
5
10
5
15
10
5
15
20 10
10
10
5
15
20 10
5
10
5
15
20 10
5
15
20 10
5
15
20 10
5
15
20 10
5
15
20 10
5
15
20 10
5
15
20 10
5
15
5
15
20 10
5
15
20 10
5
15
ON
5
10
10
5
15
5
20 10
15
15
20
20
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
70
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
BUS 1
BUS 2
BUS 3
BUS 4
BUS 5
BUS 6
BUS 7
BUS 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ST IN Section
(p. 8)
STEREO
STEREO Section (p. 8)
Note: For details on the function of each item, refer to “Control Surface & Rear Panel” in the Owner’s Manual.
01V96i—Reference Manual
USER DEFINED
KEYS
16
17
AUX 1
Channel Strip Section (p. 7)
ON
ST IN 2
0
5
15
40
ON
ST IN 1
0
10
20 10
20 10
SEL
SOLO
0
10
10
SEL
SOLO
5
5
0
0
10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
20 10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0 +10
5
5
5
5
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
5
5
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
+10
SEL
USER DEFINED KEYS
Section (p. 9)
7
Control Surface
CH1-4
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
13
15
14
16
1
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
INPUT
(BAL)
INSERT
3
8
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
4
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
CH15/16
2TR IN
PAD
5
6
7
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
13
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
PEAK
14 15
SIGNAL
PEAK
16
SIGNAL
1 INPUT connectors A/B
2 INPUT connectors 13–16
3 INSERT I/O connectors
4 PAD switches
5 GAIN controls
6 PEAK indicators
7 SIGNAL indicators
8 AD15/16 selector
Monitor Out & Headphones
Section
CH5-8
CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
1
Channel Strip Section
1 [SEL] buttons
2 [SOLO] buttons
3 [ON] buttons
4 Channel faders
1
SEL
2
SOLO
3
ON
1
R
IN
5
OUT
2TR
-10dBV (UNBAL)
PHONES
2
+10
MONITOR
2TR IN
5
3
4
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
0
5
0
LEVEL
0
10
10
5
15
PHONES
1 2TR IN/OUT connectors
2 Monitor Source selector
3 MONITOR LEVEL control
4 PHONES LEVEL control
5 PHONES jack
10
20
15
30
20
40
30
50
40
60
70
50
4
1
17
AUX 1
01V96i—Reference Manual
Control Surface & Rear Panel
AD Input Section
8
Control Surface & Rear Panel
STEREO Section
DISPLAY ACCESS Section
1
SEL
1 [SEL] button
2 [ON] button
3 [STEREO] fader
1 2 3 4
2
DISPLAY ACCESS
ON
6
5
SCENE
DIO/SETUP
PAN/
/ INSERT/
ROUTING
DELAY
MIDI
UTILITY
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
EFFECT
VIEW
7
8
0
DYNAMICS
5
EQ
10
9 0 A B
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
3
STEREO
ST IN Section
1
ST IN
1 [ST IN] button
2 [SEL] buttons
3 [SOLO] buttons
4 [ON] buttons
5 Level controls
1 [SCENE] button
2 [DIO/SETUP] button
3 [MIDI] button
4 [UTILITY] button
5 [ /INSERT/DELAY] button
6 [PAN/ROUTING] button
7 [PAIR/GROUP] button
8 [PATCH] button
9 [DYNAMICS] button
0 [EQ] button
A [EFFECT] button
B [VIEW] button
2
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
3
4
ST IN 1
LAYER Section
ST IN 2
1 [1–16]/[17–32] buttons
2 [MASTER] button
3 [REMOTE] button
5
LAYER
1-16
17-32
1
MASTER REMOTE
2 3
Tip: The ST IN section is not affected by the layer settings.
FADER MODE Section
1 [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons
2 [HOME] button
1
FADER MODE
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
2
HOME (METER)
01V96i—Reference Manual
9
Control Surface
SCENE MEMORY Section
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Display Section
SCENE MEMORY
OVER
STORE
RECALL
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
2
1
-18
1
3
2
-24
-30
-36
-48
STEREO
3
5
4
6
1 [STORE] button
2 Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons
3 [RECALL] button
USER DEFINED KEYS
Section
1 Display
2 Stereo meters
3 Contrast control
4 [F1]–[F4] buttons
5 Left Tab Scroll [ ] button
6 Right Tab Scroll [ ] button
1 [1]–[8] buttons
SELECTED CHANNEL Section
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data Entry Section
1
3
trol
[GAIN] control
1
1
Tab Scroll arrow
1 [PAN] control
1
2 [HIGH] button
3 [HIGH-MID] button
4 [LOW-MID] button 6
5 [LOW] button
6 [Q] control
7
7 [FREQUENCY] con-
USER DEFINED
KEYS
DEC
INC
4
2
Q
HIGH
3
2
ENTER
HIGH-MID
4
FREQUENCY
LOW-MID
5
8
GAIN
LOW
1 Parameter wheel
2 [ENTER] button
3 [DEC] & [INC] buttons
4 Left, Right, Up, Down ([
]/[
]/[ ]/[ ]) cur-
sor buttons
SOLO Section
SOLO
1 [SOLO] indicator
2 [CLEAR] button
CLEAR
1 2
01V96i—Reference Manual
10
Control Surface & Rear Panel
Rear Panel
PHANTOM +48V (p. 10)
AD Output Section
(p. 10)
Power Section (p. 11)
MIDI/USB Section
(p. 10)
SLOT Section (p. 11)
PHANTOM +48V
3
Digital I/O Section
(p. 10)
2
Digital I/O Section
1
1 CH1–4 ON/OFF switch
2 CH5–8 ON/OFF switch
3 CH9–12 ON/OFF switch
1
2
3
4
1 WORD CLOCK OUT connector
2 WORD CLOCK IN connector
3 ADAT IN/OUT connectors
4 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL
5 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL
AD Output Section
MIDI/USB Section
1
2
3
1 MONITOR OUT connectors L/R
2 OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
3 STEREO OUT connectors L/R
1
1 MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports
2 TO HOST USB port
01V96i—Reference Manual
2
5
Rear Panel
11
Control Surface & Rear Panel
SLOT Section
1 SLOT
1
Power Section
1 POWER ON/OFF switch
2 AC IN connector
1
2
01V96i—Reference Manual
12
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Analog I/O &
Digital I/O
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s analog and digital
input/output connectors as well as the basic operations
involving the digital I/Os.
Analog Inputs & Outputs
Input Section
The 01V96i’s top panel features input connectors, which
enable you to connect microphone and line-level sources.
• INPUT connectors A 1–12
1
2
These balanced TRS-type
phone connectors accept
A
A
line-level and microphone signals. The nominal input range is
–60 dB through +4 dB. The phantom [+48V] switches on
the rear panel turn on or off the +48V phantom power
feed to these inputs.
• INPUT connectors B 1–12
B
B
These balanced TRS-type con- INPUT
nectors accept line-level and
microphone signals. The nominal input range is –60 dB
through +4 dB.
You cannot use same-numbered INPUT A and INPUT B
connectors simultaneously. (For example, you cannot use
INPUT A-2 and INPUT B-2 at the same time.) If you
connect cables to A and B connectors of the same number, only the signal from INPUT B is effective (e.g., B-2
takes priority over A-2).
(BAL)
• INPUT connectors 13–16
13
15
These balanced TRS-type phone connectors accept line-level signals. When
14
16
the AD 15/16 source selector is turned
on (pushed in), signals from INPUT 15
and 16 are ignored. Instead, signals from
the 2TR IN connector will be routed to AD Input Channels 15 and 16.
Tip: You can patch signals input from the INPUT connectors
to any Input Channels. (See page 43 for information on
patching input signals to Input Channels.)
• INSERT I/O connectors
These TRS-type phone connectors
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
are used to insert external devices,
such as effects processors, into AD Input Channels.
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
01V96i—Reference Manual
• Phantom Power
Inputs 1 through
12 feature switchable +48V phantom powering for use with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. The phantom
[+48V] switches on the rear panel turn on or off the +48V
phantom power feed to the corresponding inputs.
• PAD switches
PAD
Inputs 1 through 12 feature pad
switches, which attenuate input
signals by 20 dB. These switches
are effective on both INPUT A and B signals.
20dB
20dB
• GAIN controls
Inputs 1 through 16 feature
rotary gain controls that adjust
-60
-16
input sensitivity. Input sensitivity
GAIN
for INPUT connectors 1–12
ranges from –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off, and
from +4 dB to –40 dB when the Pad is on. Input sensitivity for INPUT connectors 13–16 ranges from +4 dB to
–26 dB.
GAIN
• PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators
PEAK
The SIGNAL indicator lights up
SIGNAL
when the input signal level at
INPUTs 1–16 exceeds –34 dB.
The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal level
is 3 dB below clipping.
• 2TR IN connectors
L
These unbalanced RCA phono connectors accept line-level signals from
R
devices such as CD players.
IN
OUT
When the AD 15/16 source selector is
2TR
-10dBV (UNBAL)
turned on (pushed in), signals input at
these conductors are routed to AD
Inputs 15 and 16. When the Monitor source selector is
turned on (pushed in), you can monitor these signals
from the MONITOR OUT connectors.
Digital Inputs & Outputs
The 01V96i top and rear panels feature output connectors
that enable you to connect a monitoring system, effects processors and other line-level devices.
• MONITOR OUT connectors L/R
These balanced TRS-type phone connectors output monitoring signals or
input signals routed from the 2TR IN
connectors. The nominal output level
is +4 dB.
Use the Monitor source selector in the Monitor Out &
Headphones section to select the signal output from these
connectors.
• OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
These balanced
TRS-type phone connectors output any Bus
Outs or Input Channel
Direct Outs. The nominal output level is +4 dB.
Tip: Any signal path can be patched to the OMNI OUT connectors. (See page 44 for more information on patching signals to the OMNI OUT connectors.)
• STEREO OUT connectors L/R
These balanced XLR-3-32-type
connectors output the Stereo Out
signals. The nominal output level
is +4 dB.
The 01V96i rear panel features digital input and output connectors that enable you to connect external digital devices.
Any signal path can be patched to these digital inputs and
outputs.
You can also add analog and digital I/Os by installing an
optional I/O card in the slot.
Digital I/O Connectors
• 2TR IN DIGITAL connector
2TR IN DIGITAL is an RCA phono connector
and accepts consumer format (IEC 60958)
digital audio. You can patch digital signals
input at this connector to any Input Channel
(page 43).
• 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector
This RCA phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC 60958) digital audio. You
can patch any Bus outs or Input channel
Direct Outs to this output (page 45).
• ADAT IN connector
This TOSLINK connector accepts 8-channel ADAT optical format signals, which can be patched to any Input
Channel (page 43).
• ADAT OUT connector
This TOSLINK connector outputs an 8-channel ADAT
optical format signal. You can patch any Bus Outs or
Input Channel Direct outs to this output (page 44).
L
R
IN
OUT
2TR
-10dBV (UNBAL)
SLOT
This slot allows you to install an optional mini-YGDAI
(Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O card. This card
offers AD/DA conversion, and various analog I/O options
and digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam.
You can patch signals input at these card connectors to any
Input Channels or Insert Ins (see page 43).
You can patch the card outputs to Bus Outs or Input Channel
Direct Outs (see page 46).
For details on the mini-YGDAI I/O cards that are currently
usable, refer to “I/O Slot Specifications” in the Owner’s Manual.
For the latest information about mini-YGDAI I/O cards, refer
to the Yamaha Professional Audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
01V96i—Reference Manual
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Digital Inputs & Outputs
Output Section
• 2TR OUT connectors
These unbalanced RCA phono connectors output line-level signals to a
connected recorder or other external
device. These connectors always output the Stereo Out signals.
13
14
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Converting Sampling
Rates of Signals Received
at I/O Card Inputs
An optional MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card features sampling
rate converters, so you can easily convert the sampling frequency of digital inputs to the current 01V96i sampling rate.
Monitoring Digital Input
Channel Status
You can view and monitor the Channel Status (sampling rate,
emphasis, etc.) of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR
Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button,
then press the [F2] button.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] but-
The Utility | CH Status page appears.
ton repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Format
page appears.
Use the buttons in the SRC sections to turn the sampling
rate converters on and off. You can turn the sampling rate
converters of the digital I/O card on or off in pairs (odd &
even channels, in this order).
1
2
3
4
5
6
On this page, use the following buttons to select a slot or
connector for which you want to view the channel status.
1 2TR IN
This button enables you to view the Channel Status of
input signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs.
Tip: The FS box on the Word Clock page displays the sampling frequency at which the 01V96i is currently operating.
Note: The sampling rate converter is available only on the
Yamaha MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card. If you have installed
another type of I/O card in the slot, or if no card is installed
in the 01V96i, the buttons in the SRC sections are disabled.
2. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to
any two-channel button in the SRC sections,
then press [ENTER].
The sampling rate converter for the selected 2-channel
input turns on or off. When on, the sampling rate of the
received digital audio is converted to the 01V96i’s current
sampling rate.
2 SLOT
These buttons enable you to view the Channel Status of
each two adjacent (odd and even, in this order) channel
signals connected to the digital I/O card installed in the
slot.
2. Move the cursor to the desired input or slot
button, then press [ENTER].
Channel Status information for the selected input is displayed. However, if a mini-YGDAI I/O card other than
AES/EBU format is installed, Channel Status information
will be grayed out. Channel Status information includes
the following items:
3 FS
Indicates the sampling rate. If no signal is being input, or
if the incoming wordclock is not synching to the internal
clock, “Unlock” appears.
4 EMPHASIS
Indicates the Emphasis on/off status.
5 CATEGORY
Indicates the status of “Category Code Bit” included in
the IEC958 Part 2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format. This
parameter can display the following values:
01V96i—Reference Manual
Dithering Digital Outputs
Description
Temporarily used
Laser Optical
Laser optical device
D/D Conv
Digital - Digital converter and
signal processing device
Magnetic
Magnetic tape device and magnetic disk device
D.Broadcast
Digital broadcast reception
Instruments
Musical instrument, microphone, and sources that generate string signals
A/D Conv
A/D converter (without copyright information)
A/D converter (with copyright
A/D Conv with (C)
information)
Solid Memory
Solid memory device
Experimental
Experimental device
Unknown
Unknown
Dithering Digital Outputs
When digital audio is transferred to lower-resolution systems,
truncated bits may generate unpleasant noise. To cancel the
audible effect of this noise, a small complement of noise is
intentionally added to the digital outputs. This process is
called “dithering.”
On the 01V96i, you can dither the 2TR Digital Outputs and
Slot Outputs. For example, you can apply dithering to the
01V96i stereo mix data and record to a 16-bit digital recorder.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Format
page appears.
The dithering settings are displayed at the bottom of the
page.
Note: “AES/EBU” appears in the Category row when you are
monitoring IEC958 Part 3 (AES/EBU-Professional) format
signals (that do not include Category Code Bit).
6 COPY
Indicates the status of copy protection information
included in the IEC958 Part2 (S/PDIF-Consumer) format signals. “OK” appears if copying is allowed. “Prohibit” appears if copy-protected.
3. If you select the SLOT
button for a slot that
has an MY16-AE card installed, use the 01–08
and 09–16 buttons located in the lower-right
corner of the screen to select a channel group
you wish to display.
2. Move the cursor to the output or channel to
which you want to apply dithering, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the value that
matches the resolution of the receiving
device.
Note:
• You cannot apply dithering to outputs or channels that are
set to “OFF.”
• Dithering is effective only when the resolution of the
receiving device is lower than that of the 01V96i.
Tip: To copy the currently-selected setting to all channels,
double-click the [ENTER] button. The copy confirmation
window is displayed.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Parameter value
General
15
16
Analog I/O & Digital I/O
Setting the Transfer
Format for Higher
Sampling Rates
To operate the 01V96i at higher sampling frequencies
(88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) and transfer digital audio signals to and
from connected external devices, you must set the data transfer format in accordance with the sampling frequencies supported by the external devices.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Word
Clock page appears.
2. Select INT88.2k or INT96k as the wordclock
source.
Note: When the 01V96i operates at a high sampling rate
(88.2 kHz or 96 kHz), only two internal effects processors are
available.
3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Format
page appears.
1
4. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to
an IN/OUT parameter field (1), then rotate
the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to set the data transfer format.
The IN/OUT parameters are used to set one of the following data transfer formats for each slot input and output.
• DOUBLE CHANNEL
In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received
and transmitted as mono signals at a sampling rate that is
exactly half (44.1/48 kHz) the current higher sampling
rate. Data is handled by two channels. This is useful when
you want to transfer data between the 01V96i operating at
a higher sampling rate and an external digital device that
supports 44.1/48 kHz.
Note: Double Channel mode reduces the total number of
inputs or outputs on the corresponding slot. The even-numbered channels are disabled.
01V96i—Reference Manual
• DOUBLE SPEED
In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and
transmitted at the current high sampling rate (i.e.,
88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). Select this mode if the devices that
support the higher sampling rates transmit or receive
data.
Note: You can select this setting only for slots in which a digital I/O card that inputs/outputs double-speed digital audio
data (e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed.
• SINGLE
In Single mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is half (44.1/48 kHz) the
current higher sampling rate of the 01V96i. For example,
this is useful when you want to receive 44.1 kHz digital
signals from an external digital device while the 01V96i is
operating at 88.2 kHz.
Note: You cannot select this setting for slots in which a digital
I/O card that inputs/outputs double-speed digital audio data
(e.g., MY8-AE96, MY8-AE96S) is installed.
Tip: The parameter fields display “–” if the slot contains no
I/O card or if an AD/DA card or other I/O card that does not
allow you to set the transfer format has been installed.
Input Channels
17
• LEVEL
This section enables you to adjust the input level of the
Input Channel signal.
This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96i’s Input
Channel parameters.
• PAN
This section enables you to adjust the pan setting of the
signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus.
You can also apply the pan setting to a pair of Bus channels.
About Input Channels
The input Channel section enables you to adjust the level and
tone of the signals input to the 01V96i (and the signals output
from the internal Effects processors 1–4), and route the signals to Buses 1–8, the Stereo Bus, and Aux Sends 1–8. There
are two types of Input Channels, each featuring slightly different functions: monaural Input Channels 1–32 and stereo ST
IN Channels 1–4.
Input Channels 1–32
INPUT PATCH
Each of these monaural Input Channels features a phase
effect, gate, compressor, attenuator, and EQ for signal processing. The following diagram illustrates the Input Channel
1–32 signal flow.
• AUX (Aux Send level)
This section enables you to adjust the level of signals
routed to Aux Sends 1–8. The signals can be routed to
Aux Sends from either the pre-fader or post-fader position.
• INSERT
This section enables you to patch input signals to external
devices via the on-board I/O connectors or I/O card, or
insert the internal effect processors. You can patch any
inputs, outputs, or I/O card channels. (Note that this is
different from the INSERT I/O connectors in the AD
Input section.)
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position
of the signal levels that are displayed in the Meter page.
For more information on selecting the metering position,
refer to “Viewing the Level Meters” in the Owner’s Manual (booklet).
ST IN Channels 1–4
•
(Phase)
This section switches the phase of input signals.
• GATE
This dynamics processor can be used as a gate or for
ducking.
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor,
expander or limiter. The compressor can be pre-EQ,
pre-fader, or post-fader.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level
of signals that will be input to the EQ. The attenuator
enables you to prevent post-EQ signals from clipping and
to correct signal levels that are too low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (high, high-mid,
low-mid, and low).
• INPUT DELAY (Input delay)
This section enables you to delay input signals. You can
use this delay to fine-tune the timing between channels,
or as a delay effect with feedback.
• ON (On/Off)
This section enables you to turn the channel on or off.
The channel is muted with the Off setting.
These stereo channels enable you to process stereo signals
using the phase effect, attenuator, and EQ. The following diagram illustrates the ST IN Channel 1–4 signal flow.
INPUT PATCH
Input Channels 1–32 feature the following parameters:
ST IN Channels 1–4 feature the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(Phase)
ATT (Attenuator)
4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
ON (On/Off)
LEVEL
PAN
AUX (Aux Send level)
METER
For more information on each parameter, refer to the preceding section Input Channel 1–32.
Tip: You can store these channel parameter settings in the Channel library. You can also store the Gate, Compressor, and EQ
parameter settings to the corresponding libraries.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Channels
Input Channels
18
Input Channels
Setting the Input
Channels from the
Display
Delaying Input Channels
To set the delay for each channel, press the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels appears.
To set the Input Channel parameters, you can either move the
cursor to the desired parameter on the display and change the
value, or operate the desired button or control on the top
panel to directly change the setting.
This section explains how to set the parameters via the display.
• DLY 1-16 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input
Channels 1–16.
• DLY 17-32 page
This page enables you to set the Delay function for Input
Channels 17–32.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for
setting them) are the same.
Switching the Signal Phase
To switch the phase of each Input Channel, press the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the following
/INS/DLY | Phase page appears.
Move the cursor to the NOR/REV button of the channel for
which you want to change the phase, then press the [ENTER]
or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the setting.
31
2
1 DELAY SCALE
2
1
1 NOR/REV
These buttons switch the corresponding Input Channel
phase. NOR buttons indicate normal phase, and REV
buttons indicate reversed phase.
2 GLOBAL
The GLOBAL NOR/REV buttons allow you to set the
phase for all Input Channels simultaneously.
Tip:
• The name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the
upper-right corner of the screen.
• You can set the phase separately for each of the ST IN Channels
or for each channel in a channel pair. If you selected the desired
ST IN Channel using the corresponding [SEL] button, pressing
the same [SEL] button repeatedly will toggle between channels
L and R.
•
•
•
•
•
The following buttons determine the units of the delay
value shown below the msec value.
meter ........................Units are set to meters.
feet ............................Units are set to feet.
sample......................Units are set to samples.
beat ...........................Units are set to beats.
frame........................Units are set to timecode frames.
2 GANG button
When this button is turned on (highlighted), the delay
time for each channel in a channel pair can be set simultaneously. When this option is turned off, the delay time
can be set for each channel in a channel pair individually.
3 Channel section
You can set individual delay parameters here. The delay
parameters include the following items:
• ON/OFF
This button switches the corresponding channel delay on
or off.
• msec
This parameter sets the delay time in milliseconds.
• meter/feet/sample/beat/frame
The delay time can be set using units of meters, feet, samples, beats, or frames, which you select by using the
DELAY SCALE buttons.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
• FB.GAIN
This parameter sets the amount of delay feedback.
Tip:
• This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
• The delay time range depends on the sampling rate at which
the 01V96i is operating.
• If you select the DELAY SCALE meter or feet button, the distance value can be converted to the delay time based on sonic
speeds (about 343.59 m/sec at 20 degrees Celsius). This option
is useful if you wish to correct the timing difference between
two sound sources that are far apart.
• If you select the DELAY SCALE beat button, a parameter box
for setting a note that represents the beat and a parameter box
for a tempo (BPM) setting appear below the DELAY SCALE
parameter. Setting the note and BPM settings in these parameter boxes enables you to set a delay time that synchronizes to
the song tempo.
2 STEREO LINK
This parameter’s ON/OFF button enables you to pair
gates for stereo operation even when the Input Channels
are not paired.
3 CURVE
This area displays the current gate curve.
4 TYPE
This area displays the current gate type (GATE or DUCKING).
Note: You cannot change the gate type on this page. To
change the gate type, recall a program that uses the desired
gate type from the Gate library.
5 Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-gate signals
and the amount of gain reduction.
6 ON/OFF
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input
Channel’s gate on or off.
7 PARAMETER
These controls enable you to set the gate parameters. (See
page 148 for more information on the parameters.)
Gating Input Channels
To set the Input Channel gates, use the [SEL] buttons to select
the desired Input Channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F1] button. The
Dynamics | Gate Edit page appears.
1
2
6
3
4 5
Tip:
• This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
• You can store the gate settings in the Gate library, which
features preset programs that can be used for various
applications (see page 79).
7
1 KEYIN SOURCE
Select one of the following buttons to determine the trigger source for the currently-selected Input Channel’s gate.
• SELF......................... The selected channel’s own input signal is the trigger source.
• CHANNEL ............. Another Channel’s input signal is the
trigger source. Select the desired
channel in the parameter box below
the CHANNEL button.
• AUX ......................... An Aux Send signal is the trigger
source. Select the desired bus in the
parameter box below the AUX button.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Channels
• MIX
This parameter sets the mix balance of dry (Input Channel) and wet (delayed) signals.
19
20
Input Channels
Compressing Input Channels
Attenuating Input Channels
To set the Input Channel compressors, use the [SEL] buttons
to select the desired Input Channel, then press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F3] button to
display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page.
To set the attenuator for each Input Channel, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then press the [F3] button to
display the EQ | In Att page.
1
2
6
3
4 5
7
1 POSITION
Use the Parameter wheel, or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the position of the compressor within the channel
from the following options:
• PRE EQ....................Immediately before EQ (default)
• PRE FADER ...........Immediately before the fader
• POST FADER ........Immediately after the fader
2 STEREO LINK
This ON/OFF button enables you to pair compressors for
stereo operation even when channels are not paired.
3 CURVE
This area displays the current compressor curve.
4 TYPE
This field indicates the compressor type used by the currently-selected channel’s compressor
(COMP/EXPAND/COMP (H)/COMP (S)).
Note: You cannot change the Compressor type on this page.
To change the compressor type, recall a program that uses the
desired compressor type from the compressor library.
5 Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the post-compressor
signals and the amount of gain reduction.
6 ON/OFF
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input
Channel’s compressor on or off.
7 PARAMETER section
These controls enable you to set the compressor parameters. (See page 149 for more information on the parameters of each compressor type.)
Tip:
• This function is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
• You can store the compressor settings in the compressor
library, which features preset programs that can be used
for various applications (see page 80).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Move the cursor to the knob for the desired Input Channel,
then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the amount of attenuation in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB.
Tip: You can also set the attenuation amount (in dB) for the currently-selected channel on the EQ | EQ Edit page.
21
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
The 01V96i’s Input Channels feature 4-band (LOW,
LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH) parametric EQ. The
LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are a peaking type of EQ.
The LOW and HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking,
or HPF and LPF respectively.
1. Press the [SEL] button of the channel for
These sections contain the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain
(G) parameters for the four bands. These parameter values range as follows:
Parameter
Q
which you want to adjust EQ.
2. Press the DISPLAY ACCEESS [EQ] button, then
press the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ
Edit page.
1
2
3
4
5
Frequency
Gain
LOW
LOW- HIGHMID
MID
HIGH
HPF, 10.0
to 0.10
(41 steps),
L.SHELF
10.0 to 0.10
(41 steps)
LPF, 10.0
to 0.10
(41 steps),
H.SHELF
21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz
(120 steps per 1/12 octave)
–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)1
1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter
on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respectively.
Tip:
• The LOW-band EQ functions as a high-pass filter when
the Q parameter in the LOW section is set to HPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set
to L.SHELF.
• The HIGH-band EQ functions as a low-pass filter when
the Q parameter in the HIGH section is set to LPF. It functions as a shelving-type EQ when the Q parameter is set
to H.SHELF.
3. Move the cursor to the desired parameter,
then rotate the Parameter wheel to change
the value.
6
The parameters on this page are described below:
1 EQ ON
The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input
Channel’s EQ on or off. You can press the [ENTER] button to turn the EQ on or off as long as the cursor is located
on any parameter other than TYPE.
2 TYPE
Tip:
• The EQ settings for the ST IN Channels L & R are linked
to each other.
• You can also press the buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary
controls to directly edit the Q, F, and G parameters (see
page 25).
• You can store the EQ settings in the EQ library, which features preset programs that can be used for various applications (see page 147).
Selects the type of EQ. TYPE I is the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha 02R series digital mixing consoles. The
TYPE II algorithm minimizes the interference between
bands.
3 ATT
Determines the amount of pre-EQ signal attenuation in
dB. It is the same Attenuator parameter that appears on
the EQ | ATT In page.
4 CURVE
This area displays the current EQ curve.
5 Meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the
currently-selected Input Channel and its available pair
partner.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Channels
6 LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH sections
EQ’ing Input Channels
22
Input Channels
Panning Input Channels
Routing Input Channels
Input Channels can be panned in the range of L63 through
CENTER to R63. To pan each channel, press the
[PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route |
Pan page appears.
You can route each Input Channel to the Stereo Bus, Bus 1–8,
or its own Direct Out. With the default setting, signals are
routed only to the Stereo Bus. However, you can patch signals
to a single or multiple destinations, if necessary.
1
2
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING]
button repeatedly until the page listed below
that contains the desired channels appears.
• ROUT1-16 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input
Channels 1–16.
• ROUT17-ST1 page
This page enables you to change the routing for Input
Channels 17–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
The parameters on these two pages (and the procedure for
setting them) are the same.
5
Move the cursor to the desired Pan control, then rotate the
Parameter wheel to set the value.
1 Pan controls
These knobs adjust the channel pan settings.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected
Pan control to center.
67
1
2
3
4
2 MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input
Channels are panned. There are three Pan modes as follows:
• INDIVIDUAL
In Individual mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate independently.
• GANG
In Gang mode, paired Input Channel
pan controls operate in unison, maintaining the current pan range.
• INV GANG
In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input
Channel pan controls operate in unison
but move in opposite directions.
Tip:
• You can adjust the pan setting for the ST IN Channels L/R separately.
• You can also adjust the pan setting for the Input Channels using
the PAN control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Surround Pan is available when the 01V96i is in Surround
mode. See page 52 for more information on Surround Pan.
8
1 PAN buttons
These buttons determine whether the channel’s Pan setting is applied to the Bus outs. In surround mode, they
also determine whether the Surround Pan setting is
applied to the Bus Outs.
2 Bus buttons 1–8
These buttons route the currently-selected Input Channel
to the Bus Outs. If the 01V96i is in Surround mode, the
button indicators change as follows, depending on the
selected Surround mode:
Bus buttons
1
2
3
4
Surround mode: 3-1
L
Surround mode: 5.1
L
Surround mode: 6.1
L
5
6
7
8
R
C
R
S
5
6
7
8
Ls Rs
C
E
7
R
Ls Rs
8
C Bs
E
8
L=Left, R=Right, C=Center, S=Surround, Ls=Left Surround
Rs=Right Surround, E=Low Frequency Effect, Bs=Back
Surround
The above table shows the default assignment. The actual
assignment may vary, depending on the settings on the
DIO/Setup | Surround Bus Setup page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting the Input Channels from the Display
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected
Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus.
4D
When this button is turned on, the currently-selected
Input Channel is routed to its Direct Out. See page 46 for
more information on the Direct Out.
5 ALL STEREO
This button turns on the S button for all channels on the
page.
6 ALL BUS
This button turns on the Bus buttons 1–8 for all channels
on the page.
7 ALL CLEAR
This button clears all routing assignments on the page.
Viewing Input Channel Settings
You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Input Channel on the View | Parameter or
Fader pages.
■ Viewing the Gate, Compressor, and
EQ Settings
To display the View | Parameter page for a specific Input
Channel, use the corresponding [SEL] button to select the
desired channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW]
button repeatedly.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons
or [ENTER] button to modify the setting.
4 3
8 SURROUND MODE
6 5
This field displays the current Surround mode.
Tip: The routings of the ST IN Channels L/R are linked. The D
button is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.
1
2
7
8
The following parameters are available (sections marked with
an asterisk (*) are unavailable for the ST IN Channels).
1 GATE section (*)
This section enables you to turn the gate-type dynamics
processor on or off and set the parameters. (See page 19
for more information.)
2 COMP section (*)
This section enables you to turn the compressor-type
dynamics processor on or off and set the parameters. (See
page 20 for more information.)
3 INSERT section (*)
This section enables you to turn the Insert on or off and
patch the Insert In and Out. (See page 47 for more information.)
4 EQ section
This section enables you to set various EQ parameters.
(See page 21 for more information.)
5 Meters
These meters indicate the signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel and its available pair partner.
6
(Phase) section
You can reverse the signal phase of the currently-selected
Input Channel. (See page 18 for more information.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Channels
3S
23
24
Input Channels
7 DELAY section (*)
3 BUS ROUTING/FOLLOW PAN section
This section enables you to set the currently-selected
channel’s Delay function. (See page 18 for more information.)
8 PAIR section (*)
This section indicates whether or not channels are paired.
The heart icon ( ) is in one piece when channels are
paired. The heart icon is broken ( ) when channels are
not paired. (See page 26 for more information.)
■ Viewing the Pan, Fader, and Aux
Send Level Settings
To display the View | Fader page of a certain Input Channel,
use the corresponding [SEL] button to select the desired
channel, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button
repeatedly.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons
to modify the setting.
1
2
3
4
5
• BUS ROUTING
This section enables you to select a destination Bus for the
selected channel. When the D button is turned on, the
channel signal is patched to the Direct Out selected in the
parameter box below the button. (The D button is
unavailable for the ST IN Channels.)
• FOLLOW PAN
This button determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan
setting is applied to the paired Bus Outs (Follow Pan
function). When the button is turned off, the Follow Pan
function is disabled and an identical signal is sent to the
paired Bus Outs. In surround mode, it also determines
whether the Surround Pan setting is applied to the Bus
Outs.
4 AUX section
• AUX
These controls set the currently-selected Input Channel’s
Aux Send 1–8 levels and positions. (See page 36 for more
information on Aux Sends.)
5 Meter section
• Meters
These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected
Input Channel.
• PRE EQ/PRE FADER/POST FADER
The metering position is displayed below the meters.
6 GROUP section
6
1 PAN/ON/Fader section
• PAN control
This control adjusts the currently-selected Input Channel’s Pan parameter.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Pan control to
Center.
• ON/OFF button
This button turns on or off the currently-selected Input
Channel.
• Fader
This parameter sets the fader position of the currently-selected Input Channel. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
Press the [ENTER] button to reset the Fader to 0.0 dB.
2 SURROUND PAN section
• SURROUND PAN
The Surround pan parameters for the currently-selected
Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode
is selected. See page 52 for more information on Surround pan.
01V96i—Reference Manual
• FADER/MUTE/EQ/COMP
These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp
group, if any, the currently-selected Input Channel is in. If
the channel is in a group, the group number appears. If
the channel is not in a group, “—” appears. (The compressor is unavailable for the ST IN Channels.)
Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface
25
3. Rotate the level control of the desired chan-
You can use the faders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons
and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the
top panel to directly control most parameters for Input Channels.
4. Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] con-
nel to set the level.
You can always view the
current channel level at the
top of the display.
trol to adjust the pan setting.
The pan setting can be applied to
either ST IN channel L or R. To
switch between channels L and R
for the pan setting, press the same
[SEL] button repeatedly. (The
channel currently being controlled is indicated in the
upper-left corner of the display.)
Setting Input Channel Levels
and Panning the Channels
■ Input Channels 1–32
1. Press the LAYER [1–16] or [17–32] button to
select a layer.
EQ’ing Input Channels
1. Press the [SEL] button or move the fader for
the channel you wish to control.
2. Press the [SEL] button of the channel for
which you want to adjust the input level
and/or pan settings.
3. Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels.
4. Rotate the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control to adjust the pan settings.
When you rotate the [PAN] control, the Pan/Route | Pan
page is displayed automatically.
2. To control EQ for the currently-selected channel, press one of the following buttons to
select the band you wish to adjust:
•
•
•
•
[HIGH] button...... HIGH band
[H-MID] button ... HIGH-MID band
[L-MID] button .... LOW-MID band
[LOW] button ....... LOW band
3. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the
Q, frequency, and gain of the band selected
in Step 2.
When the Auto EQUALIZER Display (page 109) check
box is on, the 01V96i displays the EQ/EQ Edit page.
■ ST IN Channels 1–4
1. Use the ST IN [ST IN] button to select the
desired ST IN Channels.
The indicators next to the [ST IN] button display the ST
IN Channels currently selected for control by the ST IN
section.
2. Press the [SEL] button for the channel for
which you want to adjust the level and/or pan
settings.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Channels
Setting the Input
Channels from the
Control Surface
26
Input Channels
If the check box is off, the parameter value currently
being adjusted pops up.
See page 21 for more information on EQ.
Pairing Input Channels
On the 01V96i, you can pair adjacent odd-even Input Channels or counterpart channels on Layer 1 and Layer 2 that share
the same physical fader. Faders and most parameters of paired
channels are linked for stereo operation. Paired channels’
linked parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available for independent control) are listed below:
Linked parameters
[SEL] buttons
Tip:
• Pressing and holding down the button selected in Step 2 resets
the corresponding band gain.
• Pressing the SELECTED CHANNEL [HIGH] and [LOW]
buttons simultaneously resets the Q, frequency and gain for
each band.
Non-linked parameters
Input patches
Faders
Insert patches
Channel on/off
Output patches
Insert on/off
Comp insert position
Solo on/off
Phase
Solo Safe
Delay on/off
Aux on/off
Delay time*
Aux Send level
Delay feedback
Aux Sends as Pre or Post
Delay mix
Gate
Routing
Comp settings
Pan, Follow Pan
EQ settings
Surround pan
Fader group
Aux Send pan
Mute group
Balance
Fade time
Attenuators**
Recall Safe
* You can set this parameter for each channel independently if the GANG button is turned off on the
/INS/DLY | DLY page.
** You can set this parameter for each channel independently on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages.
Note: You cannot pair an ST IN channel 1–4 with an Input Channel.
To pair channels, or to cancel channel pairs, you can use the
[SEL] buttons on the top panel or access the Pair/Grup pages.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Pairing Input Channels
27
■ Pairing Input Channels Using the
Display
1. While pressing and holding down the [SEL]
1. Press the [PAIR/GROUP] button repeatedly
button for one of the channels you wish to
pair, press the [SEL] button for the adjacent
channel. (The paired channel numbers
should be odd and even in this order).
until the Pair/Grup | Input page appears.
2
1
2. When the Pair Confirmation check box is on
(see page 109), the Channel Pairing window
appears.
The parameters on this page are described below:
Note: You can pair only channels that are adjacent, odd-even
(in this order) channels. Pressing the [SEL] button for a
non-adjacent channel will be ignored. You cannot create or
cancel a pair of vertical partners.
3. Move the cursor to the desired button in the
Channel Pairing window, then press [ENTER].
The following buttons are available in this window:
• CANCEL
Cancels the operation.
• CH x ➔ y
Copies the odd channel parameter values to the even
channel.
• CH y ➔ x
Copies the even channel parameter values to the odd
channel.
• RESET BOTH
Resets both channel parameters to the default settings
(same as when Channel memory #01 is recalled).
Move the cursor to the desired button, then press
[ENTER] to confirm the pair.
Tip: Pressing and holding down the first [SEL] button of the
paired channels and pressing the second [SEL] button cancels
the pair.
1 PAIR MODE
Determines how channels are paired.
2 STEREO/MONO x2 buttons
These buttons turn pairs on or off.
2. Move the cursor to the PAIR MODE parameter
field (1), then select the HORIZONTAL or
VERTICAL button.
The function of each mode is described below:
• HORIZONTAL
This button pairs adjacent odd-even channels (default).
• VERTICAL
This button pairs counterpart channels on Layer 1 and
Layer 2 that share the same physical fader (e.g., CH1 &
CH17, CH16 & CH32, etc.). This mode is useful when
you wish to use one fader to control both stereo channels.
When you switch the Pair Mode, the combinations of
channel numbers displayed on the page also change.
Note:
• When Pair mode is switched, only the channel numbers
change. The mix parameters of the paired partners do not
change.
• For example, if you change Pair mode from Horizontal to
Vertical, the Input Channel “2” indication changes to
Input Channel “17.” However, its parameters do not
change. (If Channels 1 and 2 have been paired, switching
the mode will pair Channels 1 and 17.)
3. Move the cursor to the desired channel’s
MONOx2 button (2), then press [ENTER].
The channels are paired.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Channels
■ Pairing Channels by Using the
[SEL] Buttons
28
Input Channels
4. To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the
desired channel’s STEREO button, then press
[ENTER].
Tip: You can also create or cancel a pair of Output Channels
in the same way on the Pair/Grup | Output page (see
page 33).
Naming Input Channels
By default, Input Channels are named CH1, CH2, etc. You
can change these names if desired. For example, it may be
helpful for mixdown if you name a particular Input Channel
with the type of musical instrument connected to the corresponding input jack.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Patch | IN Name page
appears.
1
3
2
You can specify Short names in the center column (1)
and Long (full) names in the right column (2).
When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on,
the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are
automatically copied to the Short name. On the other
hand, a newly-entered Short name is automatically added
to the beginning of the Long name.
You can reset all channel names to their default names by
moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
2. Move the cursor to a name you wish to
change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a
name.
3. Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library.
01V96i—Reference Manual
29
Bus Outs
This chapter describes how to adjust the 01V96i’s Stereo Out
and Bus Out 1–8 parameters.
Note: You can also patch the Stereo Out signals to other output
connectors or the I/O card by using the Patch | Out Patch pages.
About Stereo Out
The Stereo Out section receives Input Channel and Bus Out
1–8 signals, mixes them into two channels, processes them
using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the
STEREO OUT and 2TR OUT connectors. The following diagram illustrates the Stereo Out signal flow.
(Gain Reduction)
METER
(Out Meter)
METER
STEREO L
STEREO R
COMP
INSERT
ATT
METER
INSERT
OUTPUT
DELAY
4BAND
EQ
L
(-10dBV) [2TR OUT]
R
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
BAL
• METER
This section enables you to switch the metering position
of signal levels that are displayed on the Meter page or by
the stereo meter to the right of the screen.
For more information on selecting the metering position,
refer to “Viewing the Level Meters” in the Owner’s Manual (booklet).
DA
L
(+4dBu)
DA
R
Bus Out 1–8
The Bus Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from Input
Channels to the specified buses, processes them using
on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the specified output connectors or I/O card.
The following diagram illustrates the Bus Out signal flow.
[STEREO OUT]
(Gain Reduction)
METER
STEREO L
STEREO R
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
OUTPUT PATCH
INSERT
ATT
• INSERT
This section enables you to route the Stereo Out signals to
external devices via the on-board connectors or I/O card,
or insert internal effects processors.
• ATT (Attenuator)
This section enables you to attenuate or amplify the level
of signals to be input to the EQ. The attenuator prevents
post-EQ signals from clipping or corrects signal levels
that are too low.
• 4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
This parametric EQ features four bands (HIGH,
HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, and LOW).
• COMP (Compressor)
This dynamics processor can be used as compressor,
expander, or limiter. The processor can be located
pre-EQ, pre-[STEREO] fader, or post-[STEREO] fader.
• ON (On/Off)
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off.
• LEVEL
The [STEREO] fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels.
• Balance
This section enables you to adjust the level balance
between the L and R channels of the Stereo Out.
• OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
This section delays the output signals. It is mainly used to
fine-tune the signal timing.
(Out Meter)
METER
COMP
METER
INSERT
BUS 1(...8)
OUTPUT
DELAY
ON
PAN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
4BAND
EQ
LEVEL
BUS to STEREO
OUTPUT PATCH
Same as stereo master L
INSERT
ATT (Attenuator)
4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
COMP (Compressor)
ON (On/Off)
LEVEL
OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
METER
The parameters and sections listed above are identical to
those for the Stereo Out. For more information, refer to
the explanation of the Stereo Out.
• Bus to Stereo
Bus Out 1–8 signals are also routed to the Stereo Bus. In
addition to the ON, LEVEL, and other parameters, you
can also set the Send Level, On/Off, Pan, and other
parameters.
Tip:
• You can also pair adjacent odd-even buses for stereo operation
(see page 33).
• By default, Slot channels 1–8 and 9–16 and ADAT OUT channels 1–8 are patched to the Bus Out 1–8 outputs. However, you
can change this patching on the Patch | Out Patch page (see
page 44).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Bus Outs
Bus Outs
30
Bus Outs
Setting the Stereo Out
and Bus Out 1–8 from the
Display
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 parameters, you can
either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the display
and change the value, or operate the desired button or control
on the top panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the display.
Delaying the Stereo Out and
Bus Outs
To delay the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 signals, press the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.
Tip: Refer to “Input & Output Patching” on page 43 for more
information on how to set inserts.
Attenuating the Stereo Out and
Bus Out
To attenuate the Stereo Out and Bus Out signals, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then press the [F4] button to
display the EQ | Out Att page. On this page, you can attenuate
the Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8, and Stereo Out signals.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this
page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see
page 18).
Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page by pressing the
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button once, then press the [SEL] button
to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
Compressing the Stereo Out
and Bus Outs
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
To set the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 compressors, press the
[DYNAMICS] button, then the [F3] button to display the
Dynamics | Comp Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons to
select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display
2 TO ST ON/OFF
To set the EQ for the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 EQ, press
the DISPLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then press the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ Edit page, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Stereo Out or Bus Out 1–8.
3 TO ST Faders
These buttons turn on and off the Bus Out 1–8 to the Stereo Bus routing.
These faders set the Bus Out 1–8 to Stereo Bus levels.
Viewing the Stereo Out and Bus
Out Settings
You can view and adjust parameter settings for the currently-selected Stereo Out or Bus Out on the View | Parameter
and Fader pages.
■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ
Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding
[SEL] button to select the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F1] button.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 21). Note
that the Stereo Out does not feature the STEREO LINK
parameter.
Routing Bus Out 1–8 Signals to
the Stereo Bus
You can patch Bus Out 1–8 signals to Outputs and Slot, as well
as to the Stereo Bus. You can adjust the level and pan settings
of the signals routed to the Stereo Bus for each bus. This is
convenient when you wish to use Bus Outs (1–8) as a Group
Bus.
To patch the Bus Out 1–8 signals to the Stereo Bus, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly to
display the Pan/Route | Bus to St page.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels, except for the following items:
• The Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 Parameter pages do not
contain the Gate and Phase parameters.
• The Stereo Out Parameter page does not contain the Pair
parameter.
1
2
3
Move the cursor to the desired parameter you wish to change,
then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to modify the setting.
1 TO ST PAN
These controls pan the Bus Out 1–8 signals between the
left and right Stereo Out buses.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Bus Outs
EQ’ing the Stereo Out and Bus
Outs
31
32
Bus Outs
■ Viewing Faders and Other
Parameters
Bus Out (1–8) Fader page
12 3
45
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL]
button to select the desired bus, then press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F2] button.
The Fader page layouts for Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 are
slightly different.
Stereo Out Fader page
12
1 BUS ON/OFF
This button turns the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8)
on or off, and links with the [ON] (9–16) button in the
Master layer.
2 BUS Fader
3
This fader sets the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8) level,
and links with the fader (9–16) in the Master layer. The
fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
3 TO ST PAN
1 BAL
This control adjusts the level balance between the L and R
channels of the Stereo Out.
2 ON/OFF
This button turns the Stereo Out on or off, and links with
the [ON] button in the STEREO section.
3 Fader
This fader adjusts the Stereo Out output levels, and links
with the [STEREO] fader. The fader knob is highlighted
when the fader is set to 0.0 dB.
01V96i—Reference Manual
This control sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan position
for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8).
4 TO ST ON/OFF
This button turns on or off the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal for the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8).
5 TO ST Fader
This fader sets the Bus Out to Stereo Out signal level for
the currently-selected Bus Out (1–8).
Tip: The TO ST PAN, ON/OFF, and TO ST Fader parameters
also appear on the Pan/Route | Bus to St page.
Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface
You can use the faders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons
and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the
top panel to directly control certain parameters for the Stereo
Out and Bus Out 1–8.
Setting the Levels
Move the [STEREO] fader to adjust the Stereo Out levels.
Press the [ON] button in the STEREO section to turn the Stereo Out on or off.
To set Bus Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the
LAYER section to select the Master layer, then move faders
9–16. At this time, you can turn Bus Out 1–8 on or off using
the [ON] 9–16 buttons.
Pairing Buses or Aux
Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) buses or Aux
Sends for stereo operation. Paired bus and Aux Send linked
parameters and non-linked parameters (that are available for
independent controls) are listed below:
Linked parameters
Non-linked parameters
[SEL] buttons
Output Patching
Fader
Insert Patching
Channel on/off
Delay on/off
Insert on/off
Delay time**
Solo on/off
Bus to Stereo Pan*
Comp settings
Attenuators***
Comp insert position
EQ settings
Fader group
Mute group
Fade time
EQ’ing and Balancing the Stereo
Out and Bus Outs
Recall safe
1. Press the [SEL] button of the bus to which you
** You can set this parameter for each channel independently if the GANG button is turned off on the
/INS/DLY | DLY page.
*** You can set this parameter for each channel independently on the EQ | ATT page, but the paired channel settings are linked on the EQ | Edit and View pages.
want to apply EQ or set the level balance.
2. To adjust the EQ of the currently-selected bus,
select the desired band by pressing one of the
following buttons in the SELECTED CHANNEL
section:
•
•
•
•
[HIGH] button...... HIGH band
[H-MID] button ... HIGH-MID band
[L-MID] button .... LOW-MID band
[LOW] button ....... LOW band
3. Use the [Q], [FREQUENCY], and [GAIN] controls to adjust the Q, frequency, and gain of
the band selected in Step 2.
Bus to Stereo on/off*
Bus to Stereo fader*
Parameters marked with an asterisk * are available only for
Bus Out 1–8.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP]
button repeatedly until the Pair/Grup | Output page appears.
21
See page 21 for more information on EQ.
4. To adjust the Stereo Out Balance parameter,
use the [PAN] control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.
Note: If you select Aux Out 1–8 or Bus Out 1–8, the [PAN] control
is disabled.
The parameters on this page are described below.
1 STEREO/MONOx2
These buttons turn Bus or Aux Send pairs on or off.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Bus Outs
Setting the Stereo Out
and Bus Out 1–8 from the
Control Surface
33
34
Bus Outs
2 F.S
This button determines whether Aux Sends follow the
Input Channel Surround Pan when the 01V96i is in any
Surround mode other than “Stereo.” When this button is
turned on, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround
Pan. This is useful for feeding Surround signals to external Surround effects processors.
2. Move the cursor to the MONOx2 button for
the desired Bus or Aux Send, then press
[ENTER].
Attenuating Output
Signals
To attenuate the 01V96i’s output signals, display the EQ | Out
Att page and adjust the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 attenuators individually.
If necessary, you can also select Output and I/O card channels
and specify the amount of attenuation. This technique is convenient when you want to attenuate output signals quickly,
regardless of the source signal patching.
The buses or Aux Sends are paired.
3. To cancel a pair, move the cursor to the STEREO button for the desired Bus or Aux Send,
then press [ENTER].
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Output
Att page appears.
1
2
2. Move the cursor in the left column (1), then
scroll the list up or down using the Parameter
wheel to select the desired output or slot
channel for which you want to adjust attenuation.
The following outputs and slot channels can be selected:
• STEREO OUT L/R ................ STEREO OUT L & R
channels
• MONITOR OUT L/R............ MONITOR OUT L & R
channels
• OMNI OUT 1–4 ..................... OMNI OUT connectors
1–4
• SLOT OUT 1–1 through 1–16
..................... Slot channels 1–16
• ADAT OUT 1–8 ..................... ADAT OUT channels 1–8
• 2TR OUT DIGITAL L/R...... 2TR OUT DIGITAL L & R
channels
3. Move the cursor to the parameter value in the
right column (2), then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set
the amount of attenuation.
The amount of attenuation can be set from 0 dB to –9 dB.
Tip: To reset the attenuation amount of all Output Channels
to 0 dB, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then
press [ENTER].
01V96i—Reference Manual
Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs
35
Bus Outs
Naming the Stereo Out
and Bus Outs
You can change the default Bus names (BUS1, AUX4, STEREO, etc.). It may be convenient to name the buses “Monitor
Out” or “Effect Send,” for example, so that you can easily identify the signal type.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Patch | Out Name page
appears.
3
1
2
You can specify Short names in the center column (1)
and Long (full) names in the right column (2).
When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on,
the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are
automatically copied to the Short name. On the other
hand, a newly-entered Short name is automatically added
to the beginning of the Long name.
You can reset all bus names to their default names by
moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
2. Move the cursor to a name you wish to
change, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit
the name.
3. Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The new name is now effective.
Tip: The edited name is stored in the Output Patch library.
01V96i—Reference Manual
36
Aux Outs
Aux Outs
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from
the Display
This chapter describes how to control Aux Out 1–8.
To set Aux Out 1–8 parameters, you can either move the cursor to the desired parameter on the screen and change the
value, or operate the desired button or control on the top
panel.
This section explains how to set the parameters on the screen.
Aux Out 1–8
The Aux Out 1–8 section mixes signals routed from the Input
Channels to the corresponding Aux Sends, processes them
using on-board EQ, compressor, etc., then routes them to the
specified internal effects processors, output connectors or I/O
card connectors.
The 01V96i features eight Aux Sends, which can be used to
send signals to the internal and external effects processors
and monitors.
Tip: Refer to “Input & Output Patching” on page 43 for more
information on how to set inserts.
Attenuating Aux Outs
To attenuate Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the [EQ] button, then
press the [F4] button to display the EQ | Out Att page.
The following diagram illustrates the Aux Out 1–8 signal
flow.
(Gain Reduction)
(Out Meter)
METER
METER
INSERT
ATT
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
METER
INSERT
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
4BAND
EQ
OUTPUT
DELAY
AUX 1(...8)
OUTPUT PATCH
AUX 8
AUX 1
COMP
INSERT
ATT (Attenuator)
4 BAND EQ (4-band equalizer)
COMP (Compressor)
ON (On/Off)
LEVEL
OUTPUT DELAY (Output delay)
METER
These parameters are the same as the Stereo Out and Bus Out
1–8 (see page 29).
Tip: You can also pair adjacent odd-even Aux Sends (in this
order) for stereo Aux operation.
Note: With the default setting, Aux Out 1–4 are patched to OMNI
OUT connectors 1–4 and to internal Effects processors 1–4. However, you can change this patching on the Patch | Output page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display
37
EQ settings
To delay Aux Out 1–8 signals, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page appears.
To set the EQ for Aux Out 1–8, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[EQ] button, then press the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ
Edit page, then use the [SEL] buttons to select Aux Out 1–8.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this
page does not include the MIX/FB.GAIN parameters (see
page 18).
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 21).
Tip: You can also display the Out Dly page if you select the desired
Aux Out (1–8) by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button while
the DLY-related parameters are indicated on the page.
Comp settings
To set the Aux Out 1–8 compressors, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F3] button to
display the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, then select the
desired Aux Out 1–8 by using the corresponding [SEL] buttons.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels (see page 20).
Viewing Aux Out Settings
You can view and adjust the parameter settings for the currently-selected Aux Out on the View | Parameter and Fader
pages.
■ Viewing the Compressor and EQ
Settings
To display the View | Parameter page, use the corresponding
[SEL] button to select the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press
the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F1]
button.
The parameters on this page (and the procedure for setting
them) are the same as for Input Channels, except that this
page does not include the Gate and Phase parameters (see
page 23).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Aux Outs
Delaying Aux Outs
38
Aux Outs
■ Viewing Faders and On/Off
Parameters
To display the View | Fader page, use the corresponding [SEL]
button to select the desired Aux Out (1–8), then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button, then press the [F2] button.
Setting Aux Send Levels
You can adjust the level of signals routed from Input Channels
to the corresponding Aux Out (1–8).
Setting Send Levels from the
Display
You can view multiple channels’ Aux Send levels on the screen
and adjust them individually.
1. Press the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the Aux.
2. Make sure that the 01V96i displays the Aux |
Send page.
• ON/OFF
This button turns the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8)
on or off. It links with the corresponding [ON] (1–8) button in the Master layer.
This page enables you to adjust the level of the signals
routed from each Input Channel to the Aux selected in
Step 1.
If the Send page is not displayed, repeatedly press the button that you pressed in Step 1 until the Send page appears.
• Fader
This fader sets the currently-selected Aux Out (1–8) level.
It links with the corresponding fader (1–8) in the Master
layer. The fader knob is highlighted when the fader is set
to 0.0 dB.
Setting Aux Out 1–8 from
the Control Surface
You can use the faders, [SEL] buttons, and various buttons
and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section on the
top panel to directly control certain parameters for Aux Out
1–8.
Setting Levels
To set Aux Out 1–8 levels, press the [MASTER] button in the
LAYER section to select the Master layer, then move faders
1–8. At this time, you can turn Aux Out 1–8 on or off using
the corresponding [ON] 1–8 buttons.
EQ settings
To control Aux Out 1–8 EQ parameters, select the desired
Aux Out (1–8) using the corresponding [SEL] button or fader,
then use the buttons and controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. The parameters on this page (and the procedure
for setting them) are the same as for Input Channels (see
page 21).
01V96i—Reference Manual
• Aux Send rotary controls
These controls adjust the Aux Send level of the Input
Channels. The current numeric levels appear below the
rotary controls.
• PRE/POST
These buttons enable you to specify the Aux signal source
points. The PRE buttons send pre-fader signals, and the
POST buttons send post-fader signals.
• MODE
Aux Sends have two operating modes that determine how
signals are sent: Fixed (Aux Send levels are fixed); and
Variable (Aux Send levels are variable).
• GLOBAL
The GLOBAL PRE and POST buttons enable you to set
all Input Channels for the selected Aux to pre-fader or
post-fader simultaneously.
• PRE POINT
The PRE POINT PRE ON and POST ON buttons enable
you to set the pre-fader channels to pre-on (before the
[ON] button) or post-on (after the [ON] button).
Setting Aux Send Levels
4. If you switched to Fixed mode in Step 3, the
ON/OFF buttons turn each Input Channel on
or off for the currently-selected Aux Send.
3. Move the cursor to the FIXED or VARIABLE
button in the MODE section for the currently-selected Aux Send to select a mode.
• Fixed Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal
(0.0 dB). Also, channel ON/OFF buttons appear instead
of the Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons.
Note: In Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off parameters for paired
Input Channels are not linked to each other.
5. If you switched to Variable mode in Step 3,
the PRE/POST buttons and Send level rotary
controls enable you to adjust the signal
source points and Send levels.
• Variable Mode
In this mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal
source point can be either pre-fader or post-fader. Channel Send level rotary controls and PRE/POST buttons
appear on the screen.
You can turn each Input Channel on or off for the currently-selected Aux Send even in Variable mode. To do
this, move the cursor to the desired Send level control,
then press [ENTER]. (The rotary controls for Off channels are grayed out.)
Tip: You can select Variable or Fixed mode individually for
each of the eight Aux.
Tip:
• In Variable mode, Aux Send levels, Aux On/Off, and
Pre/Post parameters for paired Input Channels are linked
to each other.
• GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons enable you to set all Input
Channels simultaneously (including those not displayed
on the current page) to pre-fader or post-fader.
Note:
• In Fixed mode, all ON/OFF buttons are turned OFF.
• When you switch to Variable mode, the signal source
points are set to post-fader (PRE/POST buttons are set to
POST), and Send level rotary controls are reset to –.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Aux Outs
Note: In Fixed mode, Aux Send ON/OFF buttons appear
instead of the Aux Send rotary controls, PRE/POST buttons,
GLOBAL PRE/POST buttons, and PRE POINT PRE
ON/POST ON. These ON/OFF buttons turn on or off each
Input Channel for the currently-selected Aux Send.
39
40
Aux Outs
Note:
• Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the
effects processor) on the effects return channels.
• For example, by default, Aux 1 is routed to the input of the
internal Effects processor 1, and L and R of ST IN Channel
1 are patched to the processor’s output. Under these conditions, if you raise the level of the send signals from ST IN
Channel 1 to Aux 1, the signals are returned to ST IN
Channel 1, creating a signal loop and possibly damaging
your speakers.
Viewing Aux Send
Settings for Multiple
Channels
You can view and set parameters for all Aux Send 1–8, including setting levels and Pre/Post parameters.
This is convenient when you wish to visually check all Aux
Send settings or simultaneously adjust the levels of certain
channels routed to Aux 1–8.
1. Press one of the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX
8] buttons repeatedly until the page listed
below that contains the desired channels
appears.
• View1-16 page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels
1–16.
• View17-STI page
This page displays the Aux Send levels of Input Channels
17–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
These pages display the source Input channels and the
corresponding Aux Sends in a matrix. The parameters on
these two pages (and the procedure for setting them) are
the same.
2
1
3
1 DISPLAY
Use the following buttons to display the desired parameters.
• LEVEL......................Select the LEVEL button to display
Send level bar graphs for Input
Channels routed to Aux 1–8.
• PRE/POST ..............Select the PRE/POST button to display signal source points for Input
Channels routed to Aux 1–8.
2 FIX/VARI
These buttons indicate the Aux mode (Fixed or Variable)
for Aux Out 1–8 and are only for display purposes.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Panning Aux Sends
This field displays in dB the level of the Aux Send currently-selected by the cursor.
2. Move the cursor to either the DISPLAY LEVEL
or PRE/POST button, then press [ENTER] to
display the Level or Pre/Post parameters.
3. If you selected the PRE/POST button in Step
2, move the cursor to the desired Input Channel and Aux intersection, then press the
[ENTER] button to change the signal source
point.
Panning Aux Sends
You can pair adjacent odd-even (in this order) Aux Sends for
stereo operation. This enables you to pan signals from Input
Channels to paired Aux Sends.
1. Pair the desired two Aux Sends. (See page 33
for more information on pairing channels.)
2. Use the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select one of the paired Aux Sends.
3. Repeatedly press the button you pressed in
Step 2 to display the Aux | Pan page.
1
2
3
Note: You can switch between Pre and Post only for Aux
Sends that are set to Variable mode. The “FIX” indication
appears for Aux Sends that are set to Fixed mode, and you
cannot switch Pre/Post.
4. If you selected the LEVEL button in Step 2,
move the cursor to the desired Input Channel
and Aux intersection, then edit the Send level
or turn the currently-selected AUX Send on or
off.
Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to set the Send level, then press the [ENTER] button to turn the currently-selected Aux Send on or off.
One of the following indicators appears, depending on
the current Aux mode.
• Aux Sends in Fixed mode
A “FIX” indicator appears for On Aux Sends, and a dot
“ .” appears for Off Aux Sends.
1 Aux pan controls
These controls adjust the pan setting of signals routed
from Input Channels to paired Aux buses.
2 MODE
The MODE parameter determines how paired Input
Channels are panned.
3 INPUT PAN LINK
When this parameter is turned on, Aux Sends follow the
Input Channel Pan.
4. Move the cursor to the Aux pan control of the
• Aux Sends in Variable mode
The current Send levels are displayed by the bar graphs. If
the level is set to nominal (0.0 dB), “N” appears in the bar.
The bars for Aux Sends that are turned off are highlighted.
desired Input Channel, the rotate the Parameter wheel to set the pan value.
5. If necessary, move the cursor to the MODE
parameter box, then rotate the Parameter
wheel to select INDIVIDUAL, GANG, or INV
GANG, then press [ENTER].
If the INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button is turned off,
this Mode setting is independent of the Mode parameter
on the Pan page. (See page 22 for more information on
Mode options.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Aux Outs
3 LEVEL
41
42
Aux Outs
6. To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the
Aux Send Pan setting, move the cursor to the
INPUT PAN LINK ON/OFF button, then press
[ENTER].
The pan positions on the Pan page are copied to the Aux
pan setting, and the pan controls on both pages are
linked.
Tip:
• If paired Aux Sends are in Variable mode, the Aux Send
levels, Aux On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters for paired
Input Channels are linked to each other.
• If paired Aux Sends are in Fixed mode, the Aux On/Off
parameters for paired Input Channels are not linked to
each other.
Copying Channel Fader
Positions to Aux Sends
While Aux Sends are in Variable mode, you can copy all Input
Channel fader positions on one layer to the corresponding
Aux Sends.
This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians
monitor signals that have the same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals.
1. Press and hold down the copy source layer
(LAYER [1–16] or [17–32]) button.
Note: If you release the button in the LAYER section before
you proceed to Step 2, you will be unable to complete the Copy
operation.
2. Press one of the FADER MODE
[AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the
desired Aux Send copy destination.
The confirmation window for the Copy operation
appears.
3. To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER].
To cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the NO
button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired
with a vertical partner in another Layer, the fader position
will be copied to the partner’s Aux Send.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input & Output Patching
This chapter describes how to patch (assign) signal paths
within the 01V96i to its inputs, outputs, and slot channels
Input Patching
Follow the steps below to change the Input Patch.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Patch | In Patch page
appears.
Input Patching
Signals input at INPUT connectors 1–16, ADAT IN connector, 2TR IN DIGITAL connectors, and Slot I/O card are
patched to Input Channels for use.
Patch example:
Input Patching
INPUT connector 1
Input Channel 1
INPUT connector 2
Input Channel 2
INPUT connector 3
Input Channel 3
INPUT connector 4
Input Channel 4
INPUT connector 5
Input Channel 5
INPUT connector 6
Input Channel 6
INPUT connector 7
Input Channel 7
INPUT connector 8
Input Channel 8
By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:
Input Channels
Input connectors and Slot channels
1
Inputs, ADAT IN channels, TO HOST USB channels, and
slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes (1) below the
channel numbers. The parameter indicators are
explained below:
Parameter value
Description
–
No assignment
AD1–AD16
INPUT connectors 1–16
ADAT1–ADAT8
ADAT IN Input Channels 1–8
SL-01–SL-16
Slot Channels 1–16
FX1-1 & FX1-2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 1
FX2-1 & FX2-2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 2
1–16
INPUT connectors 1–16
17–24
ADAT IN Input Channels 1–8
25–32
Slot Channels 1–8
FX3-1 & FX3-2
ST IN Channels
1–4
Internal Effects Processor 1–4 Outputs
1–2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 3
FX4-1 & FX4-2
Outputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 4
2TD-L & 2TD-R
2TR DIGITAL IN (L/R)
USB1–USB16
TO HOST USB port input channels
1–16
You can change these patches, if you desire.
2. Move the cursor to an input patch parameter
you wish to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
modify the patching.
1
2
The long name of the currently-selected channel is indicated in the upper-right corner of the screen (1). Below
the channel name is the long name of the selected input
channel (2). (See page 28 for information on changing
channel names.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input & Output Patching
Input & Output
Patching
43
44
Input & Output Patching
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip:
• You can patch an input signal to multiple Input Channels.
• You can store the Input Patch settings to the Input Patch library.
Refer to “Libraries” on page 74 for more information.
Output Patching
Changing the Signal Path to the
ADAT OUT Connector, Slot, or
OMNI OUT connectors
Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to
the ADAT OUT connector, the optional mini-YGDAI card
installed in the slot, or the OMNI OUT connectors.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
The 01V96i’s Stereo Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8 signals
can be patched to any outputs, ADAT OUT output channels,
and slot output channels.
repeatedly until the Patch | Out Patch page
appears.
Each parameter box displays the currently-patched signal
path.
Patch example:
Output Patching
Aux Out 1
OMNI Out connector 1
Aux Out 2
OMNI Out connector 2
Aux Out 3
OMNI Out connector 3
Aux Out 4
OMNI Out connector 4
Aux Out 5
OMNI Out connector 1
Aux Out 6
OMNI Out connector 2
Aux Out 7
OMNI Out connector 3
Aux Out 8
OMNI Out connector 4
1
2
3
1 SLOT 1–16
By default, the following signal paths are patched to outputs,
ADAT OUT output channels, and slot output channels:
Output connectors and slot channels
Signal flow
ADAT OUT output channels 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
Slot Channels 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
Slot Channels 9–16
Bus Outs 1–8
OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
Aux Outs 1–4
2TR OUT DIGITAL (L)
Stereo Out L
2TR OUT DIGITAL (R)
Stereo Out R
Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple outputs.
• You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch
library. Refer to “Libraries” on page 74 for more information.
You can change these patches, if you desire. The procedure for
patching signals to output varies depending on the output
connectors and slots.
These parameter boxes set the routing of Slot Channel
1–16 signals.
2 ADAT 1–8
These parameter boxes set the routing of ADAT OUT
connector output channel 1–8 signals.
3 OMNI 1–4
These parameter boxes set the routing of OMNI OUT
connector 1–4 signals.
The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter value
Description
–
No assignment
BUS1–BUS8
Bus Out 1–8 signal
AUX1–AUX8
Aux Out 1–8 signal
ST L/R
Stereo Out signal
INS CH1–INS CH32
Input Channel 1–32 Insert
Out
INS BUS1–INS BUS8
Bus Out 1–8 Insert Out
INS AUX1–INS AUX8
Aux Out 1–8 Insert Out
INS ST-L/ST-R
Stereo Out Insert Out
CAS BUS1–BUS8
Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS AUX1–AUX8
Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS ST-L/ST-R
Stereo Bus Cascade Outs
CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR
Solo Bus Cascade Outs
2. Move the cursor to a patch parameter you
wish to change, then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
modify the patching.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Output Patching
Tip: You can store the Output Patch settings to the Output Patch
library. Refer to “Libraries” on page 74 for more information.
Patching the 2TR Digital
Outputs
Follow the steps below to change the signal path patched to
the 2TR OUT DIGITAL connector.
Patching the USB Outputs
By default, the following output signals are assigned to USB
OUT.
Outputs
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Patch | 2TR Out page
appears.
Signals
USB OUT1–8
Bus Out 1–8 signals
USB OUT9–16
Bus Out 1–8 signals
If you want to change or verify this patching, proceed as follows.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Patch | USB Out page
appears.
Signals assigned on the Out Patch page can also be
assigned on this page.
2. Move the cursor to a patch parameter you
wish to change, then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
modify the patching.
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
The parameter boxes underneath each number indicate
the currently-assigned signal routing. The meaning of
these indicators are explained below.
Parameter value
Description
–
No assignment
BUS1–BUS8
Bus Out 1–8 signals
AUX1–AUX8
Aux Out 1–8 signals
ST L/R
Stereo Out signals
INS CH1–INS CH32
Input Channels 1–32 Insert
Outs
INS BUS1–INS BUS8
Bus Out 1–8 Insert Outs
INS AUX1–INS AUX8
Aux Out 1–8 Insert Outs
INS ST-L/ST-R
Stereo Out Insert Outs
2. Move the cursor to a parameter box, and use
the Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC]) to
modify the patching.
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input & Output Patching
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
45
46
Input & Output Patching
Patching Direct Outs
Input Channel 1–32 signals can be directly patched to any
outputs or slot outputs, as well as Bus Out 1–8 and Stereo Out.
This patching is convenient when you want to record the
input signal of each Input Channel to an individual track on a
connected DAW.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
repeatedly until the Patch | Direct Out page
appears.
4. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING]
button repeatedly until one of the following
pages containing the channels you want to
patch to the Direct Out appears.
• Rout1-16 page........This page enables you to change the
Input Channel 1–16 routings.
• Rout17-STI page...This page enables you to change the
Input Channels 17–32 and ST IN
Channel 1–4 routings.
Tip: Refer to page 22 for more information on these pages.
5. Move the cursor to the D button for the channel you want to patch to the Direct Out, then
press [ENTER].
The Direct Out patching is now effective, and the signals
are routed to the assigned outputs, ADAT OUT channels,
or slot output channels.
1
2
The parameters on this page are described below.
1 1–32
These boxes indicate the Direct Out destination (outputs,
ADAT OUT output channels, and slot output channels)
for Input Channels 1–32.
2 DIRECT OUT
Determines the Direct Out signal source position from
the following three options:
• PRE EQ....................Immediately before Input Channel
EQ
• PRE FADER ...........Immediately before Input Channel
fader
• POST FADER ........Immediately after Input Channel
fader
2. Move the cursor to a patch parameter (1–32)
you want to change, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons
to select the destination.
If necessary, specify the signal source position using the
DIRECT OUT parameter.
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Note: If you select a destination that is already used by an
Output Patch setting and turn on the Direct Out, the Output
Patch setting will be disabled. To restore the Output Patch setting, select another Direct Out destination or turn off the
Direct Out.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Insert Patching
This page contains the following parameters:
1 POSITION
The 01V96i’s Input Channels and Output Channels (Stereo
Out, Bus Out 1–8, Aux Out 1–8) feature independent Insert
Ins and Outs. Inputs, outputs, ADAT connector channels, slot
channels, and internal effects processor inputs and outputs
can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins and Outs. In
this way, you can send the signals to external effects processors for processing, or insert internal effects.
Individual Insert Patching
You can patch the 01V96i’s inputs, outputs, ADAT connector
channels, slot channels, and effects processor inputs and outputs to the Insert Ins and Outs. The same procedure applies
to both Input Channels and Output Channels.
Effects
This parameter determines the insert position of the
Insert patch or compressor. The insert position is indicated by highlighted COMP or INSERT buttons.
2 INSERT section
• ON/OFF
This button turns the Insert on or off.
• OUT
This parameter enables you to select outputs, ADAT
OUT channels, slot output channels, or internal effects
inputs as the Insert Out destination.
• IN
This parameter enables you to select inputs, ADAT IN
channels, slot input channels, or internal effects outputs
as the Insert In source.
3 COMP section
Input
Output
Output connector
• ON/OFF
This button turns the compressor on or off.
Input connector
Insert Out
Insert In
• ORDER
This parameter determines the order of Insert patch and
compressor when they are inserted at the same signal
path point. With the “COMP → INS” setting, signals pass
through the compressor first, then the Insert. With the
“INS → COMP” setting, signals pass through the Insert
first, then the compressor.
3. Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box,
Channel
1. Press the [SEL] button of an Input Channel or
Output Channel for Insert patching.
2. Press the [
/INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until the /INS/DLY | Insert page
appears.
1
then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired outputs, slot channels, or internal effects inputs
to be patched to Insert Out.
The parameter indicators are explained below:
Parameter values
Description
–
No assignment
ADAT 1–ADAT 8
ADAT OUT Output Channels 1–8
SL-01–SL-16
Slot Channels 1–16
OMNI1–OMNI4
OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
2TD-L/2TD-R
2TR OUT DIGITAL (L/R)
FX1-1/FX1-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 1
FX2-1/FX2-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 2
FX3-1/FX3-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 3
FX4-1/FX4-2
Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects
Processor 4
USB1–USB16
TO HOST USB port output channels 1–16
4. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
2
3
If you move the cursor to another parameter box or display another page before you press the [ENTER] button,
all settings on this page will be cancelled.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input & Output Patching
Insert Patching
47
48
Input & Output Patching
5. Move the cursor to the desired IN parameter
box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or
press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the
inputs, ADAT IN channels, or slot input channels to be patched to the Insert In.
Refer to the explanation regarding the Input Patch for
more information on the parameter values (see page 43).
6. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
Tip: Move the cursor to an empty OUT or IN parameter box
and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select window
appears. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the cursor buttons to select an item to be patched, then press [ENTER].
Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. The
selected item is now patched.
Viewing and Changing Insert In
Patch
You can view and also change the items patched to the Insert
Ins of all Input Channels (or all Output Channels). This is
useful when you wish to find out if multiple channels have the
same patch.
1. To view the Input Channels’ Insert Ins, press
the [PATCH] button repeatedly until the
Patch | Input Ins page appears.
This page displays Input Channels 1–32 Insert In Patches.
7. To enable the specified Insert patch, move
the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the
INSERT section, and press [ENTER] to turn it
on or off.
2. Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to modify the patching.
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
4. To view the Output Channels’ Insert Ins, press
the [PATCH] button repeatedly until the
Patch | Output Ins page appears.
5. Move the cursor to a channel patch parameter box you wish to change, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to modify the patching.
6. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.
01V96i—Reference Manual
49
Monitoring
Monitor and Solo Setup
This chapter explains how to set up monitoring and use the
Solo function on the 01V96i.
For monitoring and solo setup, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Monitor page appears.
5
1
6
2
3
4
Monitor
STEREO L
STEREO R
SOLO L
SOLO R
The 01V96i features the stereo signal path to feed the monitors. The monitoring signal source is patched to MONITOR
OUT connectors L & R and the PHONES connector.
The following diagram illustrates the monitoring signal flow.
SOLO TRIM
SOLO L
SOLO R
[2TR IN]
L
RCA R
8
8
MONITOR
/2TR IN
MONITOR TRIM
MONO
SOLO LOGIC
OUTPUT SOLO
BUS1-8
AUX1-8
MONITOR OUT
LEVEL
DA
L
[MONITOR OUT]
DA
R
PHONES
LEVEL
[PHONES]
7
• SOLO bus
This special bus routes soloed Input Channels to the
Monitor outputs, bypassing Bus 1–8 and the Stereo Bus.
• OUTPUT SOLO
This section routes soloed Output Channels (Aux Out
1–8, Bus Out 1–8) to the Monitor outputs.
Note: Input and Output Channels cannot be solo-monitored
simultaneously. The solo function for the most-recently
soloed channels is enabled.
• MONITOR TRIM
This section adjusts the monitoring signal level in the digital domain.
• MONITOR OUT LEVEL
Use the MONITOR [MONITOR OUT] control on the
top panel to adjust the monitoring signal level in the analog domain.
• MONITOR/2TR IN
As a monitoring signal, you can select either the 01V96i
internal signals or 2TR IN digital inputs.
• PHONES
The Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack. You
can set the level independently.
8
9
This page contains the following parameters:
1 SOLO
This parameter turns the Solo function on or off. By
default, it is set to Enabled.
2 MODE
This parameter determines how the Solo function works.
There are two options. The setting affects only Input
Channels.
• RECORDING
In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals
are fed to the Solo bus and output via the Monitor outputs. Other buses (Stereo bus and Bus 1–8) are unaffected
by this mode.
• MIXDOWN
In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are
fed to the Stereo bus and output via the Monitor outputs.
Unsoloed Input Channels are not fed to the Stereo bus
while the Solo function is enabled.
Tip:
• Recording Solo mode is convenient when you wish to monitor certain Input Channels while recording, since the Stereo bus and Bus 1–8 signals are unaffected.
• Mixdown Solo mode is useful when you wish to mute
unsoloed Input Channels and feed soloed Input Channel
signals to the Stereo bus during mixdown.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Monitoring
Monitoring
50
Monitoring
3 SEL MODE
This parameter determines how the Input Channels will
be soloed when you press the [SOLO] button of each
Channel. There are two options.
• MIX SOLO
In Mix Solo mode, any number of channels can be soloed
simultaneously.
• LAST SOLO
In Last Solo mode, only one channel can be soloed at a
time by pressing the [SOLO] button. The Solo function
that was previously enabled for channels is automatically
cancelled.
Using the Monitor
1. Connect a monitoring system to the MONITOR OUT connectors.
To monitor the signal via headphones, connect headphones to the PHONES jack.
2. Press the Monitor Source selector in the
MONITOR section to select the monitoring
signal source.
PHONES
4 LISTEN
This parameter determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or Post Pan. When Pre Fader is
selected, turning on the PAN button below the Pre Fader
option will solo the channel with the pan position specified by the Pan setting even if the source precedes the
fader. This parameter is effective only in Recording Solo
mode.
5 SOLO TRIM
This parameter enables you to trim the level of the Solo
signal in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB.
6 FADER/SOLO RELEASE
If this check box is checked, you can unsolo the channels
by raising the channel faders that were at the level of –
when the Solo function was turned on. If the faders were
set to higher than –, the channels cannot be soloed. This
setting is not effective in Mixdown Solo mode and for
Output Channels.
Note: When you check the FADER/SOLO RELEASE check
box, the Solo setting is temporarily cancelled.
7 SOLO SAFE CHANNEL
For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be configured individually so that they are not muted when other
Input Channels are soloed (Solo Safe function). Signals
from Input Channels with the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL
button turned on are always fed to the Stereo bus, regardless of the channels’ Solo function status. You can clear all
Solo Safe settings by turning on the ALL CLEAR button.
Tip: For example, if you set the internal effects processor’s
return signal to Solo Safe, you can monitor the soloed “processed (or wet)” signals.
8 MONITOR TRIM
This parameter enables you to trim the level of the monitoring signal in the range of –96 dB to +12 dB.
9 MONO
This button switches the Monitor signal into mono.
01V96i—Reference Manual
MONITOR
2TR IN
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
0
LEVEL
10
PHONES
To monitor the 01V96i’s internal signals, turn off the
selector (the button should be raised). To monitor the signals at the 2TR IN connectors, turn on the selector (the
button should be pushed in).
3. Adjust the monitoring level using the MONITOR [MONITOR LEVEL] control while playing
the sound sources.
To adjust the level of the monitoring signal via headphones, turn the [PHONES LEVEL] control.
Using the Solo Function
51
Monitoring
Using the Solo Function
You can solo and monitor Input Channels, Aux Out 1–8, and
Bus Out 1–8 using the [SOLO] buttons on the top panel.
1. Press the [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly
until the DIO/Setup | Monitor page appears.
2. Set the SOLO parameter to On.
Set other parameters on the page, if necessary.
3. To solo and monitor Input Channels, press
the corresponding LAYER button to select a
Layer that contains the desired channels,
then press the channel [SOLO] buttons.
The channel [SOLO] button indicators and the SOLO
[SOLO] indicator light up. Only the soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Monitor outputs.
Tip: If the SEL MODE parameter is set to Mix Solo on the
DIO/Setup | Monitor page, you can solo multiple Channels
simultaneously.
4. To solo and monitor Output Channels, press
the LAYER [MASTER] button, then press the
channel [SOLO] buttons.
Input and Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8)
cannot be solo-monitored simultaneously. For example, if
you solo an Input Channel, then solo an Output Channel,
the first solo channel is cancelled.
If you solo an Output Channel first, then solo an Input
Channel, canceling the Input Channel’s solo will activate
the Output Channel’s solo.
5. You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing all illuminated channel [SOLO] buttons.
The button indicators turn off. You can also unsolo all
soloed channels by pressing the SOLO [CLEAR] button.
01V96i—Reference Manual
52
Surround Pan
Surround Pan
• 5.1
This mode uses six channels that include front left, front
right, rear left, rear right, front center, and subwoofer.
Subwoofer
This chapter describes surround panning, which determines
how Input Channel signals are panned within and across the
stereo field.
Front L
Center
Front R
About Surround Pan
The Surround Pan function places a sound image within a
two-dimensional field using a multi-channel playback system, and pans the image to the front, rear, left, and right in
relation to the listening position. To pan the stereo image, you
can use the Parameter wheel, or [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
If each channel’s follow pan (see page 24) is turned off, you
can route the signals to the corresponding Bus Outs regardless of the Surround Pan setting. This is convenient when you
wish to assign the surround source or surround effect returns
to the Buses.
If “Nominal Pan” (see page 109) in the Prefer1 page is
checked, the level of the Input Channels that are panned hard
left or right will be used as the nominal level. If the check box
is not checked, the nominal level will be +3 dB.
You can also store the surround pan settings in a Scene. In
addition to a normal Stereo mode, the 01V96i features the following three Surround modes:
Rear L
Rear R
• 6.1
This mode uses seven channels that include six channels
of 5.1 mode plus rear center.
Subwoofer
Front L
Center
Front R
Rear L
Rear center
Rear R
• 3-1
This mode uses four channels that include front left, front
right, front center, and rear.
Front L
Center
Front R
Surround
When you select one of these Surround modes, each surround channel signal is output as the Bus Out signal specified on the
DIO/Setup | Surr Bus page (see page 54).
The following table shows the factory-default Surround Channel to Bus Out assignment in each Surround mode.
Surround Mode
3-1
5.1
6.1
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
L
R
C
S
Front left
Front right
Center
Surround
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
—
—
—
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
LFE
Front left
Front right
Rear left
Rear right
Center
Subwoofer
—
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
Bs
LFE
Front left
Front right
Rear left
Rear right
Center
Rear center
Subwoofer
Tip: You can set the surround pan either independently of normal panpots or in unison with them.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes
• 3-1 Surround
Surround Pan
Setting Up and Selecting
Surround Pan Modes
53
To configure the surround environment, select 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1
Surround mode on the 01V96i and connect a DAW or
multi-channel monitoring system to the 01V96i.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING]
button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Surr
Mode page appears.
1
• 5.1 Surround
2
• 6.1 Surround
3
1 SURROUND MODE
•
•
•
•
This parameter enables you to select a Surround mode by
using the following buttons. The button that is turned on
(highlighted) indicates the currently-selected Surround
mode.
STEREO.................. The 01V96i uses normal stereo
mode (default).
3-1............................. Selects 3-1 Surround mode.
5.1 ............................. Selects 5.1 Surround mode.
6.1 ............................. Selects 6.1 Surround mode.
3. Press the [ENTER] button.
The confirmation window for changing the Surround
mode appears.
2 PAN/SURR LINK
When this button is turned on, Input Channel panpots
and stereo surround panning are linked.
3
Press this button to display the Surr/Bus Setup page,
which enables you to change the Surround Channel to
Bus Out assignment.
4. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press
[ENTER].
The 01V96i enters the selected Surround mode.
2. Move the cursor to the Surround mode button you want to use.
When you move the cursor to one of these buttons,
speaker icons appear, indicating a typical listening position and the Surround Channel to Bus Out configuration.
5. To link the Input Channel Pan setting with the
stereo surround panning, move the cursor to
the PAN/SURR LINK button, then press
[ENTER].
When the PAN/SURR LINK button is turned on, adjusting the Input Channel pan settings will also change the
stereo surround panning accordingly, and vice versa.
6. To change the Surround Channel to Bus Out
assignment, move the cursor to the
SURR/BUS SETUP button, then press [ENTER].
01V96i—Reference Manual
54
Surround Pan
3 Surround LR to Stereo
The DIO/Setup | Surr Bus page appears.
3
1
When this check box is on, the left and right front signals
of the surround channels are output from the STEREO
L/R connectors.
2
7. To change the assignment, move the cursor
to the desired Bus parameter, rotate the
Parameter wheel to select a channel, then
press [ENTER].
The channels are swapped between the selected Bus and
the Bus to which the channel assigned to the selected Bus
was assigned previously.
Tip:
• Pressing the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button repeatedly also displays the Surr Bus page.
• Available Bus Outs vary depending on the Surround
mode. For example, in 3-1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–4
are available. In 5.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–6 are
available, and in 6.1 Surround mode, Bus Outs 1–7 are
available.
1 BUS1–BUS8
These parameters select channels to be assigned to the
Bus Outs in 3-1, 5.1, and 6.1 Surround modes.
8. Depending on the selected Surround mode
2 INIT
or applications, patch the Bus Out signals to
the outputs, ADAT OUT channels, or slot output channels. Connect a playback device or
MTR to the output connectors.
These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default
setting.
■ Surround Pan Recording
To record surround pan movement to a DAW, patch the corresponding bus outs to the TO HOST USB port’s output channels, sending them to the DAW’s tracks.
The following diagram illustrates an example of recording each channel’s signal into a DAW when using 5.1 Surround mode.
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 1
BUS1 (L)
BUS2 (R)
BUS3 (Ls)
BUS4 (Rs)
BUS5 (C)
BUS6 (LFE)
01V96i
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 2
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 3
LFE LEVEL
USB
USB 1
USB 2
USB 3
USB 4
USB 5
USB 6
01V96i—Reference Manual
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
DAW
Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes
55
To monitor surround pan movement, patch the Bus Outs to the analog outputs, to which a monitoring system is connected.
The following diagram illustrates an example in which Bus Out 1/2 (left and right front channel) signals are output from the STEREO OUT L/R connectors and Bus Out 3–6 signals are output from the OMNI OUT 1–4 connectors in 5.1 Surround mode.
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 1
BUS1 (L)
BUS2 (R)
BUS3 (Ls)
BUS4 (Rs)
BUS5 (C)
BUS6 (LFE)
01V96i
Subwoofer
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 2
Front L
Center
Front R
LFE LEVEL
SURROUND
PAN
Input Channel 3
LFE LEVEL
STEREO OUT L
STEREO OUT R
OMNI OUT 1
OMNI OUT 2
OMNI OUT 3
OMNI OUT 4
Front L
Front R
Rear L
Rear R
Multi-channel
amplifier
Center
Subwoofer
Rear L
Rear R
Tip: To output left and right front signals of the surround channels from the STEREO OUT L/R connectors, turn on the Surround LR to Stereo
checkbox on the Surr Bus page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Surround Pan
■ Surround Pan Monitoring
56
Surround Pan
Surround Panning
• OFFSET
You can set the surround pan parameters for each Input
Channel.
............This parameter offsets the
left-to-right direction of the selected
trajectory pattern.
• OFFSET
............This parameter offsets the
front-to-rear direction of the
selected trajectory pattern.
1. Make sure that the 01V96i is in any Surround
mode except Stereo, then press the [SEL] button of the channel for which you want to set
surround pan.
2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING]
button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Ch
Edit page appears.
The Ch Edit page displays the selected Input Channel,
and its surround pan setting and available pair partner.
The following display page is an example in 6.1 Surround
mode.
2 3
1
5 LFE
This parameter control sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel signal routed to the subwoofer,
and appears only in 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes.
6 F/R
In 6.1 Surround mode, F and R parameter controls
appear. The F parameter control determines how the
Front Center signal is fed to the Left and Right channels,
and the R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal is fed to the Left and Right surround channels.
6 DIV
This parameter control, instead of the F/R parameter
control, appears in 3-1 or 5.1 Surround mode, and determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and
Center channels. It is expressed as a percentage ranging
from 0 to 100%. When you set the parameter to 100, the
Center signal is fed to only the Center channel. When you
set the parameter to 0, the Center signal is fed to only the
Left and Right channels. When you set the parameter to
50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and
Center channels.
7 LINK
This button is available only in 6.1 Surround mode. When
you turn on this button, the F and R controls are set to the
same value, and linked together.
4
5
6 7
98
The following parameters are available on this page:
1 Surround pan graph
This graph indicates the pan positions in a two-dimensional field, with the listening position in the center. A
small diamond ( ) indicates the current surround pan
position. You can move the current surround pan position (
) directly to one of the speaker icons by selecting its icon, then pressing [ENTER].
2 Trajectory patterns
These buttons represent seven trajectory patterns that
determine how the surround pan moves when you operate the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
3 FAST
Turning on this button increases the speed of sound
images panned via the Parameter wheel.
4 Trajectory pattern parameters
These parameters fine-tune the surround pan trajectory
pattern.
• WIDTH
............This parameter sets the left-to-right
width of the selected trajectory pattern.
• DEPTH
.............This parameter sets the front-to-rear
width of the selected trajectory pattern.
01V96i—Reference Manual
8 ST LINK
Turning on this button links the surround pan parameters of two Input Channels that are currently displayed on
the page (Stereo Link function). You can link the surround pan parameters of two channels regardless of
whether they are paired.
9 PATTERN
When Input Channels are linked by the Stereo Link function, the seven patterns selectable here determine how the
linked surround pan moves via the Parameter wheel and
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons.
57
Surround Panning
•
......The sound image moves while tracing a circle or
oval. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the
radius and shape of the circle or oval using the
WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET
( ) parameters.
turning on the corresponding trajectory pattern button.
The following patterns are available:
•
......The sound image moves between left and right.
44
36
•
40
40
56
48
32
24
24
24
60
40
52
40
4. If necessary, fine-tune the trajectory by editing the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET (
OFFSET ( ) parameter values.
......The sound image moves between front and rear.
), and
5. To move the sound image, move the cursor to
anywhere outside the parameter boxes, then
rotate the Parameter wheel.
36
•
40
40
The sound image of the selected channel moves along the
selected trajectory pattern.
56
......The sound image moves from front left to rear
right. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune
the trajectory by using the WIDTH, DEPTH,
OFFSET ( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.
Tip: You can also adjust the front and rear or left and right
movement, the trajectory pattern and other parameters from
an external MIDI device by assigning the surround parameters to MIDI Control Changes (see page 104).
6. To link the surround pan settings of two chan36
•
36
36
12
8
8
44
16
20
nels displayed on the page, turn on the ST
LINK button.
16
Use the PATTERN parameter box below the ST LINK
button to specify how you want the linked surround pan
to move.
The following table shows how the sound images on two
linked channels move when different trajectory patterns
and stereo link patterns are combined. A solid line indicates the movement of the selected channel, and a dotted line indicates the movement of the linked partner.
......The sound image moves from front right to rear
left. With this pattern, you can also fine-tune the
trajectory using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET
( ), and OFFSET ( ) parameters.
Trajectory
36
•
36
36
12
8
8
44
16
20
16
Patterns
......The sound image moves between left and right
while tracing an arc. With this pattern, you can
also fine-tune the radius and shape of the arc
using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and
OFFSET ( ) parameters.
40
•
48
44
44
20
32
28
56
32
24
......The sound image moves between front and rear
while tracing an arc. With this pattern, you can
also fine-tune the radius and shape of the arc
using the WIDTH, DEPTH, OFFSET ( ), and
OFFSET ( ) parameters.
40
48
44
44
20
32
28
56
32
24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Surround Pan
3. Select one of seven trajectory patterns by
58
Surround Pan
7. To list multiple-channel surround pan settings, press the [PAN/ROUTING] button
repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Surr1-16,
Surr17-32, or Surr ST IN page appears.
These pages display and enable you to edit the surround
pan settings for 16 channels.
1
2
3
1 Surround pan graphs
These graphs display the trajectory patterns and the current pan positions for the Input Channels.
2
parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround
pan setting of the selected channel left and right.
3
parameter box
This parameter box enables you to move the surround
pan setting of the selected channel front and rear.
8. To move the sound image of each channel on
these pages, move the cursor to the desired
channel, then rotate the Parameter wheel.
The pan setting of the channel changes along the trajectory pattern. Press [ENTER] to display the currently-selected channel’s CH Edit page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
This chapter describes how to group faders or [ON] buttons
for multiple channels and link the EQ or compressor parameters for simultaneous operation.
Grouping & Linking
On the 01V96i, you can group faders or [ON] buttons for
multiple Input Channels (Input Channels 1–32, ST IN Channels 1–4) or multiple Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux
Outs 1–8, Stereo Out) and link the EQ or compressor parameters.
The following elements can be grouped or linked within
Input Channels or Output Channels.
• Fader group
Input Channel or Output Channel faders (or level controls) can be grouped. There are eight Input Channel
Fader groups and four Output Channel Fader groups.
When channel faders or level controls are grouped, operating any one of them enables you to control the level of
the other grouped faders or level controls while maintaining the relative level differences.
Also, the 01V96i features a Fader Group Master function
that enables you to control the level of all grouped channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the
relative level balance between channels.
• Mute group
Input Channel or Output Channel [ON] buttons can be
grouped. There are eight Input Channel mute groups and
four Output Channel mute groups. When channel [ON]
buttons are grouped, pressing any one of them turns the
[ON] buttons for all the grouped channels on or off. A
mute group can include On channels and Off channels at
the same time, which turn off or on respectively when
you press any one of the grouped [ON] buttons.
Also, the 01V96i features a Mute Group Master function
that enables you to mute grouped channels using the
Master Mute buttons.
• EQ Link
Input or Output Channel EQ parameters can be linked.
There are four EQ links for Input Channels and Output
Channels respectively.
All channels in an EQ link share the same EQ parameter
settings. When you change an EQ parameter value for
one of the linked channels, the change is applied to all
other linked channels.
• Compressor Link
Input or Output Channel compressor parameters can be
linked. There are four compressor links for Input Channels and Output Channels respectively.
All channels in a compressor link share the same compressor parameter settings. When you change a compressor parameter value for one of the linked channels, the
change is applied to all other linked channels.
Tip: Compressor Link is not available for the ST IN Channels, since they do not feature compressors.
Using Fader Groups and
Mute Groups
Follow the steps below to group faders or [ON] buttons for
Input Channels or Output Channels.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP]
button repeatedly until one of the pages that
contains the desired group and channels
appears.
• In Fader page
This page enables you to set Fader groups (A–H) for
Input Channels 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
• Out Fader page
This page enables you to set Fader groups (Q–T) for Bus
Outs (1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
In Fader page
• In Mute page
This page enables you to set Mute groups (I–P) for Input
Channels 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4 respectively.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
Grouping
Channels &
Linking
Parameters
59
60
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
• Out Mute page
This page enables you to set Mute groups (U–X) for Bus
Outs (1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
5. To turn a group on or off, move the corresponding button in the ENABLE column, then
press [ENTER].
When the group Enable button is turned off, the corresponding group is temporarily cancelled.
In Mute page
6. To use a fader group, operate one of the faders or level controls for the grouped channels.
Note:
• If you wish to change the relative level balance between the
grouped channels while this page is displayed, first turn off
the Enable button or remove the channels for which you
want to change the level from the group.
• If other pages are displayed, press and hold down the [SEL]
button for the desired channels to temporarily remove
them from the group, then change the level balance.
7. To use a mute group, press one of the [ON]
buttons for the grouped channels.
2. Press the up (
) or down ( ) button to select
a group.
Note:
• While a mute group is enabled, you cannot turn a subset
of the grouped channels on or off.
• If you wish to turn a subset of the grouped channels on or
off, first turn off the Enable button, or remove the channels
you wish to turn on or off from the group.
3. Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish
to add to the group.
The selected channel is marked with “
nel is added to the group.
” and the chan-
Example: Input Channels 1–4, 7, 8, and 15, 16 have
been added to Fader group C.
Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a group, the pair
partner is automatically added to the group.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching
layers.
4. In the same way, press the [SEL] button for
other channels you wish to add to the group.
The relative level of the faders for the grouped channels is
determined by the position of the faders when the channels were added to the group.
The On/Off status of the grouped channels is determined
by the [ON] button status when the channels were added
to the group.
01V96i—Reference Manual
All channels in the group switch their on/off status.
Using Fader Group Master
The 01V96i features a Fader Group Master function that
enables you to control the level of all channels using the Group
Master level while maintaining the relative balance between
channels, much like a VCA group on an analog mixing console.
While this function is enabled, channel fader operation does
not affect channel levels in the corresponding Fader group.
1. After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader
Groups and Mute Groups” on page 59, use
the cursor buttons to select the INPUT FADER
MASTER check box or the OUTPUT FADER
MASTER check box, then press [ENTER] to
turn on the Fader Group Master function.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select parameters,
then use the Parameter wheel, [INC]/[DEC]
buttons, or [ENTER] button to set the parameters.
• INPUT/OUTPUT FADER MASTER
When this check box is checked, you can set the master
levels for the Fader groups. The resultant Channel level
equals the corresponding Channel fader level plus the
Group Master level.
• ALL NOMINAL
This button resets the master levels for all Fader groups to
nominal.
• ON/OFF
This turns each Input Fader group on or off. This function works like a VCA mute on an analog mixing console.
• Faders
These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups.
Fader knobs are highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB.
Press the [ENTER] button to set the currently-selected
fader to 0.0 dB.
You can also control the parameters from the channel
strips on the control surface as described below by using
the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers. See
page 110 for information on the User Assignable Layer.
• [SEL] buttons
These buttons move the cursor on the In Master page or
Out Master page.
2. When the Fader Master check box is checked,
you can set channel levels of the Fader groups
in the Master column.
When the Master column is selected, repeatedly pressing
the [ENTER] button turns the Fader group on and off.
You can also make these settings in the In Master page or
Out Master page, as shown below.
• [SOLO] buttons
These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group
on and off. You can monitor all the channels in each Fader
group.
• Channel Faders
The channel faders enable you to set the master level for
each Fader group.
3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button
repeatedly until the Group | In Master or
Group | Out Master page appears.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
Using Fader Group Master
61
62
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
Using Mute Group Master
In addition to the Mute Group function that links the operation of channel [ON] buttons, the 01V96i features a Mute
Group Master function that enables you to mute grouped
channels using the Master Mute buttons in a manner similar
to using a mute group on an analog mixing console. While
this function is enabled, the [ON] buttons for grouped channels will not be linked.
1. After you perform Step 5 in “Using Fader
Groups and Mute Groups” on page 59, use
the cursor buttons to select the INPUT MUTE
MASTER check box or OUTPUT MUTE MASTER check box, then press [ENTER] to turn on
the Mute Group Master function.
2. When the Mute Master check box is checked,
use the group MASTER MUTE buttons to
mute or unmute the groups.
If channels are muted via the Mute Master function, the
channel [ON] button indicators flash. It is useful if you
assign the MASTER MUTE buttons to USER DEFINED
KEYS buttons.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Linking EQ and
Compressor Parameters
Follow the steps below to link EQ or compressor parameters
for Input Channels or Output Channels. This function
enables you to set EQ or compressor parameters for multiple
channels to the same values simultaneously.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP]
button repeatedly until one of the following
pages appears.
• In EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (a–d) for Input
Channels 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4.
• Out EQ page
This page enables you to set EQ links (e–h) for Bus Outs
(1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters
2. Press the up (
) or down ( ) cursor button
to select a link to which you want to add channels.
3. Press the [SEL] button for a channel you wish
to add to the EQ or Compressor link.
The selected channel is marked with “
nel is added to the link.
• Out Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (m–p) for
Bus Outs (1–8), Aux Outs (1–8) and Stereo Out.
” and the chan-
Example: Input Channels 1–4, 7, 8, 12 and 14
have been added to EQ link b.
Tip:
• If you add one channel from a pair to a link, the pair partner is automatically added to the link.
• You can also select a channel on another layer by switching
layers.
4. In the same way, press the [SEL] button for
other channels you wish to add to the link.
The EQ or compressor settings for the first channel added
to the link are applied to all subsequently-added channels.
5. After all desired channels are added to the
link, edit the EQ or compressor parameters
for one of the linked channels.
The edits for the EQ or compressor parameters are
applied to the rest of the linked channels.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters
• In Comp page
This page enables you to set Compressor links (i–l) for
Input Channels 1–32.
63
64
Internal Effects
Internal Effects
Using Effects Processors
via Aux Sends
This chapter describes how to use the 01V96i’s internal effects
processors.
You can use effects processors via Aux Sends by patching
effects processor inputs to Aux Outs, and effects processor
outputs to ST IN Channels.
About the Internal Effects
1. Recall an effect program you wish to use.
The 01V96i features four internal multi-effects processors.
These effects processors offer numerous types of effects,
including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, and
combination effects designed especially for use with surround sound.
2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button
Refer to page 76 for more information on recalling effect
programs.
repeatedly until the Patch | Effect page
appears.
This page enables you to patch all inputs and outputs of
Effects processors 1–4.
Note: When the 01V96i operates at a high sampling frequency
(88.2 kHz or 96 kHz), you can use only Effects processors 1 and 2.
1
OUTPUT
EFFECT 2
OUTPUT
1
2
EFFECT 3
OUTPUT
1
2
EFFECT 4
OUTPUT
1
2
SELECT
INSERT OUT
3
2
INPUT PATCH
INPUT
1
2
INPUT
1
2
1
2
INPUT
FX2 SEND
1-2
1
2
EFFECT 1
INPUT
FX1 SEND
1-2
1
2
FX3 SEND
1-2
AUX1-8
FX4 SEND
1-2
Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various
sources. For example, effects processor inputs can be fed from
the Aux Sends and output to ST IN Channels (effects
send/return). Effects processors can also be inserted into
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, or the Stereo Out.
Effects processors 1 through 4 create 1-in/2-out or
2-in/2-out effects.
This page contains the following parameters:
The 01V96i also features the Effects library, which contains 56
preset programs (including Add-On Effects) and 72 user programs.
1 IN
These parameter boxes select the signals to be fed to the
effects processors.
2 OUT
These parameter boxes select the destination of the signals output from the effects processors.
3
01V96i—Reference Manual
button
This button recalls the FX1 Edit–FX4 Edit pages, which
enable you to adjust the effect parameters.
Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels
processor, move the cursor to the desired In
parameter box, select a signal from the following options, then press [ENTER].
•
•
•
•
•
•
– ................................ No assignment
AUX1–8 .................. Aux Sends 1–8
INS CH1–32........... Input Channel 1–32 Insert Out
INS BUS1–8........... Bus 1–8 Insert Out
INS AUX1–8 .......... Aux Send 1–8 Insert Out
INS ST-L/R............. Stereo Out Insert Out
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends,
select Aux 1–8 (in most cases).
You can patch a different signal to the other input of
2-in/2-out effect programs.
Tip:
• You can patch a signal to multiple effect inputs.
• Move the cursor to an IN parameter box and press the
[ENTER] button. The Patch Select window appears. This
window enables you to select the input source quickly.
4. To patch a signal output from the effects processor, move the cursor to the desired OUT
parameter box, select the signal destination
from the following options, then press
[ENTER].
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
– ...............................................No assignment
CH1–32..................................Input Channels 1–32
ST IN 1L–ST IN 4R.............ST IN Channels 1L–4R
INS CH1–32..........................Input Channel Insert In
INS BUS1–8..........................Bus 1–8 Insert In
INS AUX1–8 .........................Aux 1–8 Insert In
INS ST-L & INS ST-R.........Stereo Bus Insert In
5. Adjust the level of Aux Sends patched to the
effects processor.
Refer to “Aux Outs” on page 36 for information on setting
the Aux Sends.
Note: Do not raise the level of the Aux Sends (patched to the
effects processor’s input) on the effects return channels. Otherwise, the signal will return to the same channel, creating a
signal loop and possibly damaging your speakers.
Tip: Use the Master layer fader to adjust the final Aux Send
output level. At this time, you can view the level on the Meter
| Master page.
6. Adjust the level, pan, and EQ of the Input
Channels patched to the effect outputs.
Tip: To mix the effects sound returned via the Aux sends with
the original dry sound, set the effect’s MIX BALANCE
parameter to 100% (only the effects sound will be output).
Inserting the Internal
Effects into Channels
You can insert the internal effects into certain Input Channels
or Output Channels (Bus 1–8, Aux Bus 1–8, or the Stereo
Bus).
Note:
• You cannot use Insert In and Out for ST IN Channels.
• If effects are inserted in channels, you cannot use those effects
via Aux Sends or insert them into other channels.
1. Select an internal Effects processor (1–4),
To use the internal effects processors via Aux Sends,
select CH 1–32 or ST IN 1–4 (in most cases). The channels you assign here will become the effects return channels.
You can patch a different channel to the other output of a
1-in/2-out or 2-in/2-out effect program to create stereo
effects.
Tip:
• If you select an ST IN Channel as the destination, you can
patch the L and R channel signals separately.
• You can also use the Patch Select window to set the OUT
parameter boxes, as explained in Step 3.
• The number of inputs available for each effect varies
depending on the type of effect programs initially recalled.
then recall the desired effect programs.
2. Press the [SEL] button of the Input Channel
or Output Channel into which you want to
insert the selected effects.
Tip: Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles
between the left and right Stereo Bus channels.
3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[ /INSERT/DELAY] button repeatedly until
the /Ins/Dly | Insert page appears.
Note: You cannot select a channel as the destination of multiple effect signals. If you select a channel that is already
selected in another OUT parameter box, that OUT parameter box switches its indicator to “–” (not assigned).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Internal Effects
3. To select a signal to be input to the effects
65
66
Internal Effects
4. Select the effect insertion position using the
INSERT button in the POSITION section.
5. Move the cursor to the OUT parameter box
in the INSERT section, then select the inputs
of the effects processor selected in Step 1.
• FX1-1 & FX1-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 1
• FX2-1 & FX2-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 2
• FX3-1 & FX3-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 3
• FX4-1 & FX4-2 ......Inputs 1 & 2 of Internal Effects Processor 4
6. Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
Editing Effects
To edit effect programs recalled to the internal Effects processors 1–4, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button
repeatedly until the Edit page for the effects processor you
wish to edit appears.
Effects processors 1–4 correspond to the following pages:
• Effects Processor 1 ............. FX1 Edit page
• Effects Processor 2 ............. FX2 Edit page
• Effects Processor 3 ............. FX3 Edit page
• Effects Processor 4 ............. FX4 Edit page
These Edit pages contain the following effect parameters.
3
124
7
7. Move the cursor to the IN parameter box in
the INSERT section, select the outputs of the
effects processor selected in Step 1, then
press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
8. Move the cursor to the ON/OFF button in the
INSERT section, then press [ENTER] to turn on
the button.
Effect insertion is now enabled.
Tip:
• After inserting effects to channels, adjust the MIX BALANCE parameter for the effects, according to the purpose
and effects type.
• Move the cursor to an empty IN or OUT parameter box
and press the [ENTER] button. The Patch Select window
appears, which enables you to quickly select available signal paths.
5
6
1 EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the effect program
currently used by the effects processor.
2 TYPE
This parameter displays the type of effect program currently used by the effects processor. The I/O configuration of the effect program is displayed below this
parameter.
3
button
Move the cursor to this parameter, then press [ENTER] to
display the Library page for the selected effects processor.
4
button
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to
display the Patch | Effect page, which enables you to
assign signals to the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4.
5 MIX BALANCE
This parameter knob enables you to set the balance
between wet and dry signals. When the parameter is set
to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%,
only the wet signal is heard. Turn on the BYPASS button
to bypass the currently-selected effects processor.
6 TEMPO
This section enables you to set the tempo and interval of
the selected effects, and displays certain parameters only
when certain effect types are selected. Use the parameter
control on the left side of this section to adjust the value
between 25 BPM and 300 BPM. When the MIDI CLK
01V96i—Reference Manual
About Add-On Effects
Tip: If the Freeze effect is selected, the TEMPO section displays the record and playback buttons for using the effect, the
recording data condition, and a progress bar that indicates
the current status.
7 Meters
About Plug-Ins
If you installed a mini-YGDAI card that supports the Effects
function into Slot, you can use plug-in effects in addition to
the internal effects processors.
You can patch Bus signals or channel insert outs to the plug-in
input. The plug-in output can be patched to Input Channels
or channel insert ins.
To use the plug-in effects, press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | P-In Edit page appears.
For details on using plug-ins, refer to the owner’s manual that
came with the plug-in card.
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the
currently-selected effects processor. Select the IN button
or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels
respectively.
Tip: You can also view the input and output levels of the
effects processors on the Meter | Effect 1–4 pages.
Move the cursor to a parameter you wish to change, and
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC]
buttons to adjust the setting. You can store the edited settings as a new program in the Effects library (see
page 76).
Note: You cannot change the effects type on this page. To
change the effects type, recall a program that uses the desired
effects type from the Effects library.
About Add-On Effects
The 01V96i comes with pre-installed Add-On Effects created
with VCM technology to faithfully simulate analog circuits
using digital processing. Add-On Effects will be stored in and
recalled from preset #45 and the subsequent preset programs.
You can also store edited effects in user program #57 and the
subsequent user programs.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Internal Effects
button is on, the 01V96i updates the TEMPO data
(BPM) based on the MIDI Clock information received at
the MIDI IN port. You can also specify the tempo by
moving the cursor to the TAP TEMPO button and double-clicking the [ENTER] button. The 01V96i calculates
the tempo based on the time interval between your two
taps (clicks) on the [ENTER] button.
67
68
Scene Memories
Scene Memories
This chapter describes Scene memories, which store 01V96i
mix and effects settings.
Note:
• Scenes take a snapshot of Input and Output Patch library numbers that are in use at the time the Scene is stored, but exclude
current (edited) Input and Output patching.
• If you do not store the edited Input and Output patching to the
libraries, recalling a Scene may change the current patching.
About Scene Memories
About Scene Numbers
Scene memories enable you to store a snapshot of 01V96i
channel mix settings and internal effects processor settings as
a “Scene” in a special memory area.
There are 99 Scene memories, and you can recall any Scene
using the display pages or the controls on the top panel.
Scene memories are numbered with #U or from #00 through
#99. You can store Scenes in Scene memories #01–99. When
you recall a Scene, the Scene memory number appears at the
top of the display page.
Scene memory #00 is a special read-only memory that
contains the default settings of all mix parameters. To
reset all mix parameters on the 01V96i to their initial or
default values, recall Scene memory #0.
Also, the Initial Data Nominal check box on the Setup |
Prefer1 page (see page 109) enables you to specify whether
Input Channel faders are set to either 0 dB or – dB when
Scene memory #0 is recalled.
Scene memory “Ud” is a special read-only memory that
contains the mix settings in effect immediately before the
most recently recalled or stored Scene. To undo or redo
Scene memory recall and store operations, recall Scene memory #U.
When you adjust parameters after recalling a Scene, the Edit
indicators appear (“EDIT” at the top of the display), indicating that the mix settings no longer match those of the Scene
that was most recently recalled. The contents of the Edit Buffer (where the current mix settings are stored) are retained
while the 01V96i is turned off. This allows the 01V96i to
restore the edited mix settings when you turn on the power.
Tip:
• You can recall Scenes by transmitting Program Changes from
external MIDI devices (see page 103).
• You can back up Scene memories to external MIDI devices by
using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 107).
What is Stored in a
Scene?
The following parameter settings are stored in a Scene:
Scene
Parameters
All channel faders (and level controls)
Channel to Aux Out 1–8 Send levels
Aux Out 1–8 & Bus Out 1–8 levels
All channel [ON] button settings
All channel Phase settings
The contents of recalled Scene
memory #2 match the current
settings on the 01V96i, and
the Edit indicator remains off.
All channel Attenuator settings
All channel Delay settings (excluding
ST IN Channels)
Mix parameters
All channel Compressor settings
(excluding ST IN Channels)
Display
Input channel Gate settings (excluding ST IN Channels)
All channel EQ settings
All channel Pan settings
All channel routings
Fader groups, Mute groups, Fader
group Masters, Mute group Masters,
EQ links, and Compressor links
All channel pair settings
Effects
parameters
Effect programs recalled for Effects
processors 1–4 and their parameter
settings
Remote Layer
Fader and [ON] button status (only
when Remote Control Target is set to
USER DEFINED)
Scene settings
Scene titles and Fade Time settings
Input Patching
Currently-selected Input Patch library
number
Output Patching
Currently-selected Output Patch
library number
01V96i—Reference Manual
Edit indicator
The parameters of recalled
Scene memory #2 were edited.
Therefore, the Edit indicators
appear, indicating that the current settings on the 01V96i do
not match Scene memory #2.
Storing and Recalling Scenes
You can store and recall Scenes by pressing the buttons on the
top panel or using the dedicated Scene memory page on the
display.
Note:
• When you store Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in
the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store. Make sure that no
settings, especially faders, have been adjusted unintentionally.
• If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s contents, recall the last
Scene, make the adjustments you want, then store the Scene.
You may wish to store the current Scene to an unused Scene
memory, just in case.
Storing and Recalling Scenes
Using the Scene Memory Page
On the Scene Memory page, you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of Scenes.
1. Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i to
the conditions you wish to store as a Scene.
2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button
repeatedly until the Scene | Scene page
appears.
Storing and Recalling Scenes
Using the SCENE MEMORY
Buttons
1
You can use the SCENE MEMORY buttons to store and recall
Scenes.
4
1. Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i to
2
3
5
the conditions you wish to store as a Scene.
6
2. Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [
] or Down
[ ] buttons to select a Scene memory number.
If you select a Scene memory other than the currently-recalled Scene, its number flashes at the to of the
display.
Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are special
read-only memories, to which you cannot store Scenes.
Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-protected Scene
memories.
3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button.
The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to
name the Scene to be stored.
Tip: You can disable this window by turning the Store Confirmation parameter to Off on the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page
(see page 109). In this case, the stored Scene will hve the same
name as the one recalled most-recently.
4. Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER].
The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is
stored to the selected Scene memory.
5. To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEMORY
Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene
memory number, then press the SCENE
MEMORY [RECALL] button.
Tip: If you turn the Recall Confirmation parameter to On on
the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page, a Scene recall confirmation
window for Scene recalls appears before the Scene is recalled
(see page 109).
7 8
3. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a Scene memory, move the cursor to one of the following
buttons, then press [ENTER].
1 TITLE EDIT
Select this button to display the Title Edit window, which
enables you to edit a selected Scene title.
2 RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected Scene
memory.
3 STORE
This button stores the current Scene to the selected Scene
memory. By default, a confirmation window appears
before you store the Scene.
4 CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected Scene
memory.
5 PROTECT ON/OFF
This button switches on and off the write-protection of
the contents of the selected Scene memory. A padlock
icon ( ) appears next to the title of a Scene memory that
is write-protected.
6 Library list
Scene memories 01–99 are listed in the library memory
title list. The titles of stored Scenes are indicated in the
title column. The message “No Data!” appears in the title
column of empty library memories. The selected memory appears inside the dotted box between the
and
marks.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Scene Memories
Storing and Recalling
Scenes
69
70
Scene Memories
7 PATCH LINK INPUT
This indicates the Input Patch library number that is
linked to each scene. When you store a scene, the number
of the input patch that was most recently recalled or
stored will automatically be linked with that scene. When
you recall that scene, this library number will also be
automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to
the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.
8 PATCH LINK OUTPUT
This indicates the Output Patch library number that is
linked to each scene. When you store a scene, the number
of the output patch that was most recently recalled or
stored will automatically be linked with that scene. When
you recall that scene, this library number will also be
automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to
the parameter boxes and change the library numbers.
Auto Scene Memory
Update
If the Scene MEM Auto Update check box on the Setup |
Prefer1 page (see page 109) is turned on, parameter edits are
stored automatically in a Shadow memory, which is available
for each Scene. This is called the Auto Update function.
If the Auto Update function is enabled, parameter edits made
after the Scene was recalled are stored in the Scene’s Shadow
memory. When you again recall the Scene, the contents of the
Original and Shadow memories are recalled alternately.
Therefore, even after you recall the Original Scene memory, you can recall the edited version from Shadow memory to restore the most recent edits.
If the “EDIT” indicator appears at the top of the display, the
edited version from Shadow memory has been recalled.
Original Scene
Display
Shadow memory
Edit indicator
If a Shadow memory is recalled, the edited version is stored
when you store the Scene. (The contents of the Original and
Shadow memories then become identical.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Fading Scenes
Fading Output Channels
You can specify the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders (or level controls) to move to their new positions
when a Scene is recalled. This is called Fade Time, and it can
be set for each channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds (in 0.1 second steps). You can set the Fade Time for each
Scene individually or for all Scenes globally.
Fading Input Channels
To set the Fade Time for Input Channels 1–32 and ST IN
Channels 1–4, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button
repeatedly until the Scene | In Fade page appears. Move the
cursor to the desired channel parameter box, then rotate the
Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify
the Fade Time setting.
1
3
To set the Fade Time for the Output Channels (Stereo Out,
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8), press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Out Fade page
appears.
The basic operation is the same as on the In Fade page.
1
2
3
4
5
2
1 BUS1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for
each Bus Out (1–8) in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds.
2 AUX1–8
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for Aux
Outs 1–8.
3 STEREO
This parameter enables you to set the Fade Time for the
Stereo Out.
4 INPUT MASTER A–H
1 Global Fade Time
When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using
the currently-specified Fade Time. (The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled Scene is temporarily ignored.)
This check box setting works in unison with the Out Fade
page.
2 ALL INPUT CLEAR
This button resets all channel Fade Times on the page to
00.0 second.
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for
Input Fader Group Master A–H.
5 OUTPUT MASTER Q–T
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for
Output Fader Group Master Q–T.
Tip: You can copy the currently-selected Output Channel Fade
Time setting to all Output Channels by double-clicking the
[ENTER] button.
3 INPUT CH1–32/ST IN 1–4
These parameters enable you to set the Fade Time for
each Input Channel in the range of 00.0 through 30.0 seconds. The Fade Time setting for one channel in a pair
works in unison with its partner.
Tip:
• If you operate a fader while fading channels, the fader’s Fade
Time setting is temporarily ignored.
• You can copy the currently-selected Input Channel Fade Time
to all Input Channels by double-clicking the [ENTER] button
to display a window for copying. This is convenient when you
wish to set the Fade Time for all channels simultaneously.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Scene Memories
Fading Scenes
71
72
Scene Memories
Recalling Scenes Safely
When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. However, in some situations, you can retain the current settings of certain parameters on certain channels by
using the Recall Safe function. You can set the Recall Safe
function parameters for each Scene individually or for all
Scenes globally.
To set the Recall Safe function, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[SCENE] button repeatedly until the Scene | Rcl Safe page
appears.
2
1
4
4 RECALL SAFE CHANNEL section
This section enables you to select which channels will
remain unaffected by Scene recalls, including Input
Channels 1–32, ST IN Channels 1–4, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux
Outs 1–8, Stereo Out, internal effects, USER DEFINED
Remote layers, and plug-in effects. The Recall Safe function is effective on channels and functions for which the
buttons are turned on.
Sorting Scenes
You can sort Scenes in Scene memories.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button
repeatedly until the Scene | Sort page
appears.
1
2
3
1 Global Recall Safe
When this check box is checked, Recall Safe settings
stored in Scene memories are ignored and the current settings are retained.
2 SAFE
This parameter enables or disables the Recall Safe function.
3 MODE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following MODE buttons determine which Safe
channel parameters will remain unaffected by Scene
recalls. The MODE buttons correspond to the following
parameters:
ALL ...........................All parameters
FADER.....................Channel faders (or level controls)
ON.............................Channel On/Off parameters
PAN ..........................Channel Pan parameters, Stereo Out
balance
EQ .............................Channel EQ parameters
COMP......................Channel Comp parameters
GATE........................Channel Gate parameters
AUX..........................Channel Aux Send levels, Pre/Post
AUX ON ..................Aux Send On/Off parameters
DELAY.....................Channel Delay parameters
ROUTING ..............Channel Routing parameters
Tip: The ALL button is mutually exclusive of the other buttons.
01V96i—Reference Manual
2. Move the cursor to the SOURCE list (1) in the
left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel
or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the
Scene memory you wish to move.
3. Move the cursor to the DESTINATION list (2)
in the right column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the position to which you want to move
the source Scene memory.
4. Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene
memory to the specified destination.
The Scene memory numbers are updated accordingly.
Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste)
Any channel or parameter settings for the current scene can
be copied and pasted into one or more scenes. This function
is useful when you want to apply edited parameter settings in
the current scene to other scenes.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button
repeatedly until the Paste SRC page appears.
5. Use the Parameter wheel or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the destination scene(s).
Scenes specified between FROM and TO (inclusive)
become the paste destination. You can paste up to 10
scenes at a time.
6. Use the cursor buttons to select the PASTE
button, then use the [ENTER] button to paste
the settings.
You cannot paste the settings to write-protected scenes.
To restore the previous settings that existed before the
paste operation, click the UNDO button, then press
[ENTER] button. However, if the settings in the scene are
changed after the paste operation (such as by saving,
clearing, or sorting the scene, or receiving scene data via
MIDI Bulk Dump), the UNDO function is disabled. Also,
note that you will not be able to undo the operation after
you turn off the power to the console.
2. Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or
Parameter wheel to select the channel category, then use the [ENTER] button or the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the copy source
channel.
The number of the source channel is highlighted.
You can also select Group Masters, internal Effects, and a
User Defined Remote layer as copy sources.
3. Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to
select the copy source parameter, then press
the [ENTER] button.
4. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [SCENE] button
repeatedly until the Paste DST page appears.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Scene Memories
Copying and Pasting a
Scene (Global Paste)
73
74
Libraries
Libraries
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s various libraries.
About the Libraries
The 01V96i features seven libraries that enable you to store
Channel, Input Patch, Output Patch, Effects, and other data.
You can also quickly recall this data from the libraries to
restore previous parameter values.
The 01V96i offers the following libraries:
• Channel Library
• Input Patch Library
• Output Patch Library
• Effects Library
• Gate Library
• Compressor Library
• EQ Library
Tip:
• You can store library data to a computer hard disk using the
included Studio Manager software. Be sure to back up your
important data.
• You can also store library data to an external MIDI device,
such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see
page 107).
General Library Operation
Most library functions are the same for each library.
1. Use the buttons on the top panel to locate the
desired library pages.
The procedure for locating library pages varies depending on the library. Refer to the latter part of this chapter
for more information on how to display the desired
library page.
The example below assumes you have located the Input
Patch library page.
1
2
3
4
The library memory title list is displayed in the middle of
the page. The message “No Data!” appears in the title column of empty library memories.
01V96i—Reference Manual
An “ ” icon is displayed next to the name of read-only
preset memories. You cannot store, clear, or edit the titles
of these memories.
Memories #0 and #U are special read-only memories.
Recall memory #0 to reset the parameter settings to their
initial values. Recall #U to undo memory recall and store
operations.
2. Rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired
memory.
The selected memory appears inside the dotted box.
3. Move the cursor to one of the following function buttons, then press [ENTER].
1 TITLE EDIT
This button displays the Title Edit window, which enables
you to edit the title of the selected memory. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the
edited title. Refer to “Title Edit Window” in the Owner’s
Manual (booklet) for more information on entering characters.
2 RECALL
This button recalls the contents of the selected library
memory. If you turn on the Recall Confirmation parameter on the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page, the 01V96i displays
a memory recall confirmation window.
3 STORE
This button stores the settings to the selected memory.
Before you store the settings, you can enter or edit the title
using the Title Edit window.
You can disable the Title Edit window by turning off the
Store Confirmation parameter on the DIO/Setup |
Prefer1 page. If you bypass the Edit Title window, the
name “New Data” will be used as a title for the Scene
memory.
4 CLEAR
This button deletes the contents of the selected memory.
After you press [ENTER], the 01V96i displays a confirmation window. To execute the delete operation, move
the cursor to the YES button in the confirmation window,
then press [ENTER].
Note: If you select a memory that already contains settings
and execute the delete operation, the settings will be lost.
Make sure that you do not accidentally delete important settings.
Using Libraries
Channel Library
Channel library enables you to store and recall Input Channel
and Output Channel parameter settings. The library contains
two preset memories and 127 user (readable & writable)
memories.
You can recall only the settings for the currently-selected
channels from the Channel library. For example, you cannot
recall Input Channel 1–32 settings to ST IN Channels 1–4,
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, or Stereo Out, with the exception that memories #0 and #1 can be recalled to any channels.
Follow the steps below to use the Channel library.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button
repeatedly until the View | Library page
appears.
1
2
3
If the selected memory’s channel type does not match the
type of the destination channel, an alarm mark ( ) and
the word “CONFLICT” appear next to the STORED
FROM parameter. These alarms indicate that you tried to
recall unrecallable channel settings to the currently-selected channel.
The alarm indicators also appear when the Surround
mode, Aux pair, and other non-channel parameter settings originally stored in the memory do not match those
for the destination channel. However, if the channel type
of the memory and that of the destination channel match,
you can recall the settings even with the alarm indicators
displayed. (For unmatched parameter settings, the
01V96i will use the settings in the memory that is to be
recalled.)
The following preset memories are available for the
Channel library.
No.
Preset Name
Description
0
This preset memory resets all
parameters of the curReset (– dB) rently-selected channel to their
initial values and sets the channel fader level to (– dB).
1
This preset memory resets all
parameters of the currently-selected channel to their
initial values and sets the channel fader level to 0 dB (i.e.,
nominal).
Reset (0 dB)
Input Patch Library
4
1 SEL CH
The Input Patch library enables you to store and recall all
Input Patch settings. The library contains one preset memory
and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Input Patch library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | IN LIB page
appears. For details on storing and recalling memories, see
“General Library Operation” on page 74.
This parameter indicates the currently-selected channel.
2 CURRENT CONFIGURATION section
If the currently-selected channel is an Input Channel
(1–32) or ST IN Channels (1–4), its Surround mode and
Aux configuration information is displayed here.
3 Level meters
These meters indicate the levels of the currently-selected
channel and the available partner.
4 STORED FROM
This parameter indicates the channel for which the settings were originally stored in the selected library memory. If the currently-selected library memory contains
Input Channel 1–32 and ST IN Channels 1–4 settings, its
Surround mode and Aux pairing information are also
displayed below this parameter.
Input Patch preset memory #0 contains the following settings:
2. Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then
press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
For details on the Store and Recall functions, see “General
Library Operation” on page 74.
Input Channels 1–16
INPUT connectors 1–16
Input Channels 17–24
ADAT IN Channels 1–8
Input Channels 25–32
Slot Channels 1–8
ST IN Channels 1–4
Internal Effects Processor 1–4
Outputs 1 & 2
01V96i—Reference Manual
Libraries
Using Libraries
75
76
Libraries
Output Patch Library
Effects Library
The Output Patch library enables you to store and recall all
Output Patch settings. The library contains one preset memory and 32 user (readable & writable) memories.
To access the Output Patch library, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Out
LIB page appears.
For details on storing and recalling memories, see “General
Library Operation” on page 74.
The Effects library enables you to store and recall Effects processor 1–4 programs. The library contains 56 preset programs
(including Add-On Effects) and 72 user (readable & writable)
programs.
Note: The Effects library is shared by Effects processors 1–4. However, only Effects processors 1 and 2 enable the recall of Effect 19
“HQ Pitch” and Effect 42 “Freeze.”
To store and recall settings to and from the library, you must
locate the corresponding Effects processor’s page.
To access the Effects library, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[EFFECT] button repeatedly until the library page for the
desired Effects processor appears.
Each Effects processor features the library pages listed below:
• Internal Effects Processor 1 Library ... FX1 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 2 Library ... FX2 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 3 Library ... FX3 Lib page
• Internal Effects Processor 4 Library ... FX4 Lib page
3
124
5
The Output Patch preset memory #0 contains the following
settings:
Slot output channels 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
Slot output channels 9–16
Bus Outs 1–8
ADAT OUT channels 1–8
Bus Outs 1–8
OMNI OUT connectors 1–4
Aux Outs 1–4
1 EFFECT NAME
This parameter displays the name of the Effects program
currently selected by the Effects processor.
2 TYPE
This parameter displays the effects type currently used by
the Effects processor. The number of input and output
channels for the currently-used effects appears below the
TYPE parameter.
3
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to
display the Effect | FX1 Edit, FX2 Edit, FX3 Edit, or FX4
Edit page to adjust the Effects parameters.
4
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to
display the In Patch | Effect page to assign the input and
output signals of Effects processors 1–4.
5 Level meters
These meters indicate the input or output levels of the
currently-selected Effects processor. Select the IN button
or OUT button to display the input levels or output levels
respectively.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Using Libraries
77
Libraries
For details on storing and recalling programs, see “General Library Operation” on page 74.
The following tables list the preset effects programs in the Effects library:
• Reverbs
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
1
Reverb Hall
REVERB HALL
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
2
Reverb Room
REVERB ROOM
Room reverberation simulation with gate
3
Reverb Stage
REVERB STAGE
Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
4
Reverb Plate
REVERB PLATE
Plate reverb simulation with gate
5
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
6
Gate Reverb
GATE REVERB
Gated early reflections
7
Reverse Gate
REVERSE GATE
Gated reverse early reflections
• Delays
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
8
Mono Delay
MONO DELAY
Simple mono delay
Simple stereo delay
9
Stereo Delay
STEREO DELAY
10
Mod.delay
MOD.DELAY
Simple repeat delay with modulation
11
Delay LCR
DELAY LCR
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
12
Echo
ECHO
Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
• Modulation-based Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
13
Chorus
CHORUS
Chorus
14
Flange
FLANGE
Flanger
15
Symphonic
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus
16
Phaser
PHASER
16-stage stereo phase shifter
17
Auto Pan
AUTO PAN
Auto-panner
18
TREMOLO
TREMOLO
Tremolo
19
HQ.Pitch
HQ.PITCH
Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results (Available for internal effects 1
and 2.)
20
Dual Pitch
DUAL PITCH
Stereo pitch shifter
21
Rotary
ROTARY
Rotary speaker simulation
22
Ring Mod.
RING MOD.
Ring modulator
23
Mod.Filter
MOD.FILTER
Modulated filter
• Guitar Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
24
Distortion
DISTORTION
Distortion
25
Amp Simulate
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar amp simulation
• Dynamic Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
26
Dyna.Filter
DYNA.FILTER
27
Dyna.Flange
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled filter
Dynamically controlled flanger
28
Dyna.Phaser
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phase shifter
01V96i—Reference Manual
78
Libraries
• Combination Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
29
Rev+Chorus
REV+CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in parallel
30
Rev->Chorus
REV->CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in series
31
Rev+Flange
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in parallel
32
Rev->Flange
REV->FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in series
33
Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
34
Rev->Sympho.
REV->SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in series
35
Rev->Pan
REV->PAN
Reverb and auto-pan in series
36
Delay+ER.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
37
Delay->ER.
DELAY->ER.
Delay and early reflections in series
38
Delay+Rev
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb in parallel
39
Delay->Rev
DELAY->REV
Delay and reverb in series
40
Dist->Delay
DIST->DELAY
Distortion and delay in series
• Others
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
41
Multi.Filter
MULTI.FILTER
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
42
Freeze
FREEZE
Simple sampler (Available for internal effects 1 and 2.)
43
Stereo Reverb
ST REVERB
Stereo reverb
44
M.Band Dyna.
M.BAND DYNA.
3-band dynamics processor
• Add-On Effects
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
45
Comp276
COMP276
This emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a
standard in recording studios.
46
Comp276S
COMP276S
This is a stereo model of Comp276.
47
Comp260
COMP260
This emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the mid-1970s
that has now become a standard for live sound reinforcement.
48
Comp260S
COMP260S
This is a stereo model of Comp260.
49
Equalizer601
EQUALIZER601
This emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s.
50
OpenDeck
OPENDECK
This is a mastering effect that emulates the tape compression produced by
two open-reel tape recorders, a recording deck and a reproduction deck.
51
REV-X Hall
REV-X HALL
52
REV-X Room
REV-X ROOM
53
REV-X Plate
REV-X PLATE
54
Max100
MAX100
This emulates a vintage phaser effect that was manufactured only during the
second half of the 1970s.
55
Vintage Phaser
VNTG PHASER
Rather than limiting itself to reproducing any particular model, this phaser
offers an extremely high level of freedom in creating phaser sounds.
56
Dual Phaser
DUAL PHASER
This phaser emulates a vintage effect manufactured during the mid-1970s.
01V96i—Reference Manual
REV-X reverb provides a high-density, richly reverberant sound quality, with
smooth decay, spaciousness and depth that enhance the original sound.
Three types are available: hall, room, and plate.
Using Libraries
79
Compressor Library
The Gate library enables you to store and recall Input Channel
gate settings. The library contains four preset memories and
124 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Gate library.
This library enables you to store and recall settings for the
compressors on Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8,
and Stereo Out. The library contains 36 preset memories and
92 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the Compressor library.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F2] button.
1
2
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F4] button.
The Dynamics | Gate Lib page appears.
3
4
The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears.
1
2
3
4
1 CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel
gate type (Gate or Ducking).
2 CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current channel gate curve.
3 GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being
applied by the gate, and the post-gate levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
4 Type & Curve section
The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently-selected memory is displayed here.
Tip: If you selected an ST IN Channel (1–4), Aux Out (1–8),
Bus Out (1–8), or Stereo Out that does not feature a gate, the
01V96i indicates “XXX has no Gate!” (in which XXX represents a channel name).
2. Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then
press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
You can now store the selected channel gate settings or
recall the gate library memories to channels. For details
on storing and recalling memories, see “General Library
Operation” on page 74.
The following table lists the preset memories in the Gate
library:
No. Preset Name
Type
1 CURRENT TYPE
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel
comp type (Compressor, Expander, Compander Soft,
Compander Hard).
2 CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current compressor curve.
3 GR meters
These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being
applied by the compressor, and the post-comp levels of
the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
4 Type & Curve section
The type and curve of the currently-selected memory is
displayed here.
2. Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then
press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
You can now store the selected channel comp settings and
recall the compressor library memories to channels. For
details on storing and recalling memories, see “General
Library Operation” on page 74. Since ST IN Channels do
not feature compressors, if you select an ST IN Channel,
the message “Stereo in has no Comp!” appears on the display.
Description
1
Gate
GATE
Gate template
2
Ducking
DUCKING
Ducking template
3
A. Dr. BD
GATE
Gate preset for use with
acoustic bass drums
4
A. Dr. SN
GATE
Gate preset for use with
acoustic snare drums
01V96i—Reference Manual
Libraries
Gate Library
80
Libraries
The following table lists the preset memories in the Compressor library:
No.
Preset Name
Type
Description
1
Comp
COMP
Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during
mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels.
2
Expand
EXPAND
Expander template.
3
Compander (H) COMPAND-H
4
Compander (S) COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compressor template.
5
A. Dr. BD
COMP
Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum.
6
A. Dr. BD
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum.
7
A. Dr. SN
COMP
Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum.
8
A. Dr. SN
EXPAND
Expander for use with acoustic snare drum.
9
A. Dr. SN
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum.
Hard-kneed compressor template.
10
A. Dr. Tom
EXPAND
Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automatically reduces the volume
when the tom toms are not played, improving mic separation.
11
A. Dr. OverTop
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and ambience of cymbals recorded
with overhead mics. It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not
played, improving mic separation.
12
E. B. Finger
COMP
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger-picked electric bass guitar.
13
E. B. Slap
COMP
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass guitar.
14
Syn. Bass
COMP
Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a synth bass.
15
Piano1
COMP
Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano.
16
Piano2
COMP
A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to change the overall attack and level.
17
E. Guitar
COMP
Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style backing. The sound color
can be varied by playing different styles.
18
A. Guitar
COMP
Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style backing.
19
Strings1
COMP
Compressor for use with strings.
20
Strings2
COMP
A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos.
21
Strings3
COMP
A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments with a very low range, such as
cellos or contrabass.
22
BrassSection
COMP
Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack.
23
Syn. Pad
COMP
Compressor for musical instruments that feature gentle sounds which, depending on
the tones, could diffuse, such as synth pad. Intended to prevent diffusion of the sound.
24
SamplingPerc
COMPAND-S
Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real acoustic percussion.
25
Sampling BD
COMP
A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass drum sounds.
26
Sampling SN
COMP
A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare drum sounds.
27
Hip Comp
COMPAND-S
A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops and phrases.
28
Solo Vocal1
COMP
Compressor for use with main vocals.
29
Solo Vocal2
COMP
A variation on preset 28.
30
Chorus
COMP
A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses.
31
Click Erase
EXPAND
Expander for removing a click track that may bleed through from a musician’s headphones.
32
Announcer
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the music when an announcer speaks.
33
Limiter1
COMPAND-S
A soft-kneed compander with a slow release.
34
Limiter2
COMP
A “peak-stop” compressor.
35
Total Comp1
COMP
Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during
mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels.
36
Total Comp2
COMP
A variation on preset 35, but with more compression.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Using Libraries
This library enables you to store and recall EQ settings for
Input Channels, Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–8, and Stereo Out.
The library contains 40 preset memories and 160 user (readable & writable) memories.
Follow the steps below to use the EQ library.
This parameter displays the currently-selected channel
EQ type (TYPE I or II).
2 CURRENT CURVE
This graph displays the current EQ curve.
3 Level meters
These meters indicate the post-EQ levels of the currently-selected channel and its available pair partner.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EQ] button, then
press the [F2] button.
4 Type & Curve section
The EQ | EQ Library page appears.
2
3
The type and curve of the currently-selected EQ program
are displayed here.
4
2. Use the LAYER buttons to select layers, then
press the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
You can now store the selected channel EQ settings or
recall the EQ library memories to channels. For details on
storing and recalling memories, see “General Library
Operation” on page 74.
The following table lists the preset memories in the EQ
library:
No.
Preset Name
Description
1
Bass Drum 1
Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater.
2
Bass Drum 2
Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.
3
Snare Drum 1
Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds.
4
Snare Drum 2
Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound.
5
Tom-tom 1
Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.
6
Cymbal
Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.
7
High Hat
Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.
8
Percussion
Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such as shakers, cabasas, and congas.
9
E. Bass 1
Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.
10
E. Bass 2
Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass.
11
Syn. Bass 1
Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.
12
Syn. Bass 2
Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass.
13
Piano 1
Makes pianos sound brighter.
14
Piano 2
Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos.
15
E. G. Clean
Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound.
16
E. G. Crunch 1
Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.
17
E. G. Crunch 2
A variation on preset 16.
18
E. G. Dist. 1
Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.
19
E. G. Dist. 2
A variation on preset 18.
20
A. G. Stroke 1
Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars.
21
A. G. Stroke 2
A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with an acoustic-electric nylon string guitar.
22
A. G. Arpeg. 1
Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars.
23
A. G. Arpeg. 2
A variation on preset 22.
24
Brass Sec.
Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument, try adjusting the HIGH
or HIGH-MID frequency.
25
Male Vocal 1
An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the
voice quality.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Libraries
1 CURRENT TYPE
EQ Library
1
81
82
No.
Libraries
Preset Name
Description
26
Male Vocal 2
A variation on preset 25.
27
Female Vo. 1
An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the
voice quality.
28
Female Vo. 2
A variation on preset 27.
29
Chorus&Harmo An EQ template for brightening choruses.
30
Total EQ 1
Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a compressor.
31
Total EQ 2
A variation on preset 30.
32
Total EQ 3
A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output Channels.
33
Bass Drum 3
A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced.
34
Snare Drum 3
A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound.
35
Tom-tom 2
A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges.
36
Piano 3
A variation on preset 13.
37
Piano Low
Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo.
38
Piano High
Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo.
39
Fine-EQ Cass
Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape.
40
Narrator
Ideal for recording narration.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
This chapter describes the Remote function, which enables
you to control external equipment directly from the 01V96i
top panel.
About Remote Function
The 01V96i’s Remote function enables you to control external
DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) equipment, MIDI devices,
etc.
There are two types of Remote functions (Remote and
Machine Control):
■ Machine Control
By using MIDI Machine Control commands and the
DIO/Setup | Machine page, you can control an external
recording machine that is connected to the 01V96i MIDI
port, USB port, or optional MY16-mLAN card installed in
the slot.
Tip: To control external devices from the 01V96i, you can also use
the User Defined buttons. Refer to “Other Functions” on page 109
for more information.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
The 01V96i features Remote Layer target especially designed
for controlling Pro Tools.
■ REMOTE (Remote Layer)
To use these types of Remote functions, you must connect the
01V96i to a target device via USB or an optional
MY16-mLAN card installed in the slot, and operate the faders
and [ON] buttons on the top panel to control the external
device remotely.
You can specify a target device and parameter values on the
DIO/Setup | Remote page. This layer is enabled when you
turn on the LAYER [REMOTE] button. During Remote operation, the controls on the top panel enable you to control the
external device. (You cannot adjust the 01V96i’s parameters
unless you select a different layer.)
You can assign functions of a target device to the controls on
the top panel of the 01V96i by using Remote layer. The following targets are available for remote control:
• ProTools
You can remotely control Digidesign Pro Tools.
• Nuendo
You can remotely control Steinberg Nuendo.
• Cubase
You can remotely control Steinberg Cubase.
• General DAW
You can remotely control DAW software that supports
the protocol used by Pro Tools.
• User Defined
You can also assign MIDI messages to the faders or [ON]
buttons to remotely control a connected MIDI device,
such as a synthesizer.
Connections and Configuring
Pro Tools
Follow the steps below to connect the 01V96i to your computer via the USB port so that you can control Pro Tools from
the 01V96i.
Note: You cannot control Pro Tools via MIDI connections. Be sure
to connect your computer via the USB or an optional
MY16-mLAN card installed in the 01V96i slot.
■ Configuring Windows Computers
1. Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver
from the following URL.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2. Install the driver in your computer as
described in the installation guide included in
the downloaded file.
3. Connect the 01V96i TO HOST USB port to a
USB port on your PC using a USB cable.
4. Make the necessary settings in Pro Tools.
Refer to the Pro Tools Owner’s Manual for more information about Pro Tools settings.
• User Assignable Layer
You can combine the 01V96i channels to create a custom
layer. (See Owner’s Manual for more information on this
function.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
Remote Control
83
84
Remote Control
■ Configuring Macintosh Computers
Configuring the 01V96i
1. Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver
Follow the steps below to set up the 01V96i so that you can
remotely control Pro Tools from the 01V96i Remote Layer.
from the following URL.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2. Install the driver in your computer as
described in the installation guide included in
the downloaded file.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
3. Connect the 01V96i TO HOST USB port to a
USB port on your Mac using a USB cable.
4. Make sure that the 01V96i is powered-on.
5. Launch Pro Tools.
6. Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu to
open the Peripherals window.
7. Double-click the MIDI Controllers tab.
8. Refer to the screen below to set the Type,
Receive From, Send To, and #Ch’s parameters.
The 01V96i can emulate up to two MIDI controllers.
2. Move the cursor to the first DAW parameter
box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section, then
rotate the Parameter wheel to select USB as
the port.
3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the setting.
4. Move the cursor to the adjacent parameter
box (on the right), then rotate the Parameter
wheel to specify the port ID.
Tip: To control Pro Tools remotely, you need one port for
every eight audio channels.
9. When you finish setting the parameters, close
the window.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Note: If you select an incorrect port, you will be unable to use
the Remote function. Be sure to match the port ID with that
specified in the Peripherals window in Pro Tools.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
ton repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Remote
page appears.
1
Display
While the Pro Tools layer is selected, you can use the
[F2]–[F4] buttons as well as the left and right [
]/[
] Tab
Scroll buttons to select display modes. You can select the following display modes using these buttons:
■ Insert Display mode ( [F2] button)
Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode. In this
mode, you can assign and edit plug-ins.
21
34
6. Select ProTools (as the target device) for the
Target parameter (1) located in the
upper-right corner of the page.
By default, the Remote layer target is set to ProTools. If
another target has been selected, rotate the Parameter
wheel to select ProTools.
7. Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button.
The Remote Layer is now available for control, enabling
you to remotely control Pro Tools.
5
1 TARGET
This parameter enables you to select the remote control
target device.
2 COUNTER
This counter indicates the current position. This counter
works in unison with the timecode counter on Pro Tools.
The display format of the counter is specified in Pro
Tools. The following three check boxes in the COUNTER
section indicate the currently-selected format.
• TIME CODE
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Time Code.”
• FEET
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Feet:Frames.”
Note: When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected, the
01V96i’s top panel faders and other channel buttons are
available for remote control. To control the 01V96i, you need
to select an Input Channel Layer or the Master Layer.
• BEATS
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Bars:Beats.”
• If no check boxes are selected
Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or
“Samples.”
3 SELECT ASSIGN
This parameter indicates the current parameter, which
can be adjusted via the parameter controls on the page.
For example, Pan, PanR, SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or
SndE (see page 87).
4 P.WHEEL MODE
This parameter indicates the function currently assigned
to the Parameter wheel (see page 87).
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
5. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] but-
85
86
Remote Control
5 INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section
This section enables you to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools
channels and adjust plug-in settings. Use the left and right
[
]/[
] Tab Scroll buttons to change the parameters
displayed in this section.
■ Channel Display mode ( [F3]
button)
Press the [F3] button to select this display mode, in which the
parameter controls for tracks 1–16 are displayed.
• ASSIGN
Turn on this button to insert plug-ins into Pro Tools
channels. (If you are using the TDM system, you can also
assign outboard effects processors.)
• COMPARE
You can compare your edits with the original settings by
turning on this button. This button works in unison with
the Compare button in the Pro Tools Inserts and Sends
windows.
• BYPASS
Turning on this button bypasses the plug-ins (see
page 92).
• INSERT/PARAM
Switching this button to INSERT enables you to assign
plug-ins using four rotary controls on the page. Switching
this button to PARAM enables you to adjust the plug-in
parameters using the four rotary controls (see page 91).
• Parameter controls 1–16
Channel parameter controls, such as channel 1–16 panpots, Send A–E send levels, etc. are displayed.
■ Meter Display mode ( [F4] button)
Press the [F4] button to select this display mode, in which the
level meters for tracks 1–16 are displayed.
• Information box
This box displays plug-in parameter names, values, alarm
messages from Pro Tools, etc.
• Rotary controls 1–4
These controls enable you to select plug-ins or adjust the
selected plug-in parameters.
• Channels 1–16
The channel 1–16 levels or Send levels are displayed.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Pro Tools Remote Layer
When the Pro Tools Remote layer is selected, the 01V96i controls on the top panel engage the following functions:
■ Channel Strip section
• [SEL] buttons
These buttons select Pro Tools channels, inserts, and
Automation mode.
• [SOLO] buttons
These buttons solo Pro Tools channels. The button indicators for the soloed channels light up.
• [ON] buttons
These buttons mute Pro Tools channels.
• Faders
The faders set Pro Tools channel levels, including the
audio tracks, MIDI tracks, master fader, Aux Ins, etc. If 16
or fewer channels are displayed in Pro Tools, faders are
assigned starting from the left-most channel.
■ FADER MODE Section
• [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons
These buttons select Sends A–E so that you can adjust the
corresponding Pro Tools channel send level.
• [AUX 6] button
Press and hold down this button and press the desired
[SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel fader
level.
Move the cursor to the parameter control on the display,
then press and hold down this button and press [ENTER]
to reset the corresponding channel panpot to center.
While you are holding down the [AUX 6] button, the
SELECT ASSIGN parameter indicates “DFLT.”
• [AUX 7] button
When this button is turned on, you can adjust the selected
channel panpot using the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN]
control. If you turn on this button while a Channel Display mode page is selected, you can adjust each channel
panpot using parameter controls 1–16.
To adjust the stereo channel panpots, press this button
repeatedly to toggle between L and R channels.
• [AUX 8] button
Use this button along with the desired [SEL] button to
assign a plug-in to the corresponding Pro Tools channel
(see page 90).
• [HOME] button
This button turns Flip mode (see page 90) on or off. Flip
mode enables you to adjust the Aux Send parameters
using the faders, [ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control.
■ DISPLAY ACCESS section
• [PAIR/GROUP] button
Press this button while a Channel Display mode or Meter
Display mode page is selected to display a Group ID to
which each channel belongs.
• [EFFECT] button
Press this button to display or hide the Insert window in
Pro Tools.
■ Display section
• [F1] button
Press this button to reset the Clipping and Peak Hold
indicators on Meter Display mode pages.
• Tab Scroll buttons ([
]/[
])
These buttons switch the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT parameter settings on Insert Display mode pages.
■ Data Entry section
• [ENTER] button
This button switches the on/off status of the buttons on
the display.
• Left, Right, Up, Down ([
]/[
]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor
buttons
These buttons move the cursor on the display.
• [INC] & [DEC] buttons
The [INC] button works the same as the Enter key on
your computer keyboard. The [DEC] button works the
same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard.
• Parameter wheel
The Parameter wheel enables you to adjust the currently-selected parameter, or execute the shuttle and
scrub operation. By default, it adjusts the value of the currently-selected parameter (The P.WHEEL MODE
parameter indicates “Prm.”).
■ USER DEFINED KEYS section
• [1]–[8] buttons
You can assign one of 194 parameters to each of these buttons. In particular, if you assign any of 54 Remote Control
parameters to these buttons, you can operate the transport section and select various Pro Tools modes from the
01V96i top panel. For more information on assigning
functions to keys, refer to “Using the User Defined Keys”
in the Owner’s Manual (separate booklet).
Parameter
Function
DAW REC
Places Pro Tools in Record Enabled
mode. The button indicator flashes
while the transport section is
stopped. The indicator lights up
when recording starts.
DAW PLAY
Starts playback from the current cursor position.
DAW STOP
Stops playback and recording.
DAW FF
Fast forwards the cursor position.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
Control Surface Operation
87
88
Remote Control
Parameter
Function
DAW REW
Fast rewinds the cursor position.
DAW SHUTTLE
Switches the Wheel mode to Shuttle.
DAW SCRUB
Switches the Wheel mode to Scrub
(Jog).
DAW AUDITION
You can audition the pre-roll,
post-roll, in-point area, or out-point
area by holding down the button to
which this function is assigned and
pressing a button to which DAW
PRE, DAW POST, DAW IN, or DAW
OUT is assigned.
Parameter
Function
DAW GROUP
STATUS
Displays a Group ID (to which each
channel belongs) below each channel number on a Channel or Meter
Display page (in all caps for a main
group and in lowercase letters for a
sub-group).
DAW MONI
STATUS
Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to view
the current monitoring mode and
the channel strip type.
DAW CREATE
GROUP
Pressing the key (to which this function is assigned) enables you to execute the function specified in the
menu of the Pro Tools Group list.
DAW SUSPEND
GROUP
Suspends all mix groups temporarily.
Press the button again to undo suspension.
DAW WIN
TRANSPORT
Shows or hides the Transport window.
DAW WIN INSERT
Shows or hides the Insert window.
DAW PRE
Plays back from the pre-roll point up
to the beginning of the selected
area.
DAW IN
Plays back from the beginning of the
selected area for a duration specified
as the pre-roll.
DAW OUT
Plays back to the end of the selected
area for a duration specified as the
post-roll.
DAW POST
Plays back from the end of the
selected area for a duration specified
as the post-roll.
DAW WIN
MIX/EDIT
Toggles between the Mix window
and Edit window. (Both windows are
not displayed at the same time.)
DAW RTZ
Moves the playback cursor to the
beginning of the session.
DAW WIN
MEM-LOC
Shows or hides the Memory Locations window.
DAW END
Moves the playback cursor to the
end of the session.
DAW WIN STATUS Shows or hides the Status window.
DAW ONLINE
Toggles between on-line and off-line.
DAW LOOP
Toggles Loop Playback on and off.
DAW
QUICKPUNCH
Toggles QuickPunch on and off.
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW UNDO
Executes the Edit menu’s Undo/Redo
command.
DAW SAVE
Executes the Edit menu’s Save command.
DAW EDIT MODE
Pressing the button (to which this
function is assigned) repeatedly
selects Shuffle, Slip, Spot, or Grid
edit mode in this order.
DAW EDIT TOOL
Pressing the button (to which this
function is assigned) repeatedly
selects one of seven edit tools
(Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber, Smart Tool, Scrubber, and Pencil, in this order).
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO
PLUGIN
Correspond to the Automation Overwrite (Auto Enable) functions.
DAW AUTO
SENDMUTE
DAW SHIFT/ADD
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO
TOUCH
DAW AUTO LATCH Select Automation modes.
DAW AUTO WRITE
Functions in the same way as MacinDAW OPTION/ALL tosh keyboard keys (Shift, Option,
Control, and Alt). Pressing one of the
DAW
buttons (to which these functions
CTRL/CLUCH
are assigned) along with another
button enables you to execute variDAW ALT/FINE
ous commands.
DAW BANK +
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW BANK –
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO
SUSPEND
Cancels Automation recording and
playback for all channels. When
Automation is interrupted, the LED
flashes, and channel strip controls
maintain the current settings.
DAW AUTO
STATUS
Displays the channel Automation
mode (Read, Tch, Ltch, Wrt, or Off).
The mode setting appears at the bottom of each channel on a Channel or
Meter Display page when you press
and hold the button to which this
function is assigned.
01V96i—Reference Manual
DAW Channel +
DAW Channel –
Executes the Bank Swap operation.
Pressing the button (to which this
function is assigned) switches the
entire 16-channel bank.
Executes the Channel Scroll operation. Pressing the buttons (to which
these functions are assigned) enables
you to scroll channels horizontally.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
Function
DAW REC/RDY 2
DAW REC/RDY 3
DAW REC/RDY 4
DAW REC/RDY 5
DAW REC/RDY 6
DAW REC/RDY 7
DAW REC/RDY 8
DAW REC/RDY 9
DAW REC/RDY 10
DAW REC/RDY 11
Pressing the buttons (to which these
functions are assigned) places the
corresponding channel strips in
Record Ready mode. At this time,
the indicator of the button you
pressed flashes. It lights up when
recording starts.
DAW REC/RDY 12
Muting Channels
To mute Pro Tools channels, press the [ON] buttons. The
[ON] button indicators of muted channels turn off. Grouped
channels are muted together.
Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels. The [ON]
button indicators of unmuted channels light up.
There are two mute modes in Pro Tools: Implicit mute and
Explicit mute. You can check the mute mode by viewing the
[ON] button indicators.
• Implicit mute
This is a forced mute mode in which the channels are
muted because other channels are soloed. In this mode,
the [ON] button indicators flash.
• Explicit mute
In this mode, the channels are turned off manually. In this
mode, the [ON] button indicators turn off.
DAW REC/RDY 13
DAW REC/RDY 14
DAW REC/RDY 15
DAW REC/RDY 16
DAW REC/
RDY ALL
If no channel strips are in Record
Enabled mode, pressing the button
(to which this function is assigned)
places all channel strips in Record
Enabled mode. The button indicator
flashes if any channel strip in any
bank is in Record Enabled mode.
Pressing the button while the button
indicator is flashing cancels Record
Enabled mode for all channel strips.
Panning Channels
You can adjust the Pro Tools channel pan settings.
1. Press the FADER MODE [AUX 7] button.
The button indicator lights up.
2. Press the [F3] button to select Channel Display mode.
Selecting Channels
To select a single Pro Tools channel, press the [SEL] button
that corresponds to the desired channel.
To select multiple Pro Tools channels simultaneously, while
holding down one [SEL] button, press the [SEL] buttons of
the other channels you wish to add. Press the [SEL] buttons
again to cancel the selection.
Setting Channel Levels
1. Make sure that the FADER MODE [HOME]
button indicator is lit steadily.
If the indicator is flashing, press the [HOME] button to
turn on the button indicator.
2. Operate the faders to set channel levels.
Press and hold down the [AUX 6] button and press the
desired [SEL] button to reset the corresponding channel
fader level.
On a Channel Display mode page, parameter controls
1–16 indicate the pan settings.
3. Press the [SEL] button of the channel for
which you want to adjust the pan setting.
To adjust the stereo channel panpots, press the STEREO
[SEL] button, then press the [AUX 7] button to select the
L or R channel. Pressing the [AUX 7] button repeatedly
toggles between the left and right channels. When the left
channel is selected, the [AUX 7] button indicator lights
up and the SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display
indicates “Pan.” When the right channel is selected, the
[AUX 7] button indicator flashes and the SELECT
ASSIGN parameter indicates “PanR.”
Note: Before you adjust monaural channel panpots, first be
sure the [AUX 7] button indicator is illuminated steadily. If
the indicator is flashing, operating the [PAN] control will be
ineffective.
4. Adjust the selected channel panpot using the
SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control.
5. To reset the corresponding channel panpot
to center, move the cursor to the parameter
control on the display, then press and hold
down the [AUX 6] button and press [ENTER].
You can reset the pan settings only when the [AUX 7] button indicator is lit steadily.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
Parameter
DAW REC/RDY 1
89
90
Remote Control
Soloing Channels
Flip Mode
To solo Pro Tools channels, press the [SOLO] buttons of the
desired channels. Grouped channels are soloed together, and
other channels are muted.
Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo the channels.
In Flip mode, you can use the faders, [ON] buttons, and the
[PAN] control to control send levels, pre/post positions, and
mute settings as shown in the following table.
Configuring Sends A–E as Pre or
Post
You can set Pro Tools channels for the selected Sends (A–E)
to pre or post.
1. Press the [F3] button to select Channel Display mode.
2. Press the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends (A–E).
Control
Normal mode
Flip Mode
Faders
Channel level
AUX Send level
[ON] buttons
Channel mute
AUX Send mute
[PAN] control
Channel pan
AUX Send pan
1. Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button
repeatedly so that the button indicator
flashes.
The SELECT ASSIGN parameter on the display indicates
“FLIP.”
2. Press the FADER MODE [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Aux Sends (A–E).
The button indicator of the selected send lights up.
3. To toggle between pre and post, move the
cursor to the parameter control on the display, then press [ENTER].
Pressing [ENTER] repeatedly toggles between pre and
post.
Setting Send Levels
You can adjust Pro Tools Send (A–E) send levels as follows.
1. Press the [F3] button to select Channel Display mode.
2. Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons to select the desired Sends (A–E).
3. Move the cursor to the parameter control of
the channel for which you want to adjust the
Send level, then rotate the Parameter wheel.
You can set Send levels by operating the faders if faders,
[ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control are in Flip mode.
Refer to “Flip Mode” for more information.
Muting Sends A–E
You can mute Sends by pressing the [ON] buttons if faders,
[ON] buttons, and the [PAN] control are in Flip mode. Refer
to “Flip Mode” for more information.
Panning Sends A–E
You can pan channel signals sent to stereo Aux Sends by rotating the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control if faders, [ON]
buttons, and the [PAN] control are in Flip mode. Refer to the
next section for more information.
01V96i—Reference Manual
3. Use the faders, [ON] buttons, and the [PAN]
control to control the currently-selected Aux
send.
For stereo Aux input channels, you can set the left and
right panpots individually. To do this, press the FADER
MODE [AUX 7] button repeatedly. When the button
indicator is lit continuously, you can set the left panpot.
When the button indicator is flashing, you can set the
right panpot.
Assigning Plug-ins to Pro Tools
Channels
You can assign plug-ins to five inserts available for Pro Tools
channel strips as follows.
1. Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display
mode.
2. Press the FADER MODE [AUX 8] button.
The [AUX 8] button indicator flashes. You can now select
a channel to which you want to insert plug-ins.
3. Press the [SEL] button of each desired channel.
4. Make sure that the INSERT/PARAM button
(1) is selected in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT
section.
Pro Tools Remote Layer
2
1
Editing Plug-ins
You can edit plug-ins inserted in the channel strips as follows:
1. Press the [F2] button to select Insert Display
mode.
2. Press the corresponding [SEL] button to
select the channel that was assigned the
plug-in you want to edit.
3. In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, move
5. Move the cursor to the ASSIGN button (2),
then press [ENTER] to turn on the button.
You can now select plug-ins. If you press another channel’s [SEL] button after you turn on the ASSIGN button,
the button turns off. If you wish to assign plug-ins to
other channels, turn on the ASSIGN button again.
the cursor to the parameter control (Insert
1–4) that was assigned the parameter you
want to edit.
Note: To adjust a plug-in assigned to insert #5, press the Tab
Scroll button [
] to change the parameter indication in the
INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then select a parameter control.
6. Move the cursor to one of the four parameter
controls, then rotate the Parameter wheel to
select a plug-in.
By default, the parameter controls enable you to select
plug-ins to be assigned to channel inserts #1–#4. To
assign a plug-in to insert #5, press the Tab Scroll button
[
] to change the indication in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section.
If you are using the TDM system, you can also assign outboard effects processors.
4. Press [ENTER] to display the parameters.
In the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, the PARAM button is automatically selected and the Information box
indicates the selected plug-in parameters.
You can now use parameter controls 1–4 and the
[ENTER] button to adjust the parameters.
7. Press [ENTER] to confirm the assignment.
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to assign more plug-ins to other
insert positions in the channel strip.
8. In the same way, assign plug-ins to other
channels.
9. When you finish assigning plug-ins, press the
[AUX 8] button.
5. Use the Tab Scroll buttons to display the
parameter value you wish to change.
Most plug-ins feature five or more parameters. To edit the
fifth or subsequent parameters, use the Tab Scroll buttons
to display the desired parameters and their values in the
INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section. The current page number and the plug-in name appear for a moment immediately after you press the Tab Scroll buttons.
The button indicator turns off.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
If the PARAM button is selected instead, move the cursor
to the button, then press [ENTER] to select INSERT.
91
92
Remote Control
6. Move the cursor to a parameter control, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[ENTER] button to adjust the value.
One or two parameters are assigned to a single parameter
control. To turn the parameter setting on or off, press
[ENTER]. To modify the parameter variable, rotate the
Parameter wheel.
Scrub & Shuttle
By assigning the DAW SCRUB parameter to one of the User
Defined buttons [1]–[8], you can scrub Pro Tools tracks back
and forth by turning the Parameter wheel. By assigning the
DAW SHUTTLE parameter to one of the User Defined buttons [1]–[8], you can shuttle back and forth by turning the
Parameter wheel.
1. Assign the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE
parameter to one of the User Defined buttons
[1]–[8].
Before assigning parameters to these buttons, you must
switch layers to cancel the Remote function. For more
information on assigning the user defined keys, refer to
“Using the User Defined Keys” in the Owner’s Manual
(separate booklet).
7. When you finish adjusting the parameters,
move the cursor to the INSERT/PARAM button, then press [ENTER] to switch it to INSERT.
2. Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to enable
remote control of Pro Tools.
3. Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped.
Bypassing Plug-ins
You can bypass plug-ins assigned to Pro Tools channels.
Before bypassing plug-ins, you must press the corresponding
[SEL] button to select a channel to which the plug-ins have
been assigned, then press the [F2] button to select Insert Display mode.
To bypass plug-ins, display the parameters of the plug-in you
wish to bypass in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section, then
turn on the BYPASS button.
4. Press the User Defined button to which you
assigned the DAW SCRUB or DAW SHUTTLE
parameter in Step 1.
You can now use the Scrub or Shuttle function.
5. Rotate the Parameter wheel.
Rotate the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub or shuttle
forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to scrub or shuttle
backwards.
The minimum scrub playback step varies depending on
the zoom setting in the Pro Tools Edit window.
6. To cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function, press
the User Defined button or DAW SHUTTLE to
which you assigned the DAW SCRUB parameter in Step 1.
Alternatively, you can cancel the Scrub or Shuttle function by pressing the User Defined button to which the
DAW STOP parameter is assigned. The Scrub function is
automatically cancelled if you commence playback or fast
forward.
Note: The Scrub/Shuttle operation might be stopped unexpectedly by Pro Tools. Therefore, whenever you use the Scrub
or Shuttle function, make sure that the P.WHEEL MODE
parameter indicates “SCRUB” or “SHUTTLE.” You can check
the Scrub/Shuttle function status by viewing the corresponding User Defined button indicator.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Nuendo/Cubase Remote Layer
If you assign a parameter that controls Pro Tools Automation
mode (such as DAW Auto Read, DAW Auto Touch, etc.) to
one of the User Defined buttons, you can control the Automation settings for each channel by using that User Defined button. For more information on assigning functions to the user
defined keys, refer to “Using the User Defined Keys” in the
Owner’s Manual (separate booklet).
Press the STEREO OUT channel [SEL] button. The button
indicator lights up, and the Channel 1–16 [SEL] buttons
become available for the Automation mode setting.
Press the desired channel [SEL] buttons while pressing the
programmed User Defined button to switch the corresponding channels’ Automation settings.
While the channel [SEL] buttons are available for the Automation mode setting, pressing the [SEL] buttons will cause
the Fader Touch or Untouch command to be transmitted to
Pro Tools. This is useful for Automation punch in and out
recording.
Note: Operating a fader also causes the Fader Touch command
to be transmitted. Also, whenever the transport mode changes
(such as Play and Stop), the Fader Untouch command is transmitted.
Depending on the currently-selected Automation mode, the
channel [SEL] button indicators operate as follows:
User Defined Keys
Function
Pro Tools
Automation
Mode
DAW AUTO WRITE
Auto write
DAW AUTO TOUTCH
Auto touch
DAW AUTO LATCH
Auto latch
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO OFF
Auto read
Auto off
[SEL] Button
Indicators
Nuendo/Cubase Remote
Layer
You can remotely control Nuendo and Cubase using the
Remote Layer.
■ Configuring Computers
1. Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver
from the following URL, and install the driver
as described in the included installation
guide.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2. Use a USB cable to connect the 01V96i.
3. Make sure that the 01V96i is powered-on.
4. Launch Nuendo/Cubase, select the Device
Setup menu, and set up Nuendo/Cubase so
that the 01V96i can communicate with the
software.
Refer to the Nuendo/Cubase User’s Manual for more
information on setting up the software.
■ Configuring the 01V96i
1. Refer to page 84 to configure the DIO/Setup
Flashing red
(Record Ready)
Red (Recording)
Illuminated
steadily
Off
| MIDI/HOST page.
2. Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to set the
TARGET parameter to Nuendo/Cubase.
You can now remotely control Nuendo/Cubase using the
Remote Layer.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
Automation
93
94
Remote Control
Other DAW Remote Layer
MIDI Remote Layer
You can remotely control DAW software that supports the
Pro Tools protocol.
If you select USER DEFINED as the target for the Remote
Layer, you can remotely control the parameters of external
MIDI devices (such as synthesizers and tone generators) by
operating the channel [ON] buttons, and faders to output various MIDI messages. (This is called MIDI Remote function.)
You can store MIDI messages assigned to the channel controls in four banks. When the 01V96i is shipped from the factory, it includes MIDI settings in these banks, which you can
quickly recall to use the MIDI Remote function.
If necessary, you can also assign other MIDI messages to the
faders or [ON] buttons to remotely control the parameters of
a connected MIDI device.
■ Configuring Computers
1. Download the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver
from the following URL, and install the driver
as described in the included installation
guide.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
2. Launch and set up the DAW software so that
the 01V96i communicates with the software.
Refer to the DAW software’s user’s manual for more information on setting up the software.
■ Configuring the 01V96i
1. Refer to page 84 to configure the DIO/Setup
| MIDI/HOST page.
2. Use a USB cable to connect the 01V96i.
Using the MIDI Remote
Function
This section describes how to recall and use the factory-preset
MIDI Remote settings stored in the banks.
By default, the 01V96i’s four MIDI Remote banks (Banks
1–4) contain the following MIDI messages.
Control Function
Bank
Usage
3. Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to set the
[ON]
buttons
Faders
TARGET parameter to General DAW.
1
Panning and setting GM
sound levels
—
Volume
You can now remotely control the DAW software using
the Remote Layer.
2
Setting GM sound effect
send levels
—
Effect Send
3
Setting XG sound levels
—
Volume
4
Adjusting mute, and levels
for Cubase series mixer
Mute
Volume
1. Connect the 01V96i’s MIDI OUT port to the
MIDI IN port of the MIDI device.
MIDI IN
MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER
Integrated Sampling Sequencer
Real-time External Control Sur face
Modular Synthesis Plug-in System
SONG SCENE
REC
MIDI OUT
Synthesizer
CH1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CH5-8
12
13
15
CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
14
16
R
IN
INPUT
OUT
2TR
(BAL)
-10dBV (UNBAL)
PHONES
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
CH15/16
2TR IN
MONITOR
2TR IN
PAD
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
DIO/SETUP
SCENE
-16
+4 GAIN -26
-60
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
13
0
LEVEL
+4 GAIN -26
PEAK
14 15
SIGNAL
PEAK
16
SIGNAL
SCENE MEMORY
MIDI
UTILITY
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
STORE
RECALL
SOLO
CLEAR
OVER
PAN/
/ INSERT/
ROUTING
DELAY
0
-3
-6
EQ
DYNAMICS
EFFECT
DEC
INC
-9
VIEW
-12
FADER MODE
-15
-18
-24
-30
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 7
AUX 8
-36
HIGH
Q
-48
STEREO
AUX 5
AUX 6
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
HOME (METER)
LOW-MID
LAYER
ENTER
1-16
17-32
ST IN
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+10
0 +10
5
0 +10
5
0
5
0 +10
5
5
5
0
5
5
5
5
15
5
15
0 +10
5
15
15
15
15
0
10
5
10
5
15
5
15
15
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
70
40
50
1
15
15
2
15
20 10
3
4
15
5
15
6
15
7
15
8
9
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
10
11
12
13
20 10
14
ON
ST IN 2
0
5
10
15
20 10
SEL
SOLO
ON
ST IN 1
10
15
SEL
SOLO
ON
0
10
5
SEL
5
5
0
0
10
5
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
5
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
0 +10
5
5
0
10
10
10
0 +10
5
5
0
0
10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
0 +10
5
5
0
10
10
5
0 +10
5
5
5
0
01V96i—Reference Manual
LOW
GAIN
MASTER REMOTE
15
40
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
BUS 1
BUS 2
BUS 3
BUS 4
BUS 5
BUS 6
BUS 7
BUS 8
STEREO
10
PHONES
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MIDI Remote Layer
ton repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
1 TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE
This button switches the MIDI Remote function between
enable and disable.
2 INITIALIZE
1
This button resets the settings stored in the bank selected
by the BANK parameter their default settings.
3 BANK
This parameter enables you to select one of four banks.
4 ID, SHORT, LONG
These parameters display the channel names. The ID
parameter displays the channel ID (RM01–RM16) for the
currently-controlled MIDI device.
5 ON section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned to the [ON] buttons for the
currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
3. Move the cursor to the REMOTE parameter
box (1) in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section,
rotate the Parameter wheel to select MIDI,
then press [ENTER].
If the MIDI port is already in use, a window confirming
the assignment change appears. Move the cursor to the
YES button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the REMOTE parameter box is grayed out, proceed to
Steps 4 and 5 to set the TARGET parameter, then return to
Steps 2 and 3.
4. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Remote
page appears.
5. Move the cursor to the TARGET parameter
box, rotate the Parameter wheel to select
USER DEFINED, then press [ENTER].
The confirmation window for changing the setting
appears. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press
[ENTER]. The display changes as follows:
4
1
2
3
• LATCH/UNLATCH
This button toggles between Latch and Unlatch for [ON]
button operation.
• LEARN
When you turn on this button, MIDI messages received
at the MIDI IN port are assigned to the DATA parameter
boxes.
• DATA parameter boxes
These boxes display the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabets) assigned to the [ON] button).
6 FADER section
This section displays the type of MIDI messages (in hexadecimal or alphabet) assigned to the faders for the currently-selected channels (RM01–RM16).
6. Move the cursor to the desired bank button
(BANK parameter buttons 1–4), then press
[ENTER].
7. Press the LAYER [REMOTE] button to select
Remote layer.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function.
8. Use the faders and [ON] buttons to control
the MIDI device.
5
6
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] but-
95
96
Remote Control
Assigning MIDI Messages to
Channel Controls
You can quickly use the MIDI Remote function if you use the
factory presets in the banks. However, you can also assign the
desired MIDI messages to the faders or [ON] buttons.
This section describes how to assign MIDI messages to the
channel controls, using the example of assigning Hold
On/Off messages (Control Change #64; Values 127 & 0) to the
Channel 1 [ON] button.
5. Move the cursor to the LEARN button in the
ON section, then press [ENTER].
MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN port of the
01V96i will be assigned to the DATA parameter boxes in
the ON section.
6. Press and hold down the MIDI keyboard foot
switch.
The MIDI Hold On message is assigned in the DATA
parameter box.
1. Connect the 01V96i’s MIDI IN port to the
MIDI OUT port of a MIDI keyboard to which
a Hold On/Off controllable foot switch is connected. Enable the MIDI Remote function on
the 01V96i.
MIDI messages are described below:
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI keyboard
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
CH1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CH5-8
12
13
15
14
16
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
R
IN
OUT
2TR
(BAL)
-10dBV (UNBAL)
PHONES
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
CH15/16
2TR IN
INSERT I/O
MONITOR
2TR IN
PAD
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
DIO/SETUP
SCENE
13
PEAK
14 15
SIGNAL
0
LEVEL
10
PHONES
PEAK
16
SIGNAL
SCENE MEMORY
MIDI
UTILITY
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
EFFECT
VIEW
STORE
RECALL
SOLO
CLEAR
OVER
PAN/
/ INSERT/
ROUTING
DELAY
0
-3
-6
EQ
DYNAMICS
DEC
INC
-9
-12
FADER MODE
-15
-18
-24
-30
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
-36
HIGH
Q
-48
STEREO
HIGH-MID
Foot switch
FREQUENCY
HOME (METER)
LOW-MID
LAYER
ENTER
1-16
17-32
LOW
GAIN
MASTER REMOTE
ST IN
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
1
+10
ON
2
0 +10
5
15
15
15
15
15
10
5
15
15
20 10
15
15
15
15
10
5
10
0
5
5
10
10
15
15
20 10
20 10
20
20
30
15
10
10
5
15
5
15
5
15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
70
40
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
SEL
SOLO
ON
ON
ST IN 1
0
0
20 10
5
SEL
SOLO
ST IN 2
Tip: When you click the LEARN button to assign MIDI messages, the 01V96i automatically recognizes the end of the
messages and assigns END and “–.”
7. While continuing to hold down the foot
5
5
0
20 10
15
20 10
ON
16
0 +10
5
5
0
SEL
ON
15
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
14
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
13
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
12
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
11
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
10
0 +10
5
5
0
20 10
ON
9
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
ON
8
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
7
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
6
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
20 10
ON
5
0 +10
5
5
0
10
5
ON
4
0 +10
5
5
0
10
ON
3
0 +10
5
5
0
• END
This message indicates the end of MIDI messages. Subsequent messages assigned in the DATA parameter boxes
will be ignored.
• –
This message indicates that no messages are assigned to
the DATA parameter boxes.
CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
INPUT
• 00–7F
MIDI messages are expressed in hexadecimal.
15
40
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
BUS 1
BUS 2
BUS 3
BUS 4
BUS 5
BUS 6
BUS 7
BUS 8
STEREO
switch, turn off the LEARN button.
8. Move the cursor to the third parameter box
(“7F” in this example), then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the value to SW.
2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Remote
page appears, then set the TARGET parameter to USER DEFINED.
You can now use the MIDI Remote function. Refer to the
previous section for more information on using the MIDI
Remote function.
3. Move the cursor to the desired bank button
(BANK parameter buttons 1–4), then press
[ENTER].
4. Press the [SEL] buttons for the desired channels.
Currently-assigned MIDI messages appear in the ON and
FADER sections.
Tip: You can also choose the desired channels using the ID,
SHORT, and LONG parameters.
01V96i—Reference Manual
“SW” is a variable that changes depending on the [ON]
button’s on/off status. You can use the following variables
in MIDI messages.
• SW
This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter
boxes of the ON section. When the [ON] buttons are
turned on, “7F” (127 in decimal) is output. When the
[ON] buttons are turned off, “00” (0 in decimal) is output.
• FAD
This variable is selectable only in the DATA parameter
boxes of the FADER section. When you operate the faders, continuously changing values in the range of 00 to 7F
(0–127 in decimal) are output.
MIDI Remote Layer
Note: Be sure to set one of the DATA parameter boxes of the
FADER section to “FAD.” If no “FAD” is assigned, fader operation is ignored.
■ When “SW” is not assigned:
• UNLATCH
MIDI data transmission
Off
Illuminated
Off
9. Move the cursor to the LATCH/UNLATCH button, then press [ENTER] to select LATCH or
UNLATCH depending on how you want the
[ON] buttons to function.
• LATCH.................... Pressing the [ON] buttons repeatedly transmits alternating On and
Off messages.
• UNLATCH............. Pressing and holding down the [ON]
buttons transmits On messages, and
releasing the [ON] buttons transmits
Off messages.
Tip: Refer to the diagrams below for information on how the
[ON] buttons behave when Latch or Unlatch is selected.
■ When “SW” is assigned:
• LATCH
MIDI data transmission
(SW=7F)
Off
MIDI data transmission
(SW=00)
Illuminated
Tip: In most situations, select Unlatch if SW is not assigned.
10. To change the channel name, move the cursor to the ID LONG parameter box, then press
[ENTER] to display the Title Edit window.
For more information on entering names, refer to “Title
Edit Window” in the Owner’s Manual (separate booklet).
Tip:
• Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press
[ENTER]. A window is displayed that enables you to reset
the parameter settings in the currently-selected bank.
• You can also assign MIDI messages to the parameter boxes
manually without using the LEARN button.
Off
• UNLATCH
MIDI data
transmission
(SW=7F)
Off
Illuminated
MIDI data
transmission
(SW=00)
Off
01V96i—Reference Manual
Remote Control
Tip: If “SW” is not assigned in the DATA parameter boxes of
the ON section, the current MIDI messages are output.
97
98
Remote Control
Machine Control Function
The 01V96i can control the transport functions and select
tracks on external recording machines that support MMC by
transmitting commands via the MIDI OUT port or USB port.
Note: Controllable parameters vary depending on the connected
devices. Refer to the User’s Manual for the external device for
more information on controllable parameters.
1. Refer to the diagram below for information
on connecting the 01V96i to an external
device.
• MIDI .................MIDI port
• USB....................USB port
• SLOT .................Slot with an MY16-mLAN (mLAN card)
installed
If USB is selected, move the cursor to the adjacent parameter box (on the right), and select one of eight ports.
4. Move the cursor to the DEVICE ID parameter
box, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set
the 01V96i MMC Device ID to the same ID
number as the external device.
MMC commands are effective on devices that use the
same Device ID. Therefore, the MMC Device ID needs to
match the ID of the devices you wish to control.
5. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] butMIDI OUT
MIDI IN
CH1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MIDI OUT
CH5-8
12
13
15
MIDI IN
CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
14
16
R
IN
INPUT
ton repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Machine
page appears.
OUT
2TR
(BAL)
-10dBV (UNBAL)
PHONES
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
CH15/16
2TR IN
MONITOR
2TR IN
PAD
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
DIO/SETUP
SCENE
-16
+4 GAIN -26
-60
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
13
0
LEVEL
+4 GAIN -26
PEAK
14 15
SIGNAL
PEAK
16
SIGNAL
SCENE MEMORY
MIDI
UTILITY
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
STORE
RECALL
SOLO
10
PHONES
MMC-supported
machine
2
1
CLEAR
OVER
PAN/
/ INSERT/
ROUTING
DELAY
0
-3
-6
EQ
DYNAMICS
EFFECT
DEC
INC
-9
VIEW
-12
FADER MODE
-15
-18
-24
-30
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
-36
HIGH
Q
-48
STEREO
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
HOME (METER)
LOW-MID
LAYER
ENTER
1-16
17-32
LOW
GAIN
MASTER REMOTE
ST IN
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+10
0 +10
5
0 +10
5
0
0
5
0
5
0
10
0
10
0 +10
5
0
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
0
0
5
5
0
10
10
10
10
15
15
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
70
5
15
5
15
20 10
40
50
1
5
15
20 10
2
5
15
20 10
3
4
5
15
5
5
15
6
5
15
7
5
15
5
15
20 10
8
5
15
20 10
9
5
15
10
5
15
20 10
20 10
11
12
5
15
13
5
15
14
SEL
SOLO
ON
ON
ST IN 1
15
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
ST IN 2
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
5
10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
SEL
5
15
15
5
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
BUS 1
BUS 2
BUS 3
BUS 4
BUS 5
BUS 6
BUS 7
BUS 8
STEREO
2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears.
4
3
This page contains the following parameters:
1 LOCATE/TIME section
1
3. Move the cursor to the PORT parameter box
in the MACHINE CONTROL section (1), then
rotate the Parameter wheel to select the
MMC destination.
The following ports and slot are available as the MMC
destination.
01V96i—Reference Manual
This section enables you to set the locate points.
• LOCATE 1–8..........These buttons locate the positions
(specified by the TIME values) on
external machines.
• RTZ...........................This Return To Zero button locates
the zero timecode position on external machines.
• TIME........................Locate points are specified in
hour/minute/second/frame format.
• CAPTURE ..............These buttons capture the current
position on external machines and
import the information into the
TIME column.
2 TRACK ARMING section
This section controls the tracks on external machines.
• 1–24 buttons...........These buttons turn external tracks
1–24 on or off, and set or cancel their
Record Ready mode.
• ALL CLEAR............Turning on this button switches all
buttons (1–24) simultaneously.
Machine Control Function
99
•
•
•
•
•
Remote Control
3 TRANSPORT section
This section enables you to control the transport functions on external machines.
REW......................... This button starts rewind on external
machines.
FF.............................. This button starts fast forward on
external machines.
STOP........................ This button stops external machines.
PLAY........................ This button starts playback on external machines.
REC .......................... This button is used in conjunction
with the PLAY button to start
recording on external machines.
4 FRAMES
This parameter selects the timecode frame rate from 24,
25, 30D (drop frame), and 30.
6. To control the transport functions, move the
cursor to the desired button in the TRANSPORT section, then press [ENTER].
7. If you desire, move the cursor to the buttons
and parameters in the LOCATE/TIME section
and the TRACK ARMING section, then press
the [ENTER] button or rotate the Parameter
wheel to control the transport functions on
external machines.
Tip: You can also use the programmed User Defined buttons
to control Machine Control functions. For more information
on assigning functions to the user defined keys, refer to “Using
the User Defined Keys” in the Owner’s Manual (separate
booklet).
01V96i—Reference Manual
100
MIDI
MIDI
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s MIDI-related functions.
MIDI & the 01V96i
Using Control Changes, Program Changes, and other MIDI
messages enables you to recall Scenes and edit parameters on
the 01V96i, and store 01V96i internal data on external MIDI
devices.
The 01V96i supports the following MIDI messages. Each of
these MIDI messages can be individually turned on or off for
transmission and reception.
• Program Changes
If you assign the 01V96i’s Scenes to Program Change
numbers, the 01V96i transmits Program Changes when it
recalls Scenes. Also, the 01V96i will switch Scenes when
it receives Program Changes.
• Control Changes
If you assign the 01V96i’s parameters to Control Change
numbers, the 01V96i transmits the assigned Control
Changes when the parameter values change. Also, the
01V96i changes certain parameter values when it receives
the corresponding Control Changes.
• System Exclusive Messages
The 01V96i transmits System Exclusive Parameter
Changes in real-time when the parameter values change.
Also, the 01V96i notifies certain parameter values when
it receives assigned Parameter Changes.
• MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
MMC is used for external machine control.
• MIDI Note On/Off
These messages are used to adjust the Freeze effect.
• Bulk Dump Messages
These messages enable you to store the 01V96i’s internal
data to a sequencer or MIDI filer. When the 01V96i
receives these messages, they overwrite the 01V96i data
01V96i—Reference Manual
The 01V96i features the following interface for transmitting
and receiving MIDI data.
• MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports
These ports transmit and receive MIDI data to and from
standard MIDI devices. Each port is a single port interface that transmits and receives single-port data (16 channels x 1 ports). The MIDI THRU port outputs MIDI
messages received at the MIDI IN port without modification (as is).
• USB port
This port is used to connect a computer and transfer
MIDI messages. This is a multiport interface that transmits and receives up to eight-port data (16 channels x 8
ports). In order to connect the 01V96i via USB to a computer, the appropriate driver software must be installed in
the computer. You can download this software from the
Yamaha Pro Audio website.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
For more information about installation and setup, refer
to the above website and to the installation guide
included with the program you downloaded.
Note: If the computer is turned on but the USB MIDI application has not been launched, 01V96i performance may be
slow. In this case, cancel the assignment of the USB port as
the MIDI message transmission port.
• SLOT
If an optional “MY16-mLAN” I/O card is installed in the
slot, MIDI data transfer to and from an external MIDI
device is available via the MY16-mLAN card.
MIDI Port Setup
This section enables you to select a remote control
method and a remote control port to control external
devices that support MMC.
Selecting a Port for MIDI
Message Transfer
To configure MIDI ports for MIDI message transfer, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the
DIO/Setup | MIDI/Host page appears. This page enables you
to set MIDI message input and output.
4
• PORT
Select MIDI, USB, or SLOT for MMC command transfer.
If you select USB or SLOT, specify the port number in the
right parameter box.
• DEVICE ID
Specify the 01V96i’s MMC Device ID. MMC Device IDs
identify connected devices, enabling recognition during
MMC transmission and reception.
4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section
This section enables you to specify ports for various special functions.
• Studio Manager
In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB or SLOT as
the port used by the included Studio Manager software.
In the two small parameter boxes on the right, specify a
port number (if you selected USB), and an ID number.
• DAW
Select USB or SLOT as a port for use with a DAW. Specify
in the right parameter box a port number pair (1–2, 3–4,
5–6, 7–8).
2
3
The following parameters are available on this page:
1 GENERAL section
This section enables you to select ports that transmit and
receive MIDI messages, such as Program Changes and
Control Changes.
• Rx PORT
This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data
reception. In the left parameter box, select MIDI, USB, or
SLOT. If you select USB or SLOT, specify the port number
(1–8) in the right parameter box.
• Tx PORT
This parameter specifies a port for general MIDI data
transmission. The available ports are the same as for the
Rx PORT parameter.
• REMOTE
This parameter indicates the target currently selected for
Remote Layer. If the target is set to “USER DEFINED,”
you can select a MIDI message destination port.
• CASCADE LINK
This parameter determines whether MIDI messages are
transmitted between two cascaded 01V96is. If you select
MIDI, MIDI messages will be transferred between two
cascaded units. If you select “–,” no MIDI messages are
transferred.
The TRANSMIT and REQUEST buttons are used to synchronize all parameters that are cascade-linked. The
TRANSMIT button synchronizes the connected 01V96i’s
parameters to your primary 01V96i’s parameters. The
REQUEST button synchronizes your 01V96i parameters
to the connected 01V96i’s parameters.
2 MIDI THRU section
These parameters enable you to route incoming MIDI
data from one port or slot to another without changes.
Select a port for reception in the first parameter box, and
select a port for transmission in the next parameter box
(located to the right of the arrow). If you select USB or
SLOT, specify the port number in the small parameter
box adjacent to the port parameter box.
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI
3 MACHINE CONTROL section
MIDI Port Setup
1
101
102
MIDI
Selecting MIDI Messages for
Transmission and Reception
You can select MIDI messages to be transmitted or received at
a specified port.
To do so, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button, then
press the [F1] button to display the MIDI | Setup page.
1
2
3
4
5
6
This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk
Dump data.
• Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Bulk Dump data is
enabled or disabled.
6 OTHER COMMANDS
• ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether
other MIDI messages received at the
MIDI IN port are echoed through to
the MIDI OUT port.
Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the
CHANNEL row, and turn the transmission and reception of
each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the parameter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS.
1 CHANNEL
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission and reception. The
following parameters are available in this row:
• Tx ..............................This parameter box specifies a MIDI
Transmit Channel.
• Rx ..............................This parameter box specifies a MIDI
Receive Channel.
2 PROGRAM CHANGE
•
•
•
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and
reception of Parameter Changes.
• Tx ON/OFF ............Transmission of Parameter Change
messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether
Parameter Change messages
received at the MIDI IN port are
echoed through to the MIDI OUT
port.
5 BULK
7
•
4 PARAMETER CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and
reception of Program Changes.
Tx ON/OFF ............Transmission of Program Change
messages is enabled or disabled.
Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
OMNI ON/OFF.....When this button is turned on, Program Changes on all MIDI Channels
are received regardless of the
CHANNEL row settings.
ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether
Program Change messages received
at the MIDI IN port are echoed
through to the MIDI OUT port.
3 CONTROL CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and
reception of Control Changes.
• Tx ON/OFF ............Transmission of Control Change
messages is enabled or disabled.
• Rx ON/OFF ............Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
• ECHO ON/OFF.....This button determines whether
Control Change messages received
at the MIDI IN port are echoed
through to the MIDI OUT port.
01V96i—Reference Manual
7 Fader Resolution
This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the 01V96i’s faders. To transfer
fader value data between two cascaded 01V96is, or to
record the 01V96i operation to or play it back from a
sequencer, select the HIGH button. When the LOW button is selected, the fader resolution switches to 256 steps.
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall
You can assign 01V96i Scenes to MIDI Program Changes for
remote recall. When you recall a Scene on the 01V96i, the
unit transmits the assigned Program Change to the connected
MIDI device. When the 01V96i receives a Program Change,
the assigned Scene is recalled.
Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99, and Scene #0 is assigned to Program Change #100, although you can change these
assignments.
Tip: You can store a Scene to Program Change assignment table
to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the Studio
Manager software.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports
for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 101).
2. Make connections using the ports selected in
5. Press the cursor button [
] to move the cursor to a parameter box in the SCENE
NO./TITLE column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select Scenes.
Tip:
• If you assign a Scene to multiple Program Changes, the
Program Change with the lowest number becomes effective.
• You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER].
6. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button,
then press the [F1] button to display the MIDI
| Setup page, then specify the MIDI Transmit
and Receive Channels.
7. Turn on the PROGRAM CHANGE Tx ON/OFF
and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
Now, when the 01V96i receives the Program Changes on
the specified MIDI Channels, the corresponding Scenes
are recalled. Also, when you switch Scenes on the 01V96i,
the 01V96i transmits the Program Changes on the specified MIDI Channels.
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transfer MIDI
messages to and from the external device.
3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button,
then press the [F2] button.
The MIDI | Pgm Asgn page appears.
4. Move the cursor to a parameter box in the
PGM CHG column, and rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the Program Change numbers to which
you want to assign Scenes.
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI
Assigning Scenes to
Program Changes for
Remote Recall
103
104
MIDI
Assigning Parameters to
Control Changes for
Real-time Control
You can assign 01V96i parameters to MIDI Control Changes
for real-time control. When the 01V96i receives a Control
Change, the assigned 01V96i parameter is set accordingly.
Also, when you adjust a parameter on the 01V96i, the 01V96i
transmits the assigned Control Change message.
Tip: You can store a Parameter to Control Change assignment
table to an external device by using MIDI Bulk Dump or the Studio Manager software.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports
for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 101).
2. Make connections using the ports selected in
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transfer MIDI
messages to and from the external device.
3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button,
then press the [F3] button.
The MIDI | Ctl Asgn page appears. This page enables you
to assign 01V96i parameters to Control Changes.
1
• NRPN
The assignments on the Ctl Asgn page are ignored, and
predefined NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Numbers) are transmitted for remote control.
Tip: NRPNs are special MIDI messages that combine three
different Control Changes. They enable you to control many
parameters on a single MIDI Channel.
5. If you turned on the TABLE button in Step 4,
move the cursor to a parameter box in the No.
(CH) column, then rotate the Parameter
wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to
select the MIDI channels and Control
Changes to which you want to assign parameters.
You can assign parameters to up to 16-channel Control
Changes on the Ctl Asgn page, regardless of the MIDI
Channels currently selected for transmission and reception.
Skip Steps 5 and 6 if you turned on the NRPN button in
Step 4.
6. Select parameters in the parameter boxes in
the three PARAMETER columns.
Select a parameter group in the parameter box in the first
PARAMETER column, and specify the desired values in
the parameter boxes in the second and third PARAMETER columns.
The following parameters and values are available:
HIGH
NO ASSIGN
MID
LOW
—
—
CHANNEL
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
FADER H
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
Tip: See page 157 for information on the default Parameter
to Control Change assignments.
4. Move the cursor to the MODE parameter’s
TABLE button (1), then press [ENTER].
The MODE parameter determines which MIDI messages
are transmitted when 01V96i parameters are adjusted.
The following options are available for the MODE
parameter:
• TABLE
MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page.
01V96i—Reference Manual
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
CHANNEL
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
AUX1 SEND
AUX2 SEND
AUX3 SEND
FADER L
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
AUX6 SEND
AUX7 SEND
AUX8 SEND
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control
MID
LOW
HIGH
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
ON
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
ATTACK
THRESH L
AUX2 SEND
GATE
AUX3 SEND
AUX4 SEND
AUX5 SEND
INSERT ON
DECAY H
AUX7 SEND
DECAY L
ON
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
ATTACK
CHANNEL
INPUT1–32/ST IN1L–4R
THRESH H
CHANNEL
INPUT1–32
THRESH L
MASTER
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO
GAIN H
AUX5 SEND
INPUT1–32/BUS1–8/AUX1–8
/STEREO
GAIN L
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
KNEE
AUX6 SEND
CHANNEL
AUX7 SEND
AUX1–2
PAN
AUX3–4
INPUT1–32/ST IN1L–4R
AUX5–6
TIME HIGH
AUX7–8
TIME MID
BUS TO ST
BUS1–8
MASTER
STEREO
TIME LOW
MIX HIGH
INPUT1–32
BALANCE
LFE H
MIX LOW
LFE L
FB GAIN H
DIV (F)
FB GAIN L
DIV R
ON
TIME HIGH
TIME MID
SURROUND
BUS1–8/AUX1–8/STEREO L,R
LR
FR
DEPTH
ON
OFS LR
Q LOW
OFS FR
F LOW
BYPASS
G LOW H
MIX
PARAM1 H
EFFECT
Q LO-MID
PARAM1 L
G LO-MID H
PARAM32 H
G LO-MID L
PARAM32 L
F HI-MID
G HI-MID H
EFFECT1–4
:
F LO-MID
Q HI-MID
INPUT1–32/ST IN1L–4R
WIDTH
TIME LOW
G LOW L
EQ
RELEASE L
RATIO
ON
OUT DELAY
RELEASE H
AUX3 SEND
AUX8 SEND
IN DELAY
COMP
AUX2 SEND
AUX4 SEND
INPUT1–32
HOLD L
AUX6 SEND
AUX1 SEND
PRE/POST
RANGE
HOLD H
INPUT1–32/ST IN1–4
AUX8 SEND
PHASE
LOW
THRESH H
AUX1 SEND
ON
MID
CHANNEL
INPUT1–32/ST IN
1–4/BUS1–8/AUX1–8/
STEREO
G HI-MID L
Q HIGH
F HIGH
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
ATT H
ATT L
HPF ON
LPF ON
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI
HIGH
105
106
MIDI
Parameters that feature a setting range of more than 128
steps (such as Fader and Delay Time parameters) require
two or more Control Change messages to specify the values.
For example, if you wish to control Fader parameters on
certain channels using Control Changes, you must assign
the same channel to two Control Change numbers, and
select “FADER H” and “FADER L” for the Control
Changes in the parameter boxes in the first PARAMETER column.
Controlling Parameters
by Using Parameter
Changes
You can control 01V96i parameters in real time by using
Parameter Change messages that are System Exclusive messages, instead of using MIDI Control Changes.
See “MIDI Data Format” at the end of this Manual for
detailed information on available Parameter Changes.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] butIf you wish to control Delay Time parameters on certain
channels using Control Changes, you must assign the
same channel Delay parameter to three Control Change
numbers, and select “TIME LOW,” “TIME MID,” and
“TIME HIGH” for the Control Changes in the parameter
boxes in the second (middle) PARAMETER column.
ton repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports
for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 101).
2. Make connections using the ports selected in
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transmit and
receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button,
Note: Parameters that feature a setting range in excess of 128
steps require an appropriate combination of range parameters for successful MIDI Control Change.
then press the [F1] button to display the MIDI
| Setup page, then turn off the Tx and Rx
ON/OFF buttons in the PARAMETER CHANGE
row.
Tip: You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change
assignment table by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE
button, then pressing [ENTER].
The 01V96i will now set certain parameter values when it
receives corresponding Parameter Changes. Also, when
you adjust certain parameters on the 01V96i, it transmits
corresponding Parameter Changes.
7. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button,
then press the [F1] button to display the MIDI
| Setup page, then specify MIDI Transmit and
Receive Channels.
8. Turn on the CONTROL CHANGE Tx ON/OFF
and Rx ON/OFF buttons.
01V96i parameters will now be set accordingly when the
01V96i receives corresponding Control Changes. Also,
when you adjust parameters on the 01V96i, the 01V96i
will transmit corresponding Control Changes.
Note: Before controlling parameters using Control Changes,
make sure that both Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons in the
PARAMETER CHANGE row on the MIDI | Setup page are
turned off.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Note: Before controlling parameters using Parameter
Changes, make sure that both Tx and Rx ON/OFF buttons
in the CONTROL CHANGE row are turned off.
Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump)
You can back up data stored in the 01V96i, such as libraries
and Scenes, to an external MIDI device by using MIDI Bulk
Dump. In this way, you can later restore previous 01V96i settings by transmitting this MIDI data back to the 01V96i.
Note: Some of the data transmitted from the 01V96i to the
sequence software may occasionally drop out during Bulk Dump
transmission. To avoid this, we recommend that you use the Studio Manager software to store 01V96i data to an external device.
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page appears, then specify ports
for transmission and reception of MIDI messages (see page 101).
2. Make connections using the ports selected in
Step 1 so that the 01V96i can transmit and
receive MIDI messages to and from the external device.
3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button,
then press the [F4] button.
The MIDI | Bulk page appears.
1
3 2
3 TRANSMIT
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to
transmit data specified in the CATEGORY section to an
external MIDI device.
4 INTERVAL
This parameter specifies the interval between data packets during bulk transmission in 50 millisecond steps. If
the external device drops part of the bulk data, increase
this parameter value.
4. In the CATEGORY section, move the cursor to
the button of the data type you want to transmit, then press [ENTER].
The following options are available:
• ALL
This button selects all data available for bulk dump. When
this button is turned on, all other buttons in this section
are turned off.
• SCENEMEM
This button selects Scene memories. You can select
Scenes you wish to transmit in the parameter box next to
the button.
• LIBRARY
This button selects libraries. You can select the type of
library in the TYPE parameter box (next to the button),
then specify the library number in the parameter box on
the right.
• BANK
This parameter enables you to select the User Defined
Key banks (KEYS UDEF), User Defined Remote Layer
banks (RMT UDEF), or User Assignable Layer banks
(USR LAYER) for bulk dump. You can select one of these
three types in the parameter box next to the button, and
select the banks in the parameter box on the right.
• SETUPMEM
This button selects the 01V96i setup data (i.e., system settings).
• PGM TABLE
This button selects the MIDI | Pgm Asgn page settings.
• CTL TABLE
This button selects the MIDI | Ctl Asgn page settings.
4
The page includes the following parameters:
1 CATEGORY section
This section enables you to select data for transmission
and reception.
2 REQUEST
Move the cursor to this button, then press [ENTER] to
transmit messages from the 01V96i that request a second
01V96i (connected to the first 01V96i) to transmit the
data specified in the CATEGORY section. This button is
used primarily when two 01V96is are connected in cascade.
• PLUG-IN
This button selects the settings of an optional card
installed in the slot.
Note: Data selected by the SETUPMEM button includes
MIDI transmission and reception port settings and message
settings. After you store to an external device bulk dump data
that has its reception disabled, if the 01V96i later starts to
receive this particular data, 01V96i bulk dump reception will
be turned off immediately, and the 01V96i will be unable to
receive subsequent data. Therefore, before you store the data
selected by the SETUPMEM button using Bulk Dump, be
sure to enable bulk data transmission and reception.
01V96i—Reference Manual
MIDI
Transmitting Parameter
Settings via MIDI (Bulk
Dump)
107
108
MIDI
5. If necessary, move the cursor to the parameter box next to the selected button, then
rotate the Parameter wheel or press the
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the desired
bulk dump data.
Tip: If you selected [ALL] in the parameter box, all data
selected by the corresponding button is transmitted as bulk
dump data.
6. To start transmitting bulk data, move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button, then press
[ENTER].
Bulk Dump is executed. During the operation, the Bulk
Dump window appears, indicating the current bulk
dump status. To abort the bulk dump operation, move the
cursor to the CANCEL button in the window, then press
[ENTER].
Tip: To transmit bulk dump request messages, move the cursor to the REQUEST button, then press [ENTER]. If you set
up the 01V96i so that it will transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from another 01V96i, the other 01V96i will
respond to the bulk dump request and transmit the bulk
dump data to the 01V96i you are operating.
7. To receive bulk data, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [MIDI] button again to display the
MIDI | Setup page, then turn on the Rx
ON/OFF button in the BULK row.
Now, when the 01V96i receives bulk data, the corresponding internal data is updated.
Note: Bulk data can be transmitted and received between the
01V96i and the 01V96V2 / 01V96VCM. Compatibility
depends on the type of data, as follows.
Data that can be transmitted and received between the
01V96i and the 01V96V2 / 01V96VCM in either direction
SCENE MEM:
EQ LIBRARY:
GATE LIBRARY:
COMP LIBRARY:
CHANNEL LIBRARY:
EFFECT LIBRARY:
BANK:
SETUP MEMORY:
PGM TABLE:
CTL TABLE:
Data that can be only be transmitted by the 01V96V2 /
01V96VCM and received by the 01V96i (and not in the other
direction)
INPUT PATCH LIBRARY:
OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY:
01V96i—Reference Manual
Other Functions
This chapter describes the 01V96i’s miscellaneous functions.
Setting Preferences
You can change the default settings and environmental settings of the 01V96i by using the DIO/Setup | Prefer1 and
Prefer2 pages. To locate one of the Preferences page, press the
DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly.
Prefer1 page
This page enables you to set the 01V96i so that when you
press a button on the top panel, the 01V96i displays the corresponding display page, and shows or hides confirmation
and alarm messages.
• Auto Channel Select
If this check box is on, you can select a channel by moving
the corresponding fader, or by turning on the corresponding channel [SOLO] or [ON] button.
• Store Confirmation
If this check box is on, the Title Edit window to input a
Scene or library memory name appears when you store a
Scene or library memory.
• Recall Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation window appears
when you recall a Scene or library memory.
• Patch Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation message appears
when you edit the Input and Output Patches.
• Pair Confirmation
If this check box is on, a confirmation message appears
when you create or cancel a pair.
• Nominal Pan
If this check box is checked, and when Input Channel signals are panned hard left or hard right, the signals on the
left/odd channels and right/even channels will be at the
nominal level. If this check box is not checked, these signals will be boosted by 3 dB. (When the signals are
panned to center, they will be at the nominal level.) In
Surround mode, the same thing applies when any Surroound pan channel is panned hard left or right.
• Fast Meter Fall Time
If this check box is on, the level meters fall more quickly.
• DIO Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when
any errors are detected in digital audio signals received at
the Slot or 2TR Digital Inputs.
This page contains the following parameters. (These parameters are explained in the order from the top of the left column
to the bottom of the right column.)
• Auto PAN Display
If this check box is on, the Pan/Route pages appear automatically when you operate the [PAN] control in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section. In Stereo Surround
mode, operating the [PAN] control enables you to adjust
the left and right Pan setting. Otherwise, it enables you to
adjust the Surround Pan settings.
• Auto EQUALIZER Display
If this check box is on, the EQ | EQ Edit page appears
automatically when you press an EQ-related button in the
SELECTED CHANNEL section.
• Auto SOLO Display
If this check box is on, the DIO/Setup | Monitor page
appears automatically when you solo an Input Channel.
• Auto WORD CLOCK Display
If this check box is on, the DIO/Setup | Word Clock page
appears automatically if the currently-selected external
wordclock source fails.
• MIDI Warning
If this check box is on, a warning message appears when
any errors are detected in the incoming MIDI messages.
• Initial Data Nominal
If this check box is on, Input Channel faders and ST IN
Channel level controls are set to nominal (0 dB) when
you recall Scene #0. (If this check box is off, they are set to
–.)
• Scene MEM Auto Update
If this check box is on, you can use the Scene Memory
Auto Update function (see page 70).
• Cascade COMM Link
If this check box is on, various functions and parameters
are linked between cascaded 01V96is (See page 111 for
more information on cascade connection). When the
check box is off, only the Solo function is linked.
• Auto Direct Out On
If this check box is on and you change the channel Direct
Out destination from “–” to any other output, the channel
Direct Out is automatically enabled. If you change the
channel Direct Out destination from an output to “–,” the
channel Direct Out is automatically disabled.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Other Functions
Other Functions
109
110
Other Functions
• Routing ST Pair Link
When this check box is checked, paired channels’ routing
to the Stereo Bus will be linked.
Prefer2 page
The Prefer2 page enables you to name the channel indicated
on the display, and adjust the display brightness.
Creating a Custom Layer
by Combining Channels
(User Assignable Layer)
If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,”
you can create a custom layer by combining any 01V96i channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This custom layer is called
“User Assignable layer.”
1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup| Remote
page appears.
1
2. Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE, then press [ENTER].
2
A confirmation window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press
3
[ENTER].
The 01V96i displays the page shown below.
This page contains the following parameters:
1 Channel ID/Channel
This parameter selects a style for the displayed channel. If
the Channel ID check box is selected, the Channel ID
appears (e.g., CH1, CH16, AUX1). If the Channel Short
Name check box is on, the Channel Short name appears.
2 Channel Copy Parameter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This parameter selects the channel parameters to be copied when you assign the Channel Copy function to one of
the User Defined buttons. You can select multiple
options.
ALL ...........................This button selects all parameters
that can be copied. When you turn
on this button, all other options are
cancelled.
FADER.....................Copies the fader values.
ON.............................Copies the on/off status of the [ON]
buttons.
PAN ..........................Copies the pan settings.
SURR........................Copies the surround pan settings.
AUX..........................Copies the Aux Send levels.
AUX ON ..................Copies the on/off status of the Channel to Aux signals.
EQ .............................Copies the EQ parameter values.
1
4. Select the channels you wish to assign to the
User Assignable layer using the 1–16 parameter boxes (1).
You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four banks
by switching Banks 1–4 via the BANK 1–4 buttons. If you
press[ENTER] before selecting the channels to assign,
you will still be able to select the channels you wish to
assign in the User CH Select window.
Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving the
cursor to the CLEAR button and pressing [ENTER].
3 Display Brightness
This parameter sets the brightness of the LED indicators
in the range of 1 through 4.
5. Use the LAYER [REMOTE] button to assign or
recall the User Assignable layer.
You can use the faders and [ON] buttons to control the
assigned channels.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Cascading Consoles
111
The 01V96i features a Cascade Bus that enables cascade connection. You can connect two 01V96is in cascade using the
digital inputs and outputs, or the OMNI IN and OMNI OUT
connectors. In this way, two consoles work just like one big
console, integrating each unit’s Buses 1–8, Aux Sends 1–8,
Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus.
The following functions are linked between two cascaded
01V96is via the MIDI IN and OUT ports.
• Display page selection
• Solo function
• Fader Mode
• Metering Position
• Peak Hold On/Off
• Meter Fast Fall on/off
• Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit
Tip:
• To link functions and parameters (excluding the Solo function), turn on the Cascade COMM Link check box on the Setup
| Prefer1 page (see page 109).
• The Solo function is always linked regardless of the status of the
Cascade COMM Link check box.
[PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch |
Out Patch page appears.
4. Assign the Bus signals to the channels that are
used for the cascade connection.
The following signals are available:
Options
Description
CAS BUS1–BUS8
Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS AUX1–AUX8
Aux Bus 1–8 Cascade Outs
CAS ST-L, CAS ST-R
Stereo Bus L & R Cascade
Outs
CASSOLOL, CASSOLOR
Solo Bus L & R Cascade
Outs
The following display page is an example of integrating
Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus, and Solo Bus signals
via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).
The following paragraphs explain how to make a cascade
connection using two 01V96is and the inputs and outputs of
the digital I/O card installed in the slot of each 01V96i.
1. Install digital I/O cards into the slot on each
of two 01V96is.
2. Connect two 01V96is as follows:
• Connect the digital I/O card output on the transmitting
01V96i (slave) to the digital I/O card input on the receiving 01V96i (master).
• Connect the ADAT IN connector on the master unit to
the ADAT OUT connector on the slave unit.
• Connect the MIDI IN port on the master unit to the
MIDI OUT port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable.
• Connect the MIDI OUT port on the master unit to the
MIDI IN port on the slave unit using a MIDI cable.
Tip: Patching may vary depending on the type and number
of buses used for the cascade connection.
Note: Since the number of channels available on the digital
I/O card is limited, only Aux Sends 1–4 are cascaded in this
example. Using a 16-channel digital I/O card (such as
MY16-AT) enables you to cascade all buses.
5. On the master unit, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the
Patch | Cascade In page appears.
OUT
IN
MY8-AT
etc.
ADAT
OUT
connector
SLOT
MIDI
IN/OUT
connector
CH1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MY8-AT
etc.
CH5-8
12
13
15
ADAT
IN
connector
SLOT
CH9-12
MIDI
IN/OUT
connector
CH1-4
1
PHANTOM +48V
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CH5-8
12
13
15
CH9-12
PHANTOM +48V
L
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
14
L
A
16
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
14
R
B
B
IN
INPUT
A
OUT
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
16
R
IN
OUT
2TR
(BAL)
-10dBV (UNBAL)
-10dBV (UNBAL)
PHONES
PHONES
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
CH15/16
2TR IN
MONITOR
2TR IN
PAD
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
INSERT I/O
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
20dB
CH15/16
2TR IN
MONITOR
2TR IN
PAD
+4 GAIN -26
+4 GAIN -26
0
LEVEL
10
MONITOR
OUT
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
DIO/SETUP
SCENE
+4 GAIN -26
-60
GAIN
13
0
LEVEL
-16
PEAK
16
SIGNAL
-60
MIDI
UTILITY
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
-16
-60
STORE
RECALL
SOLO
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
PEAK
SIGNAL
DIO/SETUP
MIDI
UTILITY
PAIR/
GROUP
PATCH
STORE
RECALL
DEC
AUX 5
HIGH-MID
-36
HIGH
Q
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
HIGH-MID
FREQUENCY
HOME (METER)
LOW-MID
LOW-MID
LAYER
ENTER
ENTER
LOW
GAIN
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0 +10
0 +10
5
0
15
0 +10
5
0
15
5
15
0 +10
5
0
15
5
15
5
15
5
15
0
0
5
15
5
15
5
15
5
5
5
5
5
5
15
ON
0
5
10
5
15
5
15
15
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
70
1
20 10
20 10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
20 10
20 10
20 10
10
15
20 10
11
12
15
13
14
15
40
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
BUS 1
BUS 2
BUS 3
BUS 4
BUS 5
BUS 6
BUS 7
BUS 8
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SEL
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
SOLO
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ST IN 2
+10
0 +10
01V96i (Slave)
0 +10
5
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
5
15
0 +10
5
0
15
5
15
0 +10
5
0
5
15
5
15
15
5
15
5
15
5
15
5
5
5
5
15
0
10
5
10
5
15
5
15
15
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20 10
20
20
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30 15
30
30
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40 20
40
30
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50 30
60 40
70
50
50
50
60
70
60
70
20 10
20 10
20 10
50
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15
20 10
20 10
20 10
10
15
20 10
11
12
15
13
14
ON
ST IN 2
0
5
10
20
40
SEL
SOLO
ON
ST IN 1
15
10
SEL
SOLO
ON
0
10
5
SEL
5
5
0
0
10
10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
0
10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
0
10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
5
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
10
5
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
10
5
1
0 +10
5
5
5
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1
STEREO
ST IN
SEL
0
5
10
LOW
GAIN
MASTER REMOTE
SEL
5
10
15
20 10
17-32
SEL
ST IN 1
0
10
10
SEL
5
5
0
0
0
10
0 +10
5
5
5
5
0
10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
10
10
0 +10
5
5
5
5
0
10
0 +10
5
5
5
5
0
10
0 +10
0 +10
0 +10
5
5
0
10
10
5
0 +10
5
5
5
0
10
10
5
0 +10
5
5
5
5
10
1-16
ST IN
SEL
50
CLEAR
-15
FREQUENCY
SEL
40
SOLO
INC
-12
AUX 4
STEREO
AUX 8
MASTER REMOTE
SEL
5
The following display page is an example of receiving the
slave unit’s Bus 1–8, Aux Send 1–4, Stereo Bus, and Solo
-9
VIEW
AUX 3
STEREO
17-32
SEL
10
10
0
-6
AUX 2
-48
LAYER
5
LEVEL
PEAK
16
SIGNAL
-30
SEL
0
0
PHONES
+4 GAIN -26
PEAK
14 15
SIGNAL
-24
AUX 1
HIGH
Q
HOME (METER)
+10
13
-18
-36
-48
AUX 7
10
-3
EFFECT
FADER MODE
-30
AUX 6
LEVEL
OVER
EQ
DYNAMICS
-15
-24
1-16
0
SCENE MEMORY
-18
AUX 5
+4 GAIN -26
-60
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
SCENE
CLEAR
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
INC
-12
AUX 4
-60
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
PAN/
/ INSERT/
ROUTING
DELAY
DEC
-9
VIEW
AUX 3
-16
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
DISPLAY ACCESS
0
-6
EFFECT
-60
GAIN
PEAK
SIGNAL
-3
EQ
AUX 2
-16
GAIN
SCENE MEMORY
FADER MODE
AUX 1
+4 GAIN -26
MONITOR
OUT
OVER
PAN/
/ INSERT/
ROUTING
DELAY
DYNAMICS
+4 GAIN -26
PHONES
+4 GAIN -26
PEAK
14 15
SIGNAL
10
to which the Bus signals are input from the
Slave unit.
B
INPUT
2TR
(BAL)
INSERT
OUT IN
(UNBAL)
6. Select the Input Channels on the master unit
15
40
USER DEFINED
KEYS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
AUX 4
AUX 5
AUX 6
AUX 7
AUX 8
BUS 1
BUS 2
BUS 3
BUS 4
BUS 5
BUS 6
BUS 7
BUS 8
STEREO
01V96i (Master)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Other Functions
3. On the slave unit, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
Cascading Consoles
112
Other Functions
Bus signals via the ADAT IN and OUT connectors and
two 8-channel digital I/O cards (such as MY8-AT).
8. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly to display the DIO/Setup |
MIDI/Host page, then set the Cascade Link
parameter to “MIDI.”
9. Repeat Step 8 for the master unit.
After Steps 8 and 9, the slave unit will be able to transmit
and receive MIDI messages.
Note: Be sure to patch the slave Bus signals to the same Buses
on the master unit. Incorrect patching will result in an incorrect cascade connection.
7. On the master unit, press the DISPLAY
ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until
the DIO/Setup | Cascade page appears, then
adjust the Attenuators using the parameter
controls.
10. To match the parameters of both 01V96is,
locate the DIO/Setup | MIDI/Host page on
the copy source unit.
Move the cursor to the TRANSMIT button for
the SYNC parameter, then press [ENTER].
The DIO/Setup | Cascade page enables you to adjust the
level of signals input to the Cascade Bus using the dedicated attenuators. You can also turn the Cascade Buses on
or off using the buttons below the parameter controls.
Parameters for cascade link (page 111) will be copied to
the other 01V96i via the REMOTE connector. If you
select the REQUEST button instead of the TRANSMIT
button for the SYNC parameter, you can reverse the copy
direction.
At this point, Bus 1–8, Aux 1–4, and the Stereo Bus on
both 01V96is are integrated, and the data is output via
Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Outs 1–4, and the Stereo Out on the
master unit. If you solo channels on one of the 01V96is,
you can monitor the soloed signals via the Monitor outputs.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Checking the Battery and the System Version
The Utility | Battery page enables you to check the condition
of the internal memory-backup battery and the system version number. To locate this page, press the DISPLAY ACCESS
[UTILITY] button repeatedly.
Calibrating the Faders
The 01V96i motorized fader positions may shift over time
depending on the operating conditions and environment.
You can correct the shifted faders using the Calibration function.
1. Make sure that the power to the 01V96i is
turned off.
1
2. Press and hold down the [ENTER] button,
then turn on the POWER ON/OFF switch.
After a while, the following calibration window appears.
2
1 Status
If the Status is “Okay,” the battery has sufficient voltage for
operation. If the Status is “Voltage Low!,” ask your
Yamaha dealer or authorized Yamaha service center to
replace the battery as soon as possible. Failure to replace
a low battery may result in data loss.
Note: Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself as a malfunction may occur.
2 Ver X.XX (X.XX represents the version number.)
This indicator identifies the system version number.
Check the current system version number before you
update the firmware.
Visit the following website to check the latest system version number:
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
3. Make sure that “1 FADER MOVE & FADER
POSITION” is selected, then press [ENTER].
To adjust only the motor fader movement, use the cursor
buttons to select “2 FADER MOVE ONLY,” then press
[ENTER].
To adjust only the fader position, use the cursor buttons
to select “3 FADER POSITION ONLY,” then press
[ENTER]. Proceed to Step 5.
To cancel the calibration operation, use the cursor buttons to select “4 QUIT,” then press [ENTER]. The 01V96i
starts in normal mode.
4. The calibration operation begins, adjusting
the motor fader movement, and the 01V96i
displays a message that indicates the calibration operation is in progress.
The calibration operation takes about two minutes. DO
NOT touch the faders during the operation.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Other Functions
Checking the Battery and
the System Version
113
114
Other Functions
5. When the calibration operation is complete,
11. If there is any problem with the calibration
the 01V96i displays a window in which you
can select faders for position adjustment.
result, the 01V96i displays the following window.
If you selected “2 FADER MOVE ONLY” in Step 3, the
fader adjustment is complete. The 01V96i starts in normal mode.
Also, the channel [SEL] button indicator of a problematic
fader flashes.
6. Use the channel [SEL] buttons to select faders
for which you wish to calibrate the position,
then press [ENTER].
The selected channel [SEL] button indicators flash.
(When you press [ENTER], they light up steadily.) At the
beginning, all [SEL] buttons are flashing. However, if an
error occurs and the unit is trying calibration again, only
the [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader flashes.
7. Follow the instruction in the window to set
the position of the selected faders to –, then
press [ENTER].
8. Set the position of the selected faders to the
level instructed in the window, then press
[ENTER]. Set faders 1–16 to –15, and Stereo
fader to –30.
9. Set the position of the selected faders to the
level instructed in the window, then press
[ENTER]. Set faders 1–16 to 0, and Stereo
fader to any position.
10. Set the position of the selected faders to the
level instructed in the window, then press
[ENTER]. Set faders 1–16 to +10, and Stereo
fader to 0.
If there is no problem with the calibration result, this concludes the calibration operation. The 01V96i will start in
normal mode.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Use the cursor buttons to select one of the following three
options, then press [ENTER].
• CONTINUE
While the [SEL] button indicator of a problematic fader is
flashing, the calibration process returns to Step 5.
• START FROM THE BEGINNING
The calibration process returns to Step 2.
• QUIT ANYWAY
The 01V96i cancels the calibration operation and starts in
normal mode. The standard setting will be applied to
problematic faders.
If this window appears after you try the calibration process several times, consult your nearest Yamaha dealer.
If the calibration data has some problems, the 01V96i displays the following window when it starts up. In this case,
calibrate the position of the faders specified in the window.
Index
Symbols
/INS/DLY | DLY 1-16 page ............18
/INS/DLY | DLY 17-32 page .........18
/INS/DLY | Insert page ............ 47, 65
/INS/DLY | Out Dly page ........ 30, 37
/INS/DLY | Phase page ...................18
/INSERT/DELAY button ................. 8
+48V ON/OFF switches .......................10
Numerics
1–16/17–32 buttons ................................ 8
1–8 buttons ............................................... 9
2TR IN connectors ............................7, 12
2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL .............10
2TR IN DIGITAL connector ..............13
2TR OUT connectors .......................7, 13
2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL ........10
2TR OUT DIGITAL connector ..........13
A
AC IN connector ...................................11
AD input ................................................... 7
AD output section .................................10
AD15/16 selector ..................................... 7
ADAT IN/OUT connector ........... 10, 13
Add-On Effects ......................................67
AMP SIMULATE ...............................136
Analog inputs & outputs ......................12
Assigne
Control changes ...........................104
MIDI messages ...............................96
Program changes ..........................103
Remote Layer ..................................83
USER DEFINED KEYS ................87
Attenuator .................................20, 30, 36
Output signals .................................34
Auto Channel Select preference .......109
Auto Direct Out On preference ........109
Auto EQUALIZER Display preference
..................................................109
AUTO PAN .........................................135
Auto PAN Display preference ..........109
Auto SOLO Display preference ........109
Auto update function ...........................70
Auto WORD CLOCK Display
preference ...............................109
AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons .......................... 8
Aux outs ..................................................36
Aux send mode .........................38, 39, 41
Aux sends ...............................................38
Attenuating .....................................36
Comp settings .................................37
Copying channel fader positions
............................................42
Delaying ...........................................37
EQ settings ............................... 37, 38
Fixed mode ......................................39
Panning ............................................41
Setting from the control surface
.............................................38
Setting from the display .........36, 38
Setting levels ....................................38
Variable mode .................................39
Viewing settings ..............................37
Viewing settings for multiple
channels .............................40
Aux1 | View1-16 page ...........................40
Aux1 | View17-STI page .......................40
B
Balancing .................................................33
Battery ................................................... 113
Bulk dump ........................................... 107
Messages ....................................... 100
Bus out .....................................................29
Attenuating ......................................30
Compressing ...................................30
Delaying ...........................................30
EQ’ing ...............................................31
EQ’ing and Balancing ....................33
Naming ............................................35
Pairing ..............................................33
Routing signals to the stereo bus
.............................................31
Setting from the control surface
.............................................33
Setting from the display ................30
Setting the levels .............................33
Viewing the settings .......................31
BUS1–BUS8 ............................................54
C
Cascade COMM Link preference .... 109
Cascading consoles ............................. 111
Cascade page ................................ 112
SYNC parameter ......................... 112
CATEGORY ...........................................14
CH1–4 ON/OFF switch .......................10
CH5–8 ON/OFF switch .......................10
CH9–12 ON/OFF switch .....................10
Channel Copy Parameter preference
................................................. 110
Channel faders .........................................7
Channel ID/Channel preference ...... 110
Channel library ......................................75
Channel strip section ..............................7
CHORUS ............................................. 134
CLEAR button .........................................9
Comp260/Comp260S ........................ 142
Compressor library ...............................79
Preset ................................................80
Compressors ............................. 20, 30, 37
Compressor link .............................59
Linking .............................................62
Contrast control .......................................9
Control changes ..........................100, 104
Control surface .........................................6
AD input section ..............................7
Channel strip section .......................7
Data entry section .............................9
DISPLAY ACCESS section .............8
Display section ................................. 9
FADER MODE section .................. 8
LAYER section ................................. 8
Monitor out & Headphones section
.............................................. 7
SCENE MEMORY section ............. 9
SELECTED CHANNEL section ... 9
SOLO section .................................... 9
ST IN section .................................... 8
STEREO section ............................... 8
USER DEFINED KEYS section ..... 9
Control Surface & Rear Panel ............... 6
COPY ...................................................... 15
Cursor buttons ......................................... 9
D
Data entry section ................................... 9
DAW ....................................................... 93
Nuendo/Cubase ............................. 93
Other ................................................ 94
Pro tools ........................................... 83
Remote ............................................. 83
DEC & INC buttons ............................... 9
Delay ...........................................18, 30, 37
DELAY SCALE .............................. 18
FB.GAIN ......................................... 19
DELAY LCR ........................................133
DELAY SCALE ..................................... 18
DELAY+ER. .........................................139
DELAY+REV ......................................140
DELAY->ER. .......................................139
DELAY->REV .....................................140
Digital I/O section ................................. 10
Digital inputs & outputs ...................... 13
DIO Warning preference ...................109
DIO/Setup | Cascade page .................112
DIO/Setup | Format page ..............15, 16
DIO/Setup | Insert page ....................... 85
DIO/Setup | Machine page .................. 98
DIO/Setup | Meter page ....................... 86
DIO/Setup | MIDI/Host page
............................. 84, 98, 101, 112
DIO/Setup | Monitor page .................. 49
DIO/Setup | Output Att page .............. 34
DIO/Setup | Prefer1 page ..................109
DIO/Setup | Prefer2 page ..................109
DIO/Setup | Remote page .....85, 95, 110
DIO/Setup | Surr Bus page .................. 54
DIO/Setup | Word Clock page ........... 14
DIO/SETUP button ................................ 8
Direct outs .............................................. 46
Display ...................................................... 9
DISPLAY ACCESS section ................... 8
Display Brightness preference ..........110
Display section ......................................... 9
DIST->DELAY ....................................140
DISTORTION .....................................136
Dithering ................................................ 15
DIV .......................................................... 56
DOUBLE CHANNEL .......................... 16
DOUBLE SPEED .................................. 16
Dual Phaser ..........................................145
DUAL PITCH .....................................135
01V96i—Reference Manual
Index
Index
115
116
Index
DYNA. FILTER .................................. 136
DYNA. FLANGE ................................ 136
DYNA. PHASER ................................ 137
Dynamics | Comp Edit page .. 20, 30, 37
Dynamics | Comp Lib page ................. 79
Dynamics | Gate Edit page .................. 19
Dynamics | Gate Lib page ................... 79
DYNAMICS button ................................8
E
EARLY REF. ........................................ 132
ECHO ................................................... 134
Effect | FX1 Edit page ........................... 66
Effect | FX1 Lib page ............................ 76
Effect | FX2 Edit page ........................... 66
Effect | FX2 Lib page ............................ 76
Effect | FX3 Edit page ........................... 66
Effect | FX3 Lib page ............................ 76
Effect | FX4 Edit page ........................... 66
Effect | FX4 Lib page ............................ 76
Effect | P-In Edit page .......................... 67
EFFECT button ........................................8
Effects
Bypass .............................................. 66
Internal effects ................................ 64
parameter tables ........................... 132
Plug-ins ........................................... 67
Effects library ......................................... 76
Preset ............................................... 77
programs ......................................... 77
EMPHASIS ............................................ 14
ENTER button .........................................9
EQ .................................. 21, 31, 33, 37, 38
frequency ........................................ 21
gain ................................................... 21
Q ....................................................... 21
EQ | EQ Edit page .................... 21, 31, 37
EQ | EQ Library page ........................... 81
EQ | Out Att page ...........................30, 36
EQ button .................................................8
EQ library ............................................... 81
Preset ............................................... 81
EQ link .................................................... 59
Equalizer601 ........................................ 143
F
F/R ........................................................... 56
F1–F4 buttons ..........................................9
Fader groups .......................................... 59
FADER MODE section ..........................8
Fading ..................................................... 71
ALL CLEAR ................................... 71
AUX1–8 .......................................... 71
BUS1–8 ............................................ 71
Global fade time ............................. 71
INPUT CH1–32 ............................. 71
ST IN 1–4 ........................................ 71
STEREO .......................................... 71
FAST ....................................................... 56
Fast Meter Fall Time preference ...... 109
FB.GAIN ................................................ 19
Fixed mode ......................................39, 41
FLANGE .............................................. 134
01V96i—Reference Manual
FREQUENCY control ............................ 9
FS ............................................................. 14
G
GAIN controls .............................. 7, 9, 12
GANG ..................................................... 22
Gate library ............................................. 79
GATE REVERB ...................................132
Gates ........................................................ 19
KEYIN SOURCE ........................... 19
Global Paste ............................................ 73
Group ...................................................... 59
Fader groups ................................... 59
Mute groups .................................... 59
H
HIGH button ........................................... 9
Higher sampling rates .......................... 16
HIGH-MID button ................................. 9
HOME button ......................................... 8
HORIZONTAL ..................................... 27
HQ. PITCH ..........................................135
I
INDIVIDUAL ....................................... 22
INIT ......................................................... 54
Initial Data Nominal preference .......109
Input channels ....................................... 17
Attenuating ..................................... 20
Compressing ................................... 20
Delaying ........................................... 18
EQ ..................................................... 25
EQ’ing .............................................. 21
Gating .............................................. 19
Levels ................................................ 25
Naming ............................................ 28
Pairing .............................................. 26
Panning ..................................... 22, 25
Routing ............................................ 22
Setting from the control surface .. 25
Setting from the display ................ 18
Switching the signal phase ............ 18
Viewing the settings ...................... 23
INPUT connectors ............................7, 12
Input patch ............................................. 43
Initial settings ...............................123
Parameters ....................................121
Input patch library ................................ 75
Input section .......................................... 12
Input sensitivity
GAIN controls .................................. 7
INSERT I/O connectors ...................7, 12
Insert in ................................................... 48
Insert patching ....................................... 47
Internal effects
Aux sends ........................................ 64
Editing .............................................. 66
Effects processors 1–4 ................... 64
Inserting into channels ................. 65
Meters .............................................. 67
MIX BALANCE ............................. 66
TEMPO ........................................... 66
INV GANG ............................................ 22
K
KEYIN SOURCE ...................................19
L
LAST SOLO ............................................50
LATCH ....................................................97
LAYER section .........................................8
Layers
Initial bank settings ..................... 128
LEARN button .......................................96
Level controls ...........................................8
Levels ................................................ 33, 38
LFE ...........................................................56
Libraries ...................................................74
Channel library ...............................75
Compressor library ........................79
Effects library ..................................76
EQ library ........................................81
Gate library ......................................79
General operation ..........................74
Input patch library .........................75
Output patch library ......................76
Link ..........................................................59
Compressors ...................................62
EQ .....................................................62
LOW button .............................................9
LOW-MID button ...................................9
M
M.BAND DYNA. ............................... 142
Machine control ....................................98
MASTER button ......................................8
Max 100 ................................................ 144
Meters
Stereo meters .....................................9
MIDI ...............................................84, 100
Bulk dump .................................... 107
Bulk dump messages .................. 100
Control changes ........................... 104
Data format .................................. 173
FADER H/L .................................. 106
Initial parameter to control
change table ................... 157
MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports
.....................................10, 100
MIDI note on/off ......................... 100
Parameter changes ...................... 106
Parameters .................................... 104
Program changes ......................... 103
Scene memory to program
change table ................... 156
Setup .............................................. 101
SLOT ............................................. 100
System exclusive messages ......... 100
Transmission and Reception ..... 102
USB port ....................................... 100
MIDI | Bulk page ................................ 107
MIDI | Ctl Asgn page ......................... 104
MIDI | Pgm Asgn page ...................... 103
MIDI | Setup page .............................. 102
MIDI button .............................................8
MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports ...............10
MIDI machine control ...................... 100
Index
N
Naming ............................................ 28, 35
Nominal Pan preference ....................109
Nuendo ...................................................83
Nuendo/Cubase .....................................93
O
OMNI OUT connectors ............... 10, 13
ON buttons ...........................................7, 8
OpenDeck .............................................143
Other functions ...................................109
Preferences ....................................109
Output patch ..........................................44
Initial settings ...............................127
Parameters .....................................125
Output patch library .............................76
Output section .......................................13
P
PAD switches .....................................7, 12
Pair Confirmation preference ...........109
PAIR/GROUP button ............................ 8
Pair/Grup | In Comp page ...................63
Pair/Grup | In EQ page ........................62
Pair/Grup | In Fader page ....................59
Pair/Grup | In Mute page ....................59
Pair/Grup | Input page .........................27
Pair/Grup | Out Comp page ................63
Pair/Grup | Out EQ page ......................62
Pair/Grup | Out Fader page .................59
Pair/Grup | Out Mute page ..................60
Pair/Grup | Output page ......................33
Pairing ..............................................26, 33
HORIZONTAL ..............................27
Using the display ............................27
Using the SEL buttons ...................27
VERTICAL ......................................27
PAN control .............................................9
Pan/Route | Bus To St page ..................31
Pan/Route | Ch Edit page .....................56
Pan/Route | Pan page ............................25
Pan/Route | ROUT1-16 page ..............22
Pan/Route | ROUT17-ST1 page ..........22
Pan/Route | Surr ST IN page ...............58
Pan/Route | Surr1-16 page ...................58
Pan/Route | Surr17-32 page .................58
PAN/ROUTING button ........................8
Pan/Surr | Surr Mode page ..................53
PAN/SURR LINK ..................................53
Panning ............................................22, 41
F.S ......................................................34
FOLLOW PAN ...............................24
GANG ..............................................22
INDIVIDUAL .................................22
INV GANG .....................................22
PAN buttons ...................................22
Parameter changes ............................. 106
Parameter lists ..................................... 119
Parameter wheel ......................................9
Patch | 2TR Out page ............................45
Patch | Cascade In page ..................... 111
Patch | Direct Out page ........................46
Patch | Effect page ..................................64
Patch | IN LIB page ...............................75
Patch | IN Name page ...........................28
Patch | In Patch page .............................43
Patch | Insert In page ............................48
Patch | Out LIB page .............................76
Patch | Out Name page .........................35
Patch | Out Patch page .................44, 111
Patch | USB OUT page .........................45
PATCH button ................................. 8, 43
Patch Confirmation preference ........ 109
Patching ...................................................43
2TR digital outputs ........................45
ADAT OUT connector .................44
Direct outs .......................................46
Input patching ................................43
Insert in ............................................48
Insert patching ................................47
OMNI OUT connector .................44
Output patching .............................44
TO HOST USB channels ..............43
PEAK indicators ............................... 7, 12
PHANTOM +48V .................................10
Phantom Power .....................................12
CH1–4 ON/OFF switch ................10
CH5–8 ON/OFF switch ................10
CH9–12 ON/OFF switch ..............10
Phase ........................................................18
PHASER ............................................... 135
PHONES jack ....................................7, 49
PHONES LEVEL control ...................... 7
PLUG-IN ..............................................107
Plug-ins ................................................... 90
POWER ON/OFF switch .................... 11
Power section ......................................... 11
Prefer1 page .........................................109
Prefer2 page .........................................110
Preferences ...........................................109
Pro tools ............................................83, 89
Automation ..................................... 93
Channel display mode .................. 86
Channel levels ................................. 89
Control surface operation ............ 87
Explicit mute ................................... 89
Flip mode ........................................ 90
Implicit mute .................................. 89
Insert display mode ....................... 85
Meter display mode ....................... 86
MIDI ................................................ 84
Muting ............................................. 90
Panning ......................................89, 90
Plug-ins ............................................ 90
Pre or Post ....................................... 90
Scrub & Shuttle .............................. 92
Selecting ........................................... 89
Send levels ....................................... 90
Soloing ............................................. 90
Program changes ........................ 100, 103
PROTECT button ................................. 69
Q
Q control .................................................. 9
Q, EQ ....................................................... 21
R
Rear Panel
PHANTOM +48V ......................... 10
Rear panel ............................................... 10
AD output section ......................... 10
Digital I/O section ......................... 10
MIDI/USB Section ........................ 10
Power section ................................. 11
SLOT section .................................. 11
RECALL button ...................................... 9
Recall Confirmation preference .......109
Recall safe function ............................... 72
RECORDING ........................................ 49
Remote .................................................... 83
FRAMES .......................................... 99
Insert display mode ....................... 85
LOCATE/TIME section ............... 98
Machine control .......................83, 98
MACHINE CONTROL section
............................................ 98
MIDI messages ............................... 96
MIDI remote .................................. 94
Nuendo ............................................ 83
ProTools .......................................... 83
REMOTE ......................................... 83
Target parameter ........................... 85
TRACK ARMING section ........... 98
TRANSPORT section ................... 99
01V96i—Reference Manual
Index
MIDI remote ..........................................94
Banks ................................................94
LATCH ............................................97
LEARN button ...............................96
MIDI messages ...............................96
TARGET parameter ......................95
UNLATCH .....................................97
MIDI Warning preference ................109
MIDI/USB Section ................................10
MIX SOLO .............................................50
MIXDOWN ...........................................49
MMC .............................................. 98, 100
MOD. DELAY .....................................133
MOD. FILTER .....................................136
MONITOR LEVEL control ................... 7
Monitor out & Headphones section
...................................................... 7
MONITOR OUT connectors ...... 10, 13
Monitor Source selector ......................... 7
Monitoring .............................................49
Digital input channel status .........14
LAST SOLO ....................................50
MIX SOLO ......................................50
MIXDOWN ....................................49
MONO .............................................50
RECORDING .................................49
Solo function ...................................51
Solo safe function ...........................50
Solo setup ........................................49
MONO ....................................................50
MONO DELAY ...................................132
MULTI FILTER ...................................141
Mute groups ...........................................59
Muting .....................................................89
117
118
Index
REMOTE button .............................. 8, 83
Remote Layer
Nuendo/Cubase ............................. 93
Pro tools .......................................... 83
RESET BOTH ....................................... 27
REV+CHORUS .................................. 137
REV+FLANGE ................................... 137
REV+SYMPHO. ................................. 138
REV->CHORUS ................................. 137
REV->FLANGE .................................. 138
REV->PAN .......................................... 138
REV->SYMPHO. ................................ 138
REVERB HALL ................................... 132
REVERB PLATE ................................. 132
REVERB ROOM ................................ 132
REVERB STAGE ................................ 132
REVERSE GATE ................................ 132
REV-X .................................................. 144
RING MOD. ........................................ 136
ROTARY .............................................. 136
Routing ................................................... 22
Routing ST Pair Link preference ..... 110
S
Sampling rates ....................................... 14
DOUBLE CHANNEL .................. 16
DOUBLE SPEED ........................... 16
Setting the higher sampling rates
............................................ 16
SINGLE ........................................... 16
SRC sections ................................... 14
Scene | In Fade page ............................. 71
Scene | Out Fade page .......................... 71
Scene | Rcl Safe page ............................. 72
Scene | Scene page ................................ 69
Scene | Sort page ................................... 72
SCENE button ..........................................8
Scene MEM Auto Update preference
................................................. 109
Scene memories .................................... 68
Auto update function ................... 70
Edit indicators ................................ 68
Fading .............................................. 71
PROTECT button ......................... 69
Recall safe function ....................... 72
Scene numbers ............................... 68
Shadow memory ............................ 70
Sorting ............................................. 72
Storing & Recalling ....................... 69
Using the Scene Memory Page ... 69
What is stored ................................ 68
Scene memory #00 ............................... 68
Scene memory #Ud .............................. 68
SCENE MEMORY section .....................9
Scene numbers ...................................... 68
Scene up/down buttons ..........................9
SEL buttons .......................................... 7, 8
SELECTED CHANNEL section ...........9
Setting levels .......................................... 38
Shadow memory ................................... 70
SIGNAL indicators ........................... 7, 12
SINGLE .................................................. 16
SLOT ........................................ 11, 13, 100
01V96i—Reference Manual
SLOT section .......................................... 11
Solo .......................................................... 49
LAST SOLO .................................... 50
LISTEN ............................................ 50
MIX SOLO ...................................... 50
MIXDOWN .................................... 49
RECORDING ................................. 49
SOLO ............................................... 49
Solo function ................................... 51
SOLO SAFE CHANNEL .............. 50
Solo safe function ........................... 50
SOLO TRIM ................................... 50
SOLO buttons ......................................7, 8
SOLO indicator ....................................... 9
SOLO section ........................................... 9
SRC sections ........................................... 14
ST IN button ............................................ 8
ST IN section ........................................... 8
STEREO DELAY ................................133
STEREO fader .......................................... 8
Stereo meters ............................................ 9
Stereo out ................................................ 29
Attenuating ..................................... 30
Compressing ................................... 30
Delaying ........................................... 30
EQ’ing .............................................. 31
EQ’ing and Balancing ................... 33
Naming ............................................ 35
Pairing .............................................. 33
Setting from the control surface
............................................ 33
Setting from the display ................ 30
Setting the levels ............................. 33
Viewing the settings ...................... 31
STEREO OUT connectors ........... 10, 13
STEREO section ...................................... 8
STORE button ......................................... 9
Store Confirmation preference .........109
Storing and Recalling ........................... 69
Surround ................................................. 52
BUS1–BUS8 .................................... 54
DIV ................................................... 56
F.S ..................................................... 34
F/R .................................................... 56
FAST ................................................ 56
INIT .................................................. 54
LFE ................................................... 56
LINK ................................................ 56
Pan graph ........................................ 56
PAN/SURR LINK .......................... 53
Panning ............................................ 56
PATTERN ....................................... 56
Setting up and Selecting ................ 53
ST LINK .......................................... 56
SURROUND MODE ............. 23, 53
Trajectory patterns ........................ 56
SURROUND MODE ........................... 53
Surround modes ............................. 52, 53
Factory-default ............................... 52
SYMPHONIC ......................................134
SYNC parameter .................................112
System exclusive messages ................100
System version .....................................113
T
Tab scroll buttons ....................................9
Target parameter ...................................85
TO HOST USB port ..............................10
Trajectory patterns ................................57
TREMOLO .......................................... 135
U
UNLATCH .............................................97
USB ..........................................................10
USB port ....................................... 100
USB OUT page ......................................45
User assignable layer .......................... 110
USER DEFINED KEYS ..........................9
Initial assignments ...................... 121
Utility | Battery page .......................... 113
Utility | CH Status page ........................14
UTILITY button ......................................8
V
Variable mode ................................. 39, 41
VERTICAL .............................................27
View | Fader page .................... 24, 32, 38
View | Library page ...............................75
View | Parameter page ............ 23, 31, 37
VIEW button ............................................8
Vintage Phaser .................................... 144
W
Window
Changing the surround mode ......53
Channel Pairing ..............................27
Copy operation ...............................42
WORD CLOCK IN connector ............10
WORD CLOCK OUT connector .......10
USER DEFINED KEYS
119
USER DEFINED KEYS
#
52
#
Function
Display
Function
Display
Input MUTE Group Enable O
IN Mute Group O
53
Input MUTE Group Enable P
IN Mute Group P
Output Fader Group Enable Q
OutFader Group Q
0
No Assign
No Assign
54
1
Scene MEM. Recall +1
Scene +1 Recall
55
Output Fader Group Enable R
OutFader Group R
2
Scene MEM. Recall –1
Scene –1 Recall
56
Output Fader Group Enable S
OutFader Group S
3
Scene MEM. Recall No. XX
Scene XX Recall
57
Output Fader Group Enable T
OutFader Group T
Fx1 Lib+1 Recall
58
Output MUTE Group Enable U
Out Mute Group U
Fx1 Lib–1 Recall
59
Output MUTE Group Enable V
Out Mute Group V
Output MUTE Group Enable W
Out Mute Group W
4
5
Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1
Effect-1 Lib. Recall –1
6
Effect-1 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx1 LibXXX RCL.
60
7
Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1
Fx2 Lib+1 Recall
61
Output MUTE Group Enable X
Out Mute Group X
Input Fader Group Assign X
IN Fader Assign X
8
Effect-2 Lib. Recall –1
Fx2 Lib–1 Recall
62
9
Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx2 LibXXX RCL.
63
Input Mute Group Assign X
IN Mute Assign X
10
Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1
Fx3 Lib+1 Recall
64
Input EQ Group Assign X
IN EQ Assign x
11
Effect-3 Lib. Recall –1
Fx3 Lib–1 Recall
65
Input COMP Group Assign X
IN COMP Assign x
Output Fader Group Assign X
OutFader Assign X
12
Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx3 LibXXX RCL.
66
13
Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1
Fx4 Lib+1 Recall
67
Output Mute Group Assign X
Out Mute Assign X
Output EQ Group Assign X
Out EQ Assign x
14
Effect-4 Lib. Recall –1
Fx4 Lib–1 Recall
68
15
Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx4 LibXXX RCL.
69
Output COMP Group Assign X
Out COMP Assign x
Input Mute Group Master X
In Mute Master X
Out Mute Master X
16
Effect-1 Bypass On/Off
Fx1 Bypass
70
17
Effect-2 Bypass On/Off
Fx2 Bypass
71
Output MUTE Group Master X
18
Effect-3 Bypass On/Off
Fx3 Bypass
72
PEAK HOLD On/Off
Peak Hold
19
Effect-4 Bypass On/Off
Fx4 Bypass
73
OSCILLATOR On/Off
OSC ON/OFF
20
Channel Lib. Recall +1
CH Lib+1 Recall
74
SOLO Enable
SOLO ENABLE
75
FADER/SOLO RELEASE Mode
On/Off
FaderSolo RELEASE
76
Control Room Monitor MONO
C-R MONO
77
Pan / Surround Link
PAN/SURR LINK
21
Channel Lib. Recall –1
CH Lib–1 Recall
22
Channel Lib. Recall No. XX
CH LibXXX Recall
23
GATE Lib. Recall +1
Gate Lib+1 RCL.
24
GATE Lib. Recall –1
Gate Lib–1 RCL.
25
GATE Lib. Recall No. XX
Gate LibXXX RCL.
26
COMP Lib. Recall +1
Comp Lib+1 RCL.
27
COMP Lib. Recall –1
Comp Lib–1 RCL.
28
COMP Lib. Recall No. XX
Comp LibXXX RCL.
29
EQ Lib. Recall +1
EQ Lib+1 Recall
30
EQ Lib. Recall –1
EQ Lib–1 Recall
31
EQ Lib. Recall No. XX
EQ LibXXX Recall
32
Input Patch Lib. Recall +1
IN Patch Lib+1
33
Input Patch Lib. Recall –1
IN Patch Lib–1
34
Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
IN Patch LibXX
35
Output Patch Lib. Recall +1
Out Patch Lib+1
36
Output Patch Lib. Recall –1
Out Patch Lib–1
37
Output Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
Out Patch LibXX
38
Input Fader Group Enable A
IN Fader Group A
39
Input Fader Group Enable B
IN Fader Group B
40
Input Fader Group Enable C
IN Fader Group C
41
Input Fader Group Enable D
IN Fader Group D
42
Input Fader Group Enable E
IN Fader Group E
43
Input Fader Group Enable F
IN Fader Group F
44
Input Fader Group EnableG
IN Fader Group G
45
Input Fader Group Enable H
IN Fader Group H
46
Input MUTE Group Enable I
IN Mute Group I
47
Input MUTE Group Enable J
IN Mute Group J
48
Input MUTE Group Enable K
IN Mute Group K
49
Input MUTE Group Enable L
IN Mute Group L
50
Input MUTE Group Enable M
IN Mute Group M
51
Input MUTE Group Enable N
IN Mute Group N
78
Channel Name ID/Short
CH ID/Short
79
Channel Copy
Channel Copy
80
Channel Paste
Channel Paste
81
Display Back
Display Back
82
Display Forward
Display Forward
83
UDEF KEYS BANK +1
UDEF KEYS BANK+1
84
UDEF KEYS BANK –1
UDEF KEYS BANK–1
85
UDEF KEYS BANK X
UDEF KEYS BANK x
86
REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK +1
RMT UDEF BANK+1
87
REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK –1
RMT UDEF BANK–1
88
REMOTE USER DEFINE BANK X
RMT UDEF BANK X
89
REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK +1
USR LAYER BANK+1
90
REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK –1
USR LAYER BANK–1
91
REMOTE USER ASS LAYER BANK X
USR LAYER BANK X
92
MIDI NOTE No.XX
MIDI NOTE XXX
93
MIDI Program change No.XX
MIDI PGM XXX
94
MIDI Control Change No.XX
MIDI CC XXX
95
Machine REC
Machine REC
96
Machine PLAY
Machine PLAY
97
Machine STOP
Machine STOP
98
Machine FF
Machine FF
99
Machine REW
Machine REW
100
Machine SHUTTLE
Machine SHUTTLE
101
Machine SCRUB
Machine SCRUB
102
Machine LOCATE X
Machine LOCATE X
103
Machine Set LOCATE X
Machine Capture X
104
Machine RTZ
Machine RTZ
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Appendix: Parameter Lists
120
Appendix: Parameter Lists
#
Function
Display
#
Function
Display
105
Machine Set RTZ
Machine Set RTZ
164
DAW CREATE GROUP
DAW CREATE GROUP
106
Track Arming 1
Track Arming 1
165
DAW SUSPEND GROUP
DAW SUSPEND GRP
107
Track Arming 2
Track Arming 2
166
DAW WINDOW TRANSPORT
DAW WIN TRANSPORT
108
Track Arming 3
Track Arming 3
167
DAW WINDOW INSERT
DAW WIN INSERT
109
Track Arming 4
Track Arming 4
168
DAW WINDOW MIX/EDIT
DAW WIN MIX/EDIT
110
Track Arming 5
Track Arming 5
169
DAW WINDOW MEM-LOC
DAW WIN MEM-LOC
111
Track Arming 6
Track Arming 6
170
DAW WINDOW STATUS
DAW WIN STATUS
112
Track Arming 7
Track Arming 7
171
DAW Shortcut UNDO
DAW UNDO
113
Track Arming 8
Track Arming 8
172
DAW Shortcut SAVE
DAW SAVE
114
Track Arming 9
Track Arming 9
173
DAW Shortcut EDIT MODE
DAW EDIT MODE
115
Track Arming 10
Track Arming 10
174
DAW Shortcut EDIT TOOL
DAW EDIT TOOL
116
Track Arming 11
Track Arming 11
175
DAW Shortcut SHIFT/ADD
DAW SHIFT/ADD
117
Track Arming 12
Track Arming 12
176
DAW Shortcut OPTION/ALL
DAW OPTION/ALL
118
Track Arming 13
Track Arming 13
177
DAW Shortcut CTRL/CLUCH
DAW CTRL/CLUCH
119
Track Arming 14
Track Arming 14
178
DAW Shortcut ALT/FINE
DAW ALT/FINE
120
Track Arming 15
Track Arming 15
179
DAW BANK +
DAW BANK +
121
Track Arming 16
Track Arming 16
180
DAW BANK –
DAW BANK –
122
Track Arming 17
Track Arming 17
181
DAW Channel +
DAW Channel +
123
Track Arming 18
Track Arming 18
182
DAW Channel –
DAW Channel –
124
Track Arming 19
Track Arming 19
183
DAW REC/RDY X
DAW REC/RDY X
125
Track Arming 20
Track Arming 20
184
DAW REC/RDY ALL
DAW REC/RDY ALL
126
Track Arming 21
Track Arming 21
185
SM CTRL Close
127
Track Arming 22
Track Arming 22
Studio Manager Window Control
Close
128
Track Arming 23
Track Arming 23
186
Studio Manager Window Control
Close All
SM CTRL Close All
129
Track Arming 24
Track Arming 24
130
Track Arming All Clear
Track Arming CLR
187
Studio Manager Window Control
Selected Channel
SM CTRL Sel Ch
131
DAW REC
DAW REC
132
DAW PLAY
DAW PLAY
188
Studio Manager Window Control
Library
SM CTRL Library
133
DAW STOP
DAW STOP
189
SM CTRL Patch
134
DAW FF
DAW FF
Studio Manager Window Control
Patch Editor
135
DAW REW
DAW REW
190
Studio Manager Window Control
Surround Editor
SM CTRL Surround
136
DAW SHUTTLE
DAW SHUTTLE
137
DAW SCRUB
DAW SCRUB
191
Studio Manager Window Control
Effect Editor
SM CTRL Effect
138
DAW AUDITION
DAW AUDITION
192
DAW PRE
DAW PRE
Studio Manager Window Control
Meter
SM CTRL Meter
139
140
DAW IN
DAW IN
193
Studio Manager Window Control
Layer
SM CTRL Layer
141
DAW OUT
DAW OUT
142
DAW POST
DAW POST
194
Studio Manager Window Control
Master
SM CTRL Master
143
DAW RTZ
DAW RTZ
144
DAW END
DAW END
145
DAW ONLINE
DAW ONLINE
146
DAW LOOP
DAW LOOP
147
DAW QUICKPUNCH
DAW QUICKPUNCH
148
DAW GROUP STATUS
DAW GROUP STATUS
149
DAW AUTO FADER
DAW AUTO FADER
150
DAW AUTO MUTE
DAW AUTO MUTE
151
DAW AUTO PAN
DAW AUTO PAN
152
DAW AUTO SEND
DAW AUTO SEND
153
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
DAW AUTO PLUGIN
154
DAW AUTO SEND MUTE
DAW AUTO SENDMUTE
155
DAW AUTO READ
DAW AUTO READ
156
DAW AUTO TOUCH
DAW AUTO TOUCH
157
DAW AUTO LATCH
DAW AUTO LATCH
158
DAW AUTO WRITE
DAW AUTO WRITE
159
DAW AUTO TRIM
DAW AUTO TRIM
160
DAW AUTO OFF
DAW AUTO OFF
161
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
DAW AUTO SUSPEND
162
DAW AUTO STATUS
DAW AUTO STATUS
163
DAW MONITOR STATUS
DAW MONI STATUS
01V96i—Reference Manual
121
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
BANK A
BANK B
BANK C
BANK D
BANK E
BANK F
BANK G
BANK H
TITLE
Scene Recall
Group
Enable
DAW 1
DAW 2
Machine
Control
Program
Change
Special
Function
No Assign
1
Scene 1 Recall
IN Fader
Group A
UDEF BANK D UDEF BANK C
Machine
SHUTTLE
MIDI PGM 1 Display Back No Assign
2
Scene 2 Recall
IN Mute
Group I
DAW WIN
MIX/EDIT
DAW
OPTION/ALL
Machine
SCRUB
MIDI PGM 2
Display
Forward
No Assign
3
Scene 3 Recall
IN Fader
Group B
DAW BANK –
DAW AUTO
READ
Machine RTZ MIDI PGM 3
Channel
Copy
No Assign
4
Scene 4 Recall
IN Mute
Group J
DAW BANK +
DAW AUTO
TOUCH
Machine REC MIDI PGM 4
Channel
Paste
No Assign
5
Scene 5 Recall
IN Fader
Group C
DAW
SHUTTLE
DAW AUTO
LATCH
Machine
STOP
MIDI PGM 5 No Assign
No Assign
6
Scene 6 Recall
IN Mute
Group K
DAW SCRUB
DAW AUTO
WRITE
Machine
PLAY
MIDI PGM 6 No Assign
No Assign
7
Scene 7 Recall
IN Fader
Group D
DAW STOP
DAW AUTO
TRIM
Machine
REW
MIDI PGM 7 No Assign
No Assign
8
Scene 8 Recall
IN Mute
Group L
DAW PLAY
DAW AUTO
OFF
Machine FF
MIDI PGM 8 No Assign
No Assign
Input Patch Parameters
INPUT
Port ID
INSERT IN
Description
Port ID
EFFECT IN
Description
Port ID
CASCADE
Description
Port ID
Description
–
NONE
–
NONE
–
NONE
–
NONE
AD1
AD IN 1
AD1
AD IN 1
AUX1
AUX1
ADAT1
ADAT1 IN
AD2
AD IN 2
AD2
AD IN 2
AUX2
AUX2
ADAT2
ADAT2 IN
AD3
AD IN 3
AD3
AD IN 3
AUX3
AUX3
ADAT3
ADAT3 IN
AD4
AD IN 4
AD4
AD IN 4
AUX4
AUX4
ADAT4
ADAT4 IN
AD5
AD IN 5
AD5
AD IN 5
AUX5
AUX5
ADAT5
ADAT5 IN
AD6
AD IN 6
AD6
AD IN 6
AUX6
AUX6
ADAT6
ADAT6 IN
AD7
AD IN 7
AD7
AD IN 7
AUX7
AUX7
ADAT7
ADAT7 IN
AD8
AD IN 8
AD8
AD IN 8
AUX8
AUX8
ADAT8
ADAT8 IN
AD9
AD IN 9
AD9
AD IN 9
INS CH1
InsertOut-CH1
SL-01
Slot CH1 IN
AD10
AD IN 10
AD10
AD IN 10
INS CH2
InsertOut-CH2
SL-02
Slot CH2 IN
AD11
AD IN 11
AD11
AD IN 11
INS CH3
InsertOut-CH3
SL-03
Slot CH3 IN
AD12
AD IN 12
AD12
AD IN 12
INS CH4
InsertOut-CH4
SL-04
Slot CH4 IN
AD13
AD IN 13
AD13
AD IN 13
INS CH5
InsertOut-CH5
SL-05
Slot CH5 IN
AD14
AD IN 14
AD14
AD IN 14
INS CH6
InsertOut-CH6
SL-06
Slot CH6 IN
AD15
AD IN 15
AD15
AD IN 15
INS CH7
InsertOut-CH7
SL-07
Slot CH7 IN
AD16
AD IN 16
AD16
AD IN 16
INS CH8
InsertOut-CH8
SL-08
Slot CH8 IN
ADAT1
ADAT1 IN
ADAT1
ADAT1 IN
INS CH9
InsertOut-CH9
SL-09
Slot CH9 IN
ADAT2
ADAT2 IN
ADAT2
ADAT2 IN
INS CH10 InsertOut-CH10
SL-10
Slot CH10 IN
ADAT3
ADAT3 IN
ADAT3
ADAT3 IN
INS CH11 InsertOut-CH11
SL-11
Slot CH11 IN
ADAT4
ADAT4 IN
ADAT4
ADAT4 IN
INS CH12 InsertOut-CH12
SL-12
Slot CH12 IN
ADAT5
ADAT5 IN
ADAT5
ADAT5 IN
INS CH13 InsertOut-CH13
SL-13
Slot CH13 IN
ADAT6
ADAT6 IN
ADAT6
ADAT6 IN
INS CH14 InsertOut-CH14
SL-14
Slot CH14 IN
ADAT7
ADAT7 IN
ADAT7
ADAT7 IN
INS CH15 InsertOut-CH15
SL-15
Slot CH15 IN
ADAT8
ADAT8 IN
ADAT8
ADAT8 IN
INS CH16 InsertOut-CH16
SL-16
Slot CH16 IN
SL-01
Slot CH1 IN
SL-01
Slot CH1 IN
INS CH17 InsertOut-CH17
AD1
AD IN 1
SL-02
Slot CH2 IN
SL-02
Slot CH2 IN
INS CH18 InsertOut-CH18
AD2
AD IN 2
SL-03
Slot CH3 IN
SL-03
Slot CH3 IN
INS CH19 InsertOut-CH19
AD3
AD IN 3
SL-04
Slot CH4 IN
SL-04
Slot CH4 IN
INS CH20 InsertOut-CH20
AD4
AD IN 4
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
122
Appendix: Parameter Lists
INPUT
Port ID
Description
INSERT IN
Port ID
Description
EFFECT IN
Port ID
Description
CASCADE
Port ID
Description
SL-05
Slot CH5 IN
SL-05
Slot CH5 IN
INS CH21 InsertOut-CH21
AD5
AD IN 5
SL-06
Slot CH6 IN
SL-06
Slot CH6 IN
INS CH22 InsertOut-CH22
AD6
AD IN 6
SL-07
Slot CH7 IN
SL-07
Slot CH7 IN
INS CH23 InsertOut-CH23
AD7
AD IN 7
SL-08
Slot CH8 IN
SL-08
Slot CH8 IN
INS CH24 InsertOut-CH24
AD8
AD IN 8
SL-09
Slot CH9 IN
SL-09
Slot CH9 IN
INS CH25 InsertOut-CH25
AD9
AD IN 9
SL-10
Slot CH10 IN
SL-10
Slot CH10 IN
INS CH26 InsertOut-CH26
AD10
AD IN 10
SL-11
Slot CH11 IN
SL-11
Slot CH11 IN
INS CH27 InsertOut-CH27
AD11
AD IN 11
SL-12
Slot CH12 IN
SL-12
Slot CH12 IN
INS CH28 InsertOut-CH28
AD12
AD IN 12
SL-13
Slot CH13 IN
SL-13
Slot CH13 IN
INS CH29 InsertOut-CH29
AD13
AD IN 13
SL-14
Slot CH14 IN
SL-14
Slot CH14 IN
INS CH30 InsertOut-CH30
AD14
AD IN 14
SL-15
Slot CH15 IN
SL-15
Slot CH15 IN
INS CH31 InsertOut-CH31
AD15
AD IN 15
SL-16
Slot CH16 IN
SL-16
Slot CH16 IN
INS CH32 InsertOut-CH32
AD16
AD IN 16
USB1
USB CH1 IN
USB1
USB CH1 IN
INS BUS1
InsertOut-BUS1
2TD-L
2TR IN Dig. L
USB2
USB CH2 IN
USB2
USB CH2 IN
INS BUS2
InsertOut-BUS2
2TD-R
2TR IN Dig. R
USB3
USB CH3 IN
USB3
USB CH3 IN
INS BUS3
InsertOut-BUS3
USB4
USB CH4 IN
USB4
USB CH4 IN
INS BUS4
InsertOut-BUS4
USB5
USB CH5 IN
USB5
USB CH5 IN
INS BUS5
InsertOut-BUS5
USB6
USB CH6 IN
USB6
USB CH6 IN
INS BUS6
InsertOut-BUS6
USB7
USB CH7 IN
USB7
USB CH7 IN
INS BUS7
InsertOut-BUS7
USB8
USB CH8 IN
USB8
USB CH8 IN
INS BUS8
InsertOut-BUS8
USB9
USB CH9 IN
USB9
USB CH9 IN
INS AUX1 InsertOut-AUX1
USB10
USB CH10 IN
USB10
USB CH10 IN
INS AUX2 InsertOut-AUX2
USB11
USB CH11 IN
USB11
USB CH11 IN
INS AUX3 InsertOut-AUX3
USB12
USB CH12 IN
USB12
USB CH12 IN
INS AUX4 InsertOut-AUX4
USB13
USB CH13 IN
USB13
USB CH13 IN
INS AUX5 InsertOut-AUX5
USB14
USB CH14 IN
USB14
USB CH14 IN
INS AUX6 InsertOut-AUX6
USB15
USB CH15 IN
USB15
USB CH15 IN
INS AUX7 InsertOut-AUX7
USB16
USB CH16 IN
USB16
USB CH16 IN
INS AUX8 InsertOut-AUX8
FX1-1
Effect1 OUT 1
FX1-1
Effect1 OUT 1
INS ST-L
InsertOut-ST-L
FX1-2
Effect1 OUT 2
FX1-2
Effect1 OUT 2
INS ST-R
InsertOut-ST-R
FX2-1
Effect2 OUT 1
FX2-1
Effect2 OUT 1
FX2-2
Effect2 OUT 2
FX2-2
Effect2 OUT 2
FX3-1
Effect3 OUT 1
FX3-1
Effect3 OUT 1
FX3-2
Effect3 OUT 2
FX3-2
Effect3 OUT 2
FX4-1
Effect4 OUT 1
FX4-1
Effect4 OUT 1
FX4-2
Effect4 OUT 2
FX4-2
Effect4 OUT 2
2TD-L
2TR IN Dig. L
2TD-L
2TR IN Dig. L
2TD-R
2TR IN Dig. R
2TD-R
2TR IN Dig. R
01V96i—Reference Manual
Initial Input Patch Settings
123
CHANNEL
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Initial Input Patch Settings
EFFECT IN PATCH
1
AD1
1-1
2
AD2
1-2
AUX1
NONE
3
AD3
2-1
AUX2
4
AD4
2-2
NONE
5
AD5
3-1
AUX3
6
AD6
3-2
NONE
7
AD7
4-1
AUX4
8
AD8
4-2
NONE
9
AD9
10
AD10
11
AD11
12
AD12
13
AD13
14
AD14
15
AD15
16
AD16
17
ADAT1
18
ADAT2
19
ADAT3
20
ADAT4
21
ADAT5
22
ADAT6
23
ADAT7
24
ADAT8
25
S-1
26
S-2
27
S-3
28
S-4
29
S-5
30
S-6
31
S-7
32
S-8
STI1L
FX1-1
EFFECT1
REVERB HALL
STI1R
FX1-2
EFFECT2
REVERB ROOM
STI2L
FX2-1
EFFECT3
REVERB STAGE
STI2R
FX2-2
EFFECT4
REVERB PLATE
STI3L
FX3-1
STI3R
FX3-2
STI4L
FX4-1
STI4R
FX4-2
CASCADE IN PATCH
BUS1
NONE
BUS2
NONE
BUS3
NONE
BUS4
NONE
BUS5
NONE
BUS6
NONE
BUS7
NONE
BUS8
NONE
AUX1
NONE
AUX2
NONE
AUX3
NONE
AUX4
NONE
AUX5
NONE
AUX6
NONE
AUX7
NONE
AUX8
NONE
ST L
NONE
ST R
NONE
SOLO L
NONE
SOLO R
NONE
EFFECT TYPE
(mono input)
01V96i—Reference Manual
124
Appendix: Parameter Lists
CHANNEL NAME
CHANNEL ID
SHORT
LONG
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH1
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH2
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH3
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH4
CH5
CH5
CH5
CH5
CH6
CH6
CH6
CH6
CH7
CH7
CH7
CH7
CH8
CH8
CH8
CH8
CH9
CH9
CH9
CH9
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH10
CH11
CH11
CH11
CH11
CH12
CH12
CH12
CH12
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH13
CH14
CH14
CH14
CH14
CH15
CH15
CH15
CH15
CH16
CH16
CH16
CH16
CH17
CH17
CH17
CH17
CH18
CH18
CH18
CH18
CH19
CH19
CH19
CH19
CH20
CH20
CH20
CH20
CH21
CH21
CH21
CH21
CH22
CH22
CH22
CH22
CH23
CH23
CH23
CH23
CH24
CH24
CH24
CH24
CH25
CH25
CH25
CH25
CH26
CH26
CH26
CH26
CH27
CH27
CH27
CH27
CH28
CH28
CH28
CH28
CH29
CH29
CH29
CH29
CH30
CH30
CH30
CH30
CH31
CH31
CH31
CH31
CH32
CH32
CH32
CH32
ST IN1
STI1
STI1
STEREO IN1
ST IN2
STI2
STI2
STEREO IN2
ST IN3
STI3
STI3
STEREO IN3
ST IN4
STI4
STI4
STEREO IN4
01V96i—Reference Manual
Output Patch Parameters
125
SLOT, ADAT, OMNI,
2TR OUT Digital
Source
Description
INSERT IN
Source
Description
DIRECT OUT
Source
USB OUT
Description
Source
Description
–
NONE
–
NONE
–
NONE
–
NONE
BUS1
BUS1
AD1
AD IN 1
ADAT1
ADAT1 OUT
BUS1
BUS1
BUS2
BUS2
AD2
AD IN 2
ADAT2
ADAT2 OUT
BUS2
BUS2
BUS3
BUS3
AD3
AD IN 3
ADAT3
ADAT3 OUT
BUS3
BUS3
BUS4
BUS4
AD4
AD IN 4
ADAT4
ADAT4 OUT
BUS4
BUS4
BUS5
BUS5
AD5
AD IN 5
ADAT5
ADAT5 OUT
BUS5
BUS5
BUS6
BUS6
AD6
AD IN 6
ADAT6
ADAT6 OUT
BUS6
BUS6
BUS7
BUS7
AD7
AD IN 7
ADAT7
ADAT7 OUT
BUS7
BUS7
BUS8
BUS8
AD8
AD IN 8
ADAT8
ADAT8 OUT
BUS8
BUS8
AUX1
AUX1
AD9
AD IN 9
SL-01
Slot CH1 OUT
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
AD10
AD IN 10
SL-02
Slot CH2 OUT
AUX2
AUX2
AUX3
AUX3
AD11
AD IN 11
SL-03
Slot CH3 OUT
AUX3
AUX3
AUX4
AUX4
AD12
AD IN 12
SL-04
Slot CH4 OUT
AUX4
AUX4
AUX5
AUX5
AD13
AD IN 13
SL-05
Slot CH5 OUT
AUX5
AUX5
AUX6
AUX6
AD14
AD IN 14
SL-06
Slot CH6 OUT
AUX6
AUX6
AUX7
AUX7
AD15
AD IN 15
SL-07
Slot CH7 OUT
AUX7
AUX7
AUX8
AUX8
AD16
AD IN 16
SL-08
Slot CH8 OUT
AUX8
AUX8
ST L
STEREO L
ADAT1
ADAT1 IN
SL-09
Slot CH9 OUT
ST L
STEREO L
ST R
STEREO R
ADAT2
ADAT2 IN
SL-10
Slot CH10 OUT
ST R
STEREO R
INS CH1
InsertOut-CH1
ADAT3
ADAT3 IN
SL-11
Slot CH11 OUT
INS CH1
InsertOut-CH1
INS CH2
InsertOut-CH2
ADAT4
ADAT4 IN
SL-12
Slot CH12 OUT
INS CH2
InsertOut-CH2
INS CH3
InsertOut-CH3
ADAT5
ADAT5 IN
SL-13
Slot CH13 OUT
INS CH3
InsertOut-CH3
INS CH4
InsertOut-CH4
ADAT6
ADAT6 IN
SL-14
Slot CH14 OUT
INS CH4
InsertOut-CH4
INS CH5
InsertOut-CH5
ADAT7
ADAT7 IN
SL-15
Slot CH15 OUT
INS CH5
InsertOut-CH5
INS CH6
InsertOut-CH6
ADAT8
ADAT8 IN
SL-16
Slot CH16 OUT
INS CH6
InsertOut-CH6
INS CH7
InsertOut-CH7
SL-01
Slot CH1 IN
USB1
USB CH1 OUT
INS CH7
InsertOut-CH7
INS CH8
InsertOut-CH8
SL-02
Slot CH2 IN
USB2
USB CH2 OUT
INS CH8
InsertOut-CH8
INS CH9
InsertOut-CH9
SL-03
Slot CH3 IN
USB3
USB CH3 OUT
INS CH9
InsertOut-CH9
INS CH10
InsertOut-CH10
SL-04
Slot CH4 IN
USB4
USB CH4 OUT
INS CH10
InsertOut-CH10
INS CH11
InsertOut-CH11
SL-05
Slot CH5 IN
USB5
USB CH5 OUT
INS CH11
InsertOut-CH11
INS CH12
InsertOut-CH12
SL-06
Slot CH6 IN
USB6
USB CH6 OUT
INS CH12
InsertOut-CH12
INS CH13
InsertOut-CH13
SL-07
Slot CH7 IN
USB7
USB CH7 OUT
INS CH13
InsertOut-CH13
INS CH14
InsertOut-CH14
SL-08
Slot CH8 IN
USB8
USB CH8 OUT
INS CH14
InsertOut-CH14
INS CH15
InsertOut-CH15
SL-09
Slot CH9 IN
USB9
USB CH9 OUT
INS CH15
InsertOut-CH15
INS CH16
InsertOut-CH16
SL-10
Slot CH10 IN
USB10
USB CH10 OUT
INS CH16
InsertOut-CH16
INS CH17
InsertOut-CH17
SL-11
Slot CH11 IN
USB11
USB CH11 OUT
INS CH17
InsertOut-CH17
INS CH18
InsertOut-CH18
SL-12
Slot CH12 IN
USB12
USB CH12 OUT
INS CH18
InsertOut-CH18
INS CH19
InsertOut-CH19
SL-13
Slot CH13 IN
USB13
USB CH13 OUT
INS CH19
InsertOut-CH19
INS CH20
InsertOut-CH20
SL-14
Slot CH14 IN
USB14
USB CH14 OUT
INS CH20
InsertOut-CH20
INS CH21
InsertOut-CH21
SL-15
Slot CH15 IN
USB15
USB CH15 OUT
INS CH21
InsertOut-CH21
INS CH22
InsertOut-CH22
SL-16
Slot CH16 IN
USB16
USB CH16 OUT
INS CH22
InsertOut-CH22
INS CH23
InsertOut-CH23
USB1
USB CH1 IN
OMNI1
OMNI OUT 1
INS CH23
InsertOut-CH23
INS CH24
InsertOut-CH24
USB2
USB CH2 IN
OMNI2
OMNI OUT 2
INS CH24
InsertOut-CH24
INS CH25
InsertOut-CH25
USB3
USB CH3 IN
OMNI3
OMNI OUT 3
INS CH25
InsertOut-CH25
INS CH26
InsertOut-CH26
USB4
USB CH4 IN
OMNI4
OMNI OUT 4
INS CH26
InsertOut-CH26
INS CH27
InsertOut-CH27
USB5
USB CH5 IN
2TD-L
2TR OUT Dig. L
INS CH27
InsertOut-CH27
2TD-R
2TR OUT Dig. R
INS CH28
InsertOut-CH28
USB6
USB CH6 IN
INS CH28
InsertOut-CH28
INS CH29
InsertOut-CH29
USB7
USB CH7 IN
—
—
INS CH29
InsertOut-CH29
INS CH30
InsertOut-CH30
USB8
USB CH8 IN
—
—
INS CH30
InsertOut-CH30
INS CH31
InsertOut-CH31
USB9
USB CH9 IN
—
—
INS CH31
InsertOut-CH31
INS CH32
InsertOut-CH32
USB10
USB CH10 IN
—
—
INS CH32
InsertOut-CH32
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Output Patch Parameters
126
Appendix: Parameter Lists
SLOT, ADAT, OMNI,
2TR OUT Digital
INSERT IN
Source
Description
Source
Description
INS BUS1
InsertOut-BUS1
USB11
INS BUS2
InsertOut-BUS2
USB12
INS BUS3
InsertOut-BUS3
INS BUS4
Description
USB CH11 IN
—
USB CH12 IN
—
USB13
USB CH13 IN
InsertOut-BUS4
USB14
INS BUS5
InsertOut-BUS5
INS BUS6
USB OUT
Source
Description
—
INS BUS1
InsertOut-BUS1
—
INS BUS2
InsertOut-BUS2
—
—
INS BUS3
InsertOut-BUS3
USB CH14 IN
—
—
INS BUS4
InsertOut-BUS4
USB15
USB CH15 IN
—
—
INS BUS5
InsertOut-BUS5
InsertOut-BUS6
USB16
USB CH16 IN
—
—
INS BUS6
InsertOut-BUS6
INS BUS7
InsertOut-BUS7
FX1-1
Effect1 OUT 1
—
—
INS BUS7
InsertOut-BUS7
INS BUS8
InsertOut-BUS8
FX1-2
Effect1 OUT 2
—
—
INS BUS8
InsertOut-BUS8
INS AUX1
InsertOut-AUX1
FX2-1
Effect2 OUT 1
—
—
INS AUX1
InsertOut-AUX1
INS AUX2
InsertOut-AUX2
FX2-2
Effect2 OUT 2
—
—
INS AUX2
InsertOut-AUX2
INS AUX3
InsertOut-AUX3
FX3-1
Effect3 OUT 1
—
—
INS AUX3
InsertOut-AUX3
INS AUX4
InsertOut-AUX4
FX3-2
Effect3 OUT 2
—
—
INS AUX4
InsertOut-AUX4
INS AUX5
InsertOut-AUX5
FX4-1
Effect4 OUT 1
—
—
INS AUX5
InsertOut-AUX5
INS AUX6
InsertOut-AUX6
FX4-2
Effect4 OUT 2
—
—
INS AUX6
InsertOut-AUX6
INS AUX7
InsertOut-AUX7
2TD-L
2TR IN Dig. L
—
—
INS AUX7
InsertOut-AUX7
INS AUX8
InsertOut-AUX8
2TD-R
2TR IN Dig. R
—
—
INS AUX8
InsertOut-AUX8
INS ST-L
InsertOut-STL
—
—
—
—
INS ST-L
InsertOut-ST-L
INS ST-R
InsertOut-STR
—
—
—
—
INS ST-R
InsertOut-ST-R
CAS BUS1
Cascade Out Bus1
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS BUS2
Cascade Out Bus2
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS BUS3
Cascade Out Bus3
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS BUS4
Cascade Out Bus4
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS BUS5
Cascade Out Bus5
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS BUS6
Cascade Out Bus6
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS BUS7
Cascade Out Bus7
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS BUS8
Cascade Out Bus8
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX1
Cascade Out Aux1
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX2
Cascade Out Aux2
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX3
Cascade Out Aux3
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX4
Cascade Out Aux4
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX5
Cascade Out Aux5
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX6
Cascade Out Aux6
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX7
Cascade Out Aux7
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS AUX8
Cascade Out Aux8
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS ST-L
Cascade STEREO-L
—
—
—
—
—
—
CAS ST-R
Cascade STEREO-R
—
—
—
—
—
—
CASSOLOL Cascade SOLO L
—
—
—
—
—
—
CASSOLOR Cascade SOLO R
—
—
—
—
—
—
01V96i—Reference Manual
Source
DIRECT OUT
Initial Output Patch Settings
127
SLOT
SLOT1-1
SLOT1-2
SLOT1-3
SLOT1-4
SLOT1-5
SLOT1-6
SLOT1-7
SLOT1-8
SLOT1-9
SLOT1-10
SLOT1-11
SLOT1-12
SLOT1-13
SLOT1-14
SLOT1-15
SLOT1-16
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Initial Output Patch Settings
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
2TR OUT Digital
1L
1R
ST L
ST R
CHANNEL NAME
ADAT OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CHANNEL ID
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
OMNI OUT
1
2
3
4
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
DIRECT OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ADAT1
ADAT2
ADAT3
ADAT4
ADAT5
ADAT6
ADAT7
ADAT8
SLOT-1
SLOT-2
SLOT-3
SLOT-4
SLOT-5
SLOT-6
SLOT-7
SLOT-8
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
STEREO
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
ST
SHORT
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
ST
LONG
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
STEREO
USB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
01V96i—Reference Manual
128
Appendix: Parameter Lists
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
Bank 1 (GM Vol & Pan)
ID
Name
Short
Long
RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&PAN
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&PAN
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&PAN
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&PAN
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&PAN
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&PAN
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&PAN
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&PAN
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&PAN
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&PAN
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&PAN
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&PAN
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&PAN
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&PAN
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&PAN
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&PAN
01V96i—Reference Manual
Controller
Data Format
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ON
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B1
ON
END
FADER
B2
ON
END
FADER
B3
ON
END
FADER
B4
ON
END
FADER
B5
ON
END
FADER
B6
ON
END
FADER
B7
ON
END
FADER
B8
ON
END
FADER
B9
ON
END
FADER
BA
ON
END
FADER
BB
ON
END
FADER
BC
ON
END
FADER
BD
ON
END
FADER
BE
ON
END
FADER
BF
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
129
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
ID
Name
Short
Long
RM01 GM01 GM-CH01 VOL&EFF1
RM02 GM02 GM-CH02 VOL&EFF1
RM03 GM03 GM-CH03 VOL&EFF1
RM04 GM04 GM-CH04 VOL&EFF1
RM05 GM05 GM-CH05 VOL&EFF1
RM06 GM06 GM-CH06 VOL&EFF1
RM07 GM07 GM-CH07 VOL&EFF1
RM08 GM08 GM-CH08 VOL&EFF1
RM09 GM09 GM-CH09 VOL&EFF1
RM10 GM10 GM-CH10 VOL&EFF1
RM11 GM11 GM-CH11 VOL&EFF1
RM12 GM12 GM-CH12 VOL&EFF1
RM13 GM13 GM-CH13 VOL&EFF1
RM14 GM14 GM-CH14 VOL&EFF1
RM15 GM15 GM-CH15 VOL&EFF1
RM16 GM16 GM-CH16 VOL&EFF1
Controller
Data Format
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ON
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B1
ON
END
FADER
B2
ON
END
FADER
B3
ON
END
FADER
B4
ON
END
FADER
B5
ON
END
FADER
B6
ON
END
FADER
B7
ON
END
FADER
B8
ON
END
FADER
B9
ON
END
FADER
BA
ON
END
FADER
BB
ON
END
FADER
BC
ON
END
FADER
BD
ON
END
FADER
BE
ON
END
FADER
BF
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
–
07
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Bank 2 (GM Vol & Effect 1)
130
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Bank 3 (XG Vol & Pan)
ID
Name
Short
RM01 XG01
RM02 XG02
RM03 XG03
RM04 XG04
RM05 XG05
RM06 XG06
RM07 XG07
RM08 XG08
RM09 XG09
RM10 XG10
RM11 XG11
RM12 XG12
RM13 XG13
RM14 XG14
RM15 XG15
RM16 XG16
Long
XG-CH01 VOL&PAN
XG-CH02 VOL&PAN
XG-CH03 VOL&PAN
XG-CH04 VOL&PAN
XG-CH05 VOL&PAN
XG-CH06 VOL&PAN
XG-CH07 VOL&PAN
XG-CH08 VOL&PAN
XG-CH09 VOL&PAN
XG-CH10 VOL&PAN
XG-CH11 VOL&PAN
XG-CH12 VOL&PAN
XG-CH13 VOL&PAN
XG-CH14 VOL&PAN
XG-CH15 VOL&PAN
XG-CH16 VOL&PAN
01V96i—Reference Manual
Controller
Data Format
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ON
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
F0
43
10
4C
08
00
0B
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
01
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
02
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
03
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
04
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
05
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
06
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
07
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
08
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
09
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
0A
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
0B
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
0C
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
0D
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
0E
0B
–
–
–
–
–
–
43
10
4C
08
0F
0B
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
ON
END
FADER
F0
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
–
–
FAD F7
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
131
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
ID
Name
Short
RM01 CH1
RM02 CH2
RM03 CH3
RM04 CH4
RM05 CH5
RM06 CH6
RM07 CH7
RM08 CH8
RM09 CH9
RM10 CH10
RM11 CH11
RM12 CH12
RM13 CH13
RM14 CH14
RM15 CH15
RM16 CH16
Long
VST MIXER CH1
VST MIXER CH2
VST MIXER CH3
VST MIXER CH4
VST MIXER CH5
VST MIXER CH6
VST MIXER CH7
VST MIXER CH8
VST MIXER CH9
VST MIXER CH10
VST MIXER CH11
VST MIXER CH12
VST MIXER CH13
VST MIXER CH14
VST MIXER CH15
VST MIXER CH16
Controller
Data Format
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ON
B0
40
SW
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
B0
–
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B1
–
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B1
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B2
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B2
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B3
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B3
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B4
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B4
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B5
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B5
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B6
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B6
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B7
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B7
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B8
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B8
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
B9
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
B9
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BA
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
BA
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BB
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
BB
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BC
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
BC
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BD
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
BD
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BE
40
SW
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
END
FADER
BE
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ON
BF
40
SW
END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FADER
BF
07
FAD END
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Bank 4 (Nuendo VST Mixer)
132
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Effects Parameters
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM,
REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate
reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
Range
Description
One input, two output early reflections with gate,
and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
Type-A, Type-B
Description
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
Reflection diffusion (left–right
reflection spread)
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right
reverb spread)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
E/R DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Delay between early reflections
and reverb
FB.GAIN
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and
reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =
all early reflections)
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
MONO DELAY
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
One input, two output basic repeat delay.
GATE LVL
OFF, –60 to 0 dB
Level at which gate kicks in
Parameter
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Gate opening speed
DELAY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Delay time
HOLD
1
Gate open time
DECAY
2
Gate closing speed
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
1.
0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz),
0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz)
2.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter
TYPE
Range
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
Description
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
Description
1.
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right
reflection spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
01V96i—Reference Manual
Range
(Max. value depends on tempo setting)
Effects Parameters
133
DELAY LCR
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Range
Parameter
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
DELAY R
FB. G L
FB. G R
Description
Description
DELAY L
0.0–2730.0 ms
Left channel delay time
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
DELAY C
0.0–2730.0 ms
Center channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–2730.0 ms
Right channel delay time
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
FB. DLY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Feedback delay time
LEVEL L
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay level
LEVEL C
–100 to +100%
Center channel delay level
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase
feedback)
LEVEL R
–100 to +100%
Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY L
NOTE C
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY C
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel
DELAY
NOTE R
Range
Parameter
Left channel delay time
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
Range
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Description
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE 2
Used in conjunction with
TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
2.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
STEREO DELAY
134
Appendix: Parameter Lists
ECHO
FLANGE
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed
feedback loop.
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter
DELAY L
Range
0.0–1350.0 ms
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Left channel delay time
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
Description
Modulation speed
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel feedback delay time
FB.DLY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel feedback delay
time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
FB. G L
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain
(plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
–99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback
gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Right to left channel feedback
gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
FB. G R
L->R FBG
R->L FBG
–99 to +99%
1.
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY L
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY R
MOD. DLY
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB.DLY L
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB.DLY R
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
NOTE R
NOTE FBL
NOTE FBR
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
0.05–40.00 Hz
Description
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
1.
01V96i—Reference Manual
SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter
1.
Range
Description
Modulation speed
Effects Parameters
135
HQ. PITCH
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter
(Available for internal effects 1 and 2.).
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Pitch shift fine
DELAY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
Pitch shift
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency
offset
PHASE
0.00–354.38
degrees
Left and right modulation phase
balance
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
STAGE
Number of phase shift stages
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
NOTE
1
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
1.
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
AUTO PAN
PITCH 1
–24 to +24 semitones
Two input, two output autopanner.
FINE 1
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 1
–100 to +100%
Channel #1 level (plus values for
normal phase, minus values for
reverse phase)
PAN 1
L63 to R63
Channel #1 pan
DELAY 1
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #1 delay time
FB. G 1
–99 to +99%
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
PITCH 2
–24 to +24 semitones
Channel #2 pitch shift
FINE 2
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2
–100 to +100%
Channel #2 level (plus values for
normal phase, minus values for
reverse phase)
Channel #2 pan
Parameter
FREQ.
Range
Description
Channel #1 pitch shift
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
1
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
PAN 2
L63 to R63
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
DELAY 2
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #2 delay time
FB. G 2
–99 to +99%
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus
values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for
reverse-phase feedback)
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
TREMOLO
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
NOTE 1
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine Channel #1 delay
NOTE 2
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine Channel #2 delay
NOTE
1.
2
L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
2.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
1.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
PHASER
136
Appendix: Parameter Lists
ROTARY
AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
ROTATE
STOP, START
Rotation stop, start
AMP TYPE
1
Guitar amp simulation type
SPEED
SLOW, FAST
Rotation speed (see SLOW and
FAST parameters)
DST TYPE
SLOW
0.05–10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
DST1, DST2,
OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
FAST rotation speed
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
DRIVE
0–100
Overdrive level
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
ACCEL
0–10
Acceleration at speed changes
BASS
0–100
Bass tone control
LOW
0–100
Low-frequency filter
MIDDLE
0–100
Middle tone control
HIGH
0–100
High-frequency filter
TREBLE
0–100
High tone control
CAB DEP
0–100%
Speaker cabinet simulation
depth
EQ F
100–8.00 kHz
Parametric equalizer frequency
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Parametric equalizer gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
Parametric equalizer bandwidth
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
OSC, SELF
Modulation source: oscillator or
input signal
OSC FREQ
0.0–5000.0 Hz
Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Oscillator frequency modulation
speed
FM DEPTH
0–100%
Oscillator frequency modulation
depth
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE FM
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FM FREQ.
1.
STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR,
CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
MOD. FILTER
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
Two input, two output modulation filter.
DECAY
1
Filter frequency change decay
speed
1.
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
0.00–354.38
degrees
LEVEL
0–100
Output Level
PHASE
Left-channel modulation and
right-channel modulation phase
difference
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type: low pass, high pass,
band pass
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
DYNA. FLANGE
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
LEVEL
0–100
Output level
Two input, two output dynamically controlled
flanger.
Parameter
Range
Description
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
1.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DISTORTION
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
One input, two output distortion effect.
DECAY
1
Decay speed
OFFSET
0–100
Delay time offset
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
1.
Parameter
Range
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2,
OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
DRIVE
MASTER
Description
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
0–100
Distortion drive
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
0–100
Master volume
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
EQ G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter gain
1.
01V96i—Reference Manual
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
Effects Parameters
137
REV->CHORUS
Two input, two output dynamically controlled
phaser.
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in
series.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or
MIDI Note On velocity
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DECAY
1
Decay speed
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency
offset
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb,
100% = all reverb)
Number of phase shift stages
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
FB.GAIN
STAGE
–99 to +99%
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,
14, 16
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
HSH G
1.
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
–12.0 to +12.0 dB
High shelving filter frequency
High shelving filter gain
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in
parallel.
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
1.
REV+CHORUS
Parameter
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Reverb density
REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in
parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/CHO
0–100%
Reverb and chorus balance (0%
= all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
REV/FLG
0–100%
Reverb and flange balance (0% =
all reverb, 100% = all flange)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
AM DEPTH 0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
1.
1.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
DYNA. PHASER
138
Appendix: Parameter Lists
REV->FLANGE
REV->SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in
series.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects
in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb,
100% = all reverb)
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic reverb
balance (0% = all symphonic
reverb, 100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
FB. GAIN
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
WAVE
Sine, Tri
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
NOTE
Modulation waveform
1.
REV->PAN
One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in
parallel.
REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects
in parallel.
Parameter
1.
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
0–10
Spread
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
DIFF.
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
HPF
0–10
Spread
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
DIFF.
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb,
100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic balance
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all
symphonic)
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
1
Panning direction
LPF
REV/SYM
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
NOTE
2
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
1.
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
2.
1.
01V96i—Reference Manual
L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R
Effects Parameters
139
DELAY->ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections
effects in parallel.
One input, two output delay and early reflections
effects in series.
Parameter
Range
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
DELAY R
FB. DLY
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
Left channel delay time
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/ER
0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all
early reflections)
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay
balance (0% = all early reflected
delay, 100% = all delay)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate,
Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY
L
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY
L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel
DELAY R
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel
DELAY R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
1.
Left channel delay time
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
DELAY+ER.
140
Appendix: Parameter Lists
DELAY+REV
DELAY->REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in
parallel.
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in
series.
Parameter
Range
Description
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback
ratio
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback
ratio
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and reverb balance (0% =
all delay, 100% = all reverb)
DLY.BAL
0–100%
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb,
100% = all delay)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
Reverb density
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY
L
NOTE L
1
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel
DELAY R
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine left channel DELAY
L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine right channel
DELAY R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
DENSITY
SYNC
NOTE L
NOTE R
NOTE FB
0–100%
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DIST->DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in
series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2,
OVD1, OVD2,
CRUNCH
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for
normal-phase feedback, minus
values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Distortion and delay balance
(0% = all distortion, 100% = all
delayed distortion)
SYNC
OFF, ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine DELAY
MOD.NOT
E
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO
to determine FREQ.
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
2.
01V96i—Reference Manual
Effects Parameters
141
FREEZE
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter
(24 dB/octave).
One input, one output basic sampler (Available for
internal effects 1 and 2.).
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE 1
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
TYPE 2
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
TYPE 3
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass,
band pass
FREQ. 1
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 1 frequency
FREQ. 2
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 2 frequency
FREQ. 3
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 3 frequency
LEVEL 1
0–100
Filter 1 level
LEVEL 2
0–100
Filter 2 level
LEVEL 3
0–100
Filter 3 level
RESO. 1
0–20
Filter 1 resonance
RESO. 2
0–20
Filter 2 resonance
RESO. 3
0–20
Filter 3 resonance
Parameter
Range
REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT
Description
In MANUAL mode, recording is
started by pressing the REC and
PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode,
Record-Ready mode is engaged
by pressing the REC button, and
actual recording is triggered by
the input signal
REC DLY
–1000 to
+1000 ms
Recording delay. For plus values,
recording starts after the trigger
is received. For minus values,
recording starts before the trigger is received
TRG LVL
–60 to 0 dB
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal
level required to trigger recording or playback)
TRG MASK
0–1000 ms
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are
ignored for the duration of the
TRG MASK time
PLY MODE
MOMENT,
CONTI., INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample
plays only while the that the
PLAY button is pressed. In CONT
mode, playback continues once
the PLAY button has been
pressed. The number of times
the sample plays is set using the
LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT
mode, playback is triggered by
the input signal
START
1
Playback start point in milliseconds
END
1
Playback end point in milliseconds
LOOP
1
Loop start point in milliseconds
LOOP
NUM
0–100
Number of times the sample
plays
START
[SAMPLE]
2
Playback start point in samples
END
[SAMPLE]
2
Playback end point in samples
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
2
Loop start point in samples
PITCH
–12 to +12
semitones
Playback pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Playback pitch shift fine
OFF, C1–C6, ALL
PLAY button can be triggered by
using MIDI Note on/off messages
MIDI TRG
1.
0.0~2970.5 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0~2729.2 ms (fs=48 kHz),
0.0~2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.0~2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz)
2.
0~131000 (fs=44.1 kHz, 48 kHz), 0~262000 (fs=88.2 kHz,
96 kHz)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
MULTI FILTER
142
Appendix: Parameter Lists
ST REVERB
Comp276/Comp276S
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
This emulates the characteristics of an analog compressor that has become a standard item in recording
studios. It thickens the sound, and is particularly
suitable for drum and bass sounds. Comp276 lets
you control two monaural channels independently.
Comp276S links the L/R channel parameters for
control.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage,
Plate
Reverb type
Initial delay before reverb begins
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right
reverb spread)
DENSITY
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Reverb density
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and
reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =
all early reflections)
HPF
THRU,
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,
THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
Range
Description
INPUT
Parameter
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the input level
OUTPUT
–180 to 0 dB
Adjusts the output gain
ATTACK
0.022 to 50.40ms
Adjusts the attack time
RELEASE
10.88 to 544.22ms Adjusts the release time
RATIO
2:1, 4:1, 8:1, 12:1,
20:1
Adjusts the ratio
MAKE UP
ON, OFF
If this is on, the output gain will
automatically be compensated
to make up for gain reduction
applied by the compressor
SIDE HPF
ON, OFF
If this is on, the compressor
effect in the low-frequency
range will be reduced, thus
boosting the low-frequency output
GR meter
ON, OFF
This shows the amount of gain
reduction when the compressor
is operating
M.BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor,
with individual solo and gain reduction metering for
each band.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold
of the high band is lowered and
the threshold of the low band is
increased. For negative values,
the opposite will occur. When set
to 0, all three bands are affected
the same
PRESENCE
Comp260/Comp260S
This emulates the characteristics of a compressor/limiter of the mid-1970s that has now become a
standard item for live sound reinforcement.
Comp260 lets you control two monaural channels
independently. Comb260S links the L/R channel
parameters for control.
CMP. THRE 24.0 to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
CMP. RAT
1:1 to 20:1
Compressor ratio
CMP. ATK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack
Parameter
–60.0 to 0.0 dB
Adjusts the threshold
Range
Description
Compressor release time
THRE.
CMP. KNEE 0–5
Compressor knee
ATTACK
0.010 to 80.00 ms
Adjusts the attack time
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
RELEASE
6.2 to 999.0 ms
Adjusts the release time
CMP. BYP
OFF, ON
Compressor bypass
RATIO
1.0 to 
Adjusts the ratio
KNEE
SOFT, MEDIUM,
HARD
Adjusts the knee
CMP. REL
L–M XOVR
1
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 to –12 dB
Filter slope
ST LINK
ON, OFF
If this is on, CH1 and CH2 will be
stereo-linked
CEILING
–6.0 to 0.0 dB,
OFF
Specifies the maximum output
level
OUTPUT
–20.0 to 40.0 dB
Adjusts the output gain
EXP. THRE
–54.0 to –24.0 dB
Expander threshold
EXP. RAT
1:1 to :1
GR meter
Expander ratio
This shows the amount of gain
reduction when the compressor
is operating
EXP. REL
1
Expander release time
EXP. BYP
OFF, ON
Expander bypass
Level
meter
LIM. THRE
–12.0 to 0.0 dB
Limiter threshold
This shows the effect’s input
level or output level. Use the
METER: [IN][OUT] switches to
choose which level is shown
LIM. ATK
0–120 ms
Limiter attack
LIM. REL
1
Limiter release time
LIM. BYP
OFF, ON
Limiter bypass
LIM. KNEE
0–5
Limiter knee
SOLO LOW OFF, ON
If this is on, only the low-frequency band will be output
SOLO MID
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the mid-frequency band will be output
SOLO
HIGH
OFF, ON
If this is on, only the high-frequency band will be output
1.
6 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s
(fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Effects Parameters
143
OpenDeck
This emulates the characteristics of an analog equalizer of the 1970s. By reproducing the distortion that
is typical of analog circuits, it adds drive to the
sound.
This emulates the tape compression produced by
two open-reel tape recorders (a recording deck and a
reproduction deck). You can change the tonal character by adjusting various elements, such as the deck
type, tape quality, and playback speed.
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE
DRIVE, CLEAN
Switches the equalizer type
INPUT
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
Adjusts the input gain
OUTPUT
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
Adjusts the output gain
This shows the effect’s input
level or output level. Use the
METER: [IN][OUT] switches to
choose which level is shown
Level
meter
Parameter
Range
Description
Swss70, Swss78,
Swss85, Amer70
Selects the type of recording
deck
REC LVL
–96.0 to +18.0dB
Adjusts the input level of the
recording deck. As you raise the
level, tape compression is generated, narrowing the dynamic
range and distorting the sound
REC HI
–6.0 to +6.0dB
Adjusts the high range gain of
the recording deck
REC BIAS
–1.00 to +1.00
Adjusts the bias of the recording
deck
MAKEUP
ON, OFF
If this is on, operating the
recording deck’s level
([RECORD]/[REC LVL] knob) will
cause the reproduction deck’s
level ([REPRODUCE]/[REPR LVL]
knob) to move in tandem, maintaining a fixed output level This
allows you to change the
amount of distortion without
changing the output level
REC DEC
LO: LSH-1, LSH-2,
HPF-1, HPF-2
MID1–4:
0.50–16.00
HI: LPF-1, LPF-2,
HSH-1, HSH-2
These parameters control the
shape of the frequency response
curve for each filter band.
For the MID 1–4 bands you can
specify the sharpness (Q) of the
frequency response curve.
For the LO and HI bands, you
can select one of four filter types
F
fs=44.1/48 kHz:
16.0–20.0 kHz,
fs=88.2/96 kHz:
16.0 Hz–40.0 kHz
(HI TYPE=HSH-1 or
HSH-2: HI Band=
1.0–40 kHz)
These specify the center frequency of the filter
G
–18.0 to +18.0 dB
These specify the gain of the filter
REPR
DECK
Swss70, Swss78,
Swss85, Amer70
Selects the type of reproduction
deck
SW
ON, OFF
These switch each filter band
on/off
REPR LVL
–96.0 to +18.0 dB
Adjusts the output level of the
reproduction deck
Frequency
response
curve
This displays the total frequency
response curve for all bands
REPR HI
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
Adjusts the high range gain of
the reproduction deck
FLAT
This resets the gain of all bands
to 0 dB
REPR LO
–6.0 to +6.0 dB
Adjusts the low range gain of the
reproduction deck
TP SPEED
15 ips, 30 ips
Selects the tape speed
TP KIND
New, Old
Selects the type of tape
Q/TYPE
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Equalizer601
144
Appendix: Parameter Lists
REV-X Hall, REV-X Room, REV-X Plate
Max 100
This is a 2-in/2-out reverb algorithm. It provides
rich, high-density reverberation with a smooth
decay, and depth and spaciousness that will enhance
the original sound. You can choose one of three programs to suit the venue and your needs: REV-X Hall,
REV-X Room, and REV-X Plate.
This is a 1-in/1-out phaser that emulates a vintage
effect that was manufactured only during the late
1970s.
Parameter
Range
Specifies the duration of time
until the reverberation decays to
silence. Higher values produce
longer reverberation
INI.DLY
0.0–125.0ms
Specifies the time delay from
when the original sound is input
until reverberation begins.
Higher values produce a longer
delay before reverberation
begins
DECAY
0–53
Specifies the shape of the reverberation’s envelope. This value
will affect the characteristics of
the reverberation
ROOMSIZE 0–28
Specifies the size of the space.
Higher values simulate a broader
space. This value is linked with
the Reverb Time. Changing this
value will also change the Reverb
Time
0–10
Specifies the density and diffusion of the reverberation. Higher
values will increase the density
and strengthen the sense of spaciousness
Thru–8.00 kHz
This is a filter that cuts the
low-frequency range of the
reverberation. The region below
the frequency specified here will
be cut. This filter does not affect
the original sound
1.00 kHz–Thru
This is a filter that cuts the
high-frequency range of the
reverberation. The region above
the frequency specified here will
be cut. This filter does not affect
the original sound
0.1–1.0
Adjusts the decay time of the
high-frequency reverberation.
This specifies the high-frequency decay time as a proportion of the Reverb Time
LO.RATIO
0.1–1.4
Adjusts the decay time of the
low-frequency reverberation.
This specifies the low-frequency
decay time as a proportion of
the Reverb Time
LO.FREQ.
22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz
Specifies the frequency on which
Lo Ratio is based. The region
below this frequency will be
affected by the Lo Ratio
DIFF.
HPF
LPF
HI.RATIO
Level
meter
Use the METER: [IN] [OUT]
switches to choose whether the
input level or output level will be
shown
MIX
Adjusts the balance between the
original sound and the effect
sound.
Only the original sound will be
output if this value is 0%, and
only the effect sound will be output if this value is 100%
0–100%
01V96i—Reference Manual
Range
Description
MODE
1, 2, 3, 4
Switches the sound quality
(tone). There are four types
available, each with differences
in modulation amplitude and in
the amount of feedback
SPEED
SYNC,
0.100–10.000 Hz
Adjusts the rate of modulation
Description
0.32–32.14s
REV TIME
Parameter
Vintage Phaser
This is a 1-in/1-out phaser that offers an extremely
high level of freedom in creating phaser sounds,
without limiting itself to emulating any particular
model.
Parameter
Range
Description
SPEED
SYNC, 0.1–10.0 Hz Adjusts the rate of modulation
MANUAL
0.00–10.00
DEPTH
0.00–10.00
Adjusts the depth of modulation
FEEDBACK
0.00–10.00
Adjusts the amount of feedback
COLOR
0.00–10.00
This parameter is available for
certain combinations of MODE
and STAGE. It allows you to
fine-tune the tonal character
MODE
1, 2
Selects the type of circuit configuration being modeled. This will
affect the tonal character
STAGE
4, 6, 8, 10
Specifies the number of stages in
the circuit being modeled. This
will affect the tonal character
Adjusts the center frequency of
modulation
Effects Parameters
145
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Dual Phaser
This is a 2-in/2-out phaser that emulates a vintage
phaser manufactured during the mid-1970s.
Parameter
Range
Description
RATE 1
SYNC,
0.067–20.000 Hz
Adjusts the modulation rate of
LFO1
SHAPE 1
Sine, Square
Selects the waveform of LFO1
RATE 2
SYNC,
0.111–20.000 Hz
Adjusts the modulation rate of
LFO2
SHAPE 2
Sine, Square
Selects the waveform of LFO2
DEPTH
(A/B)
1.00–10.00
Adjusts the depth of modulation
FB (A/B)
0.00–10.00
Adjusts the amount of feedback
SW (A/B)
ON, OFF
Switches the phaser circuit
on/off
SWEEP B
LFO1, LFO2
Selects the LFO for Phaser B
SYNC B
NORM, REV
Selects the LFO phase for Phaser
B
1, 2, 3, 4
Specifies the way in which the
two phasers are connected.
1: After mixing the stereo input,
the sound processed by Phaser A
is output from the left channel,
and the sound processed by
Phaser B is output from the right
channel.
2: After mixing the stereo input,
the sound processed by Phaser A
is output from the left channel,
and the sound processed by
Phaser A and then additionally
processed by Phaser B is output
from the right channel.
3: After mixing the stereo input,
the sound processed by Phaser A
and then additionally processed
by Phaser B is output from both
the left and right channels.
4: The left input channel is processed by Phaser A and output
from the left channel, and the
right input channel is processed
by Phaser B and output from the
right channel.
IN MODE
01V96i—Reference Manual
146
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Effects and tempo
synchronization
Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms,
TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to
quarter note
DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Some of the 01V96i’s effects allow you to synchronize the
effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect;
delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For
delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the
tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the
modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
• Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: ............................. This is the on/off switch for tempo
synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO: .... These are the basic parameters for
tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ...... DELAY is the delay time, and
FREQ. is the frequency of the
modulation signal. These directly
affect the way in which the effect
sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects,
and FREQ. is relevant only for
modulation-type effects.
• How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays
essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means
that when TEMPO, NOTE, and DELAY (or FREQ.) are
synchronized, and you change any of these values, the
other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.
Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms,
NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/
new TEMPO)
= 250 x (120/121)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a: Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values
The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by
the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set
NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or
FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when
SYNC is OFF.
• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics
that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects
• You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects
Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be
the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was
stored. Here is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120  Change TEMPO to 60
 Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or
FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY
(or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the
effect from changing in this way between store and recall,
the 01V96i does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value
when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer
the same as when that effect was stored.
If you turn SYNC on  NOTE will be set
If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.)  NOTE will be set
In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows.
NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO))
If you edit NOTE  DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as
follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
If you edit TEMPO  DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as
follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x
(previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48
= 1/24
= 1/16
= 1/12
= 3/32
= 1/8
= 1/6
= 3/16
= 1/4
= 3/8
= 1/2
= 3/4
= 1/1
= 2/1
01V96i—Reference Manual
Preset EQ Parameters
#
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–3.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
100 Hz
265 Hz
1.06 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
02
Bass Drum
2
1.2
10
0.9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
LPF
G
+8.0 dB
–7.0 dB
+6.0 dB
ON
F
80 Hz
400 Hz
2.50 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
03
Snare
Drum 1
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+4.5 dB
1.00 kHz
3.15 kHz
5.00 kHz
1.2
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+1.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
335 Hz
2.36 kHz
4.00 kHz
—
10
0.7
0.1
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+2.0 dB
–7.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+1.0 dB
F
212 Hz
670 Hz
4.50 kHz
6.30 kHz
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
425 Hz
1.06 kHz
13.2 kHz
—
8
0.9
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+1.0 dB
+0.5 dB
F
95 Hz
425 Hz
2.80 kHz
7.50 kHz
0.5
1
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
–4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
100 Hz
400 Hz
2.80 kHz
17.0 kHz
—
4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
35.5 Hz
112 Hz
2.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
—
5
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.5 dB
+0.5 dB
F
112 Hz
112 Hz
2.24 kHz
4.00 kHz
0.1
5
6.3
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
+8.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
85 Hz
950 Hz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
0.1
8
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
180 Hz
1.12 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
13 Piano 1
—
L.SHELF
G
Q
12 Syn. Bass 2
0.28
H.SHELF
106 Hz
Q
11 Syn. Bass 1
1.2
PEAKING
–2.0 dB
Q
10 E. Bass 2
10
PEAKING
F
Q
09 E. Bass 1
1.4
L.SHELF
G
Q
08 Percussion
—
H.SHELF
132 Hz
Q
07 High Hat
2.2
PEAKING
–0.5 dB
Q
06 Cymbal
4.5
PEAKING
F
Q
05 Tom-tom 1
1.4
PEAKING
G
Q
04 Snare
Drum 2
Parameter
Title
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
224 Hz
600 Hz
3.15 kHz
5.30 kHz
Parameter
Title
01 Bass Drum
1
#
1.6
8
2.2
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–6.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
95 Hz
950 Hz
3.15 kHz
7.50 kHz
Q
—
8
0.9
—
14 Piano 2
Q
15 E. G. Clean
5.6
10
0.7
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
265 Hz
400 Hz
1.32 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
16
E. G.
Crunch 1
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
+2.0 dB
140 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.60 kHz
8
4.5
0.63
9
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
450 Hz
3.35 kHz
19.0 kHz
0.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
950 Hz
3.35 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
H.SHELF
–8.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+4.0 dB
315 Hz
1.06 kHz
4.25 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
10
4
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
106 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.30 kHz
0.9
4.5
3.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–3.5 dB
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
300 Hz
750 Hz
2.00 kHz
3.55 kHz
—
9
4.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
224 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
—
4.5
4.5
0.12
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
0.0 dB
–5.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
355 Hz
4.00 kHz
4.25 kHz
—
7
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
2.8
2
0.7
7
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
F
190 Hz
1.00 kHz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
170 Hz
236 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
27 Female Vo.
1
10
PEAKING
+6.0 dB
Q
26 Male Vocal
2
9
PEAKING
F
Q
25 Male Vocal
1
—
L.SHELF
G
Q
24 Brass Sec.
—
H.SHELF
355 Hz
Q
23 A. G.
Arpeg. 2
0.16
PEAKING
+5.0 dB
Q
22 A. G.
Arpeg. 1
0.4
PEAKING
F
Q
21 A. G.
Stroke 2
8
L.SHELF
G
Q
20 A. G.
Stroke 1
—
PEAKING
+4.5 dB
Q
19 E. G. Dist. 2
6.3
PEAKING
F
Q
18 E. G. Dist. 1
10
PEAKING
G
Q
17 E. G.
Crunch 2
0.18
PEAKING
0.11
10
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–1.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
F
118 Hz
400 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.00 kHz
Q
0.18
0.45
0.56
0.14
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Preset EQ Parameters
147
148
#
28
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Parameter
Title
Female Vo.
2
29 Chorus &
Harmo
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
112 Hz
335 Hz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
—
0.16
0.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
30 Total EQ 1
31 Total EQ 2
2.8
2
0.7
7
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+6.5 dB
F
95 Hz
950 Hz
2.12 kHz
16.0 kHz
Q
7
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+6.0 dB
F
95 Hz
750 Hz
1.80 kHz
18.0 kHz
Q
7
2.8
5.6
—
L.SHELF
32 Total EQ 3
+1.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
67 Hz
850 Hz
1.90 kHz
15.0 kHz
—
0.28
0.7
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+3.5 dB
–10.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
118 Hz
315 Hz
4.25 kHz
20.0 kHz
2
10
0.4
0.4
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
224 Hz
560 Hz
4.25 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
35 Tom-tom 2
—
4.5
2.8
0.1
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–9.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
90 Hz
212 Hz
5.30 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
36 Piano 3
—
4.5
1.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+4.5 dB
–13.0 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
100 Hz
475 Hz
2.36 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
37 Piano Low
8
10
9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+6.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
38 Piano High
10
6.3
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+5.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
5.60 kHz
Q
39 Fine-EQ
Cass
40 Narrator
10
6.3
2.2
0.1
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–1.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
75 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
—
4.5
1.8
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
106 Hz
710 Hz
2.50 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
4
7
0.63
—
01V96i—Reference Manual
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
1
2
3
Title
Gate
Ducking
A. Dr. BD
Type
GATE
DUCKING
GATE
H.SHELF
F
Q
34 Snare
Drum 3
PEAKING
G
Q
33 Bass Drum
3
PEAKING
Preset Gate Parameters
4
A. Dr. SN
GATE
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB)
–26
Range (dB)
–56
Attack (ms)
0
Hold (ms)
2.56
Decay (ms)
331
Threshold (dB)
–19
Range (dB)
–22
Attack (ms)
93
Hold (ms)
1.20 S
Decay (ms)
6.32 S
Threshold (dB)
–11
Range (dB)
–53
Attack (ms)
0
Hold (ms)
1.93
Decay (ms)
400
Threshold (dB)
–8
Range (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
1
Hold (ms)
0.63
Decay (ms)
238
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
1
Title
Comp
Type
COMP
Parameter
3
Expand
Compander
(H)
EXPAND
COMPAND-H
5
6
A. Dr. BD
A. Dr. BD
COMPAND-S
COMP
COMPAND-H
A. Dr. SN
COMP
A. Dr. SN
EXPAND
COMPAND-S
EXPAND
2
Out gain (dB)
5.0
749
Attack (ms)
60
Threshold (dB)
–24
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Ratio ( :1)
2
2
Attack (ms)
38
11
A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S
2
Release (ms)
250
Threshold (dB)
–23
Width (dB)
54
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Release (ms)
842
Threshold (dB)
–12
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
1
Out gain (dB)
–3.5
3.5
Ratio ( :1)
2
Knee
2
Attack (ms)
15
Release (ms)
70
Out gain (dB)
4.5
Threshold (dB)
–10
Knee
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Release (ms)
470
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
12
E. B. Finger
COMP
1
2
Threshold (dB)
–12
0.0
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
6
Attack (ms)
250
13
E. B. Slap
COMP
Out gain (dB)
6
4.0
Threshold (dB)
–8
Knee
hard
Ratio ( :1)
4
Release (ms)
133
Attack (ms)
25
Threshold (dB)
–10
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Width (dB)
24
Attack (ms)
Release (ms)
180
Threshold (dB)
–24
14
Syn. Bass
COMP
Out gain (dB)
9
3.0
Knee
hard
Ratio ( :1)
3
Release (ms)
250
Attack (ms)
9
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Out gain (dB)
5.5
Knee
2
Release (ms)
58
Threshold (dB)
–11
Knee
hard
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Release (ms)
238
Attack (ms)
1
Threshold (dB)
–18
–1.5
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
7
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
15
16
Piano1
Piano2
COMP
COMP
Attack (ms)
17
Out gain (dB)
1.0
Release (ms)
192
Threshold (dB)
–17
Knee
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Release (ms)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
8
3.5
Knee
2
Release (ms)
12
Threshold (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Release (ms)
A. Dr. SN
A. Dr. Tom
2
Attack (ms)
Release (ms)
Knee
9
10
–20
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Ratio ( :1)
8
Value
Value
Ratio ( :1)
Width (dB)
7
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
4
Type
–8
Width (dB)
Compander
(S)
Title
Threshold (dB)
Knee
2
#
17
E. Guitar
COMP
Out gain (dB)
7
6.0
2
174
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
7
2.5
4
2
Release (ms)
261
0
Threshold (dB)
–10
0.5
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
2
Attack (ms)
151
18
A. Guitar
COMP
Out gain (dB)
5
1.5
Threshold (dB)
–8
Knee
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Release (ms)
238
Attack (ms)
11
Threshold (dB)
–11
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Ratio ( :1)
2
Width (dB)
10
Attack (ms)
33
Release (ms)
128
Out gain (dB)
1.5
19
Strings1
COMP
Knee
Release (ms)
2
2
749
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Preset Compressor
Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
149
150
#
20
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Title
Strings2
Type
COMP
Parameter
COMP
BrassSection
COMP
Syn. Pad
COMP
25
26
27
28
SamplingPerc
Sampling BD
Sampling SN
Hip Comp
Solo Vocal1
COMPAND-S
COMP
COMP
COMPAND-S
COMP
–9
1.7
Attack (ms)
93
Out gain (dB)
1.5
COMP
COMP
4
Attack (ms)
39
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Knee
1.35 S
2
Release (ms)
226
–33
–17
Threshold (dB)
1.5
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
76
Attack (ms)
1
Out gain (dB)
2.5
31
Click Erase
EXPAND
2
Out gain (dB)
Knee
2.0
2
Release (ms)
186
Release (ms)
284
Threshold (dB)
–18
Threshold (dB)
–14
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
18
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
4.0
32
Announcer
COMPAND-H
1
Out gain (dB)
1
–2.5
Width (dB)
18
Release (ms)
226
Release (ms)
180
Threshold (dB)
–13
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
3
Attack (ms)
58
Attack (ms)
20
Out gain (dB)
2.0
33
Limiter1
COMPAND-S
1
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
–3.0
90
Release (ms)
238
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–18
Threshold (dB)
0
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Ratio ( :1)

Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
8
–2.5
34
Limiter2
COMP
Attack (ms)
3.90 s
0
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
18
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
238
Release (ms)
319
Threshold (dB)
–14
Threshold (dB)
–18
3.5
Ratio ( :1)
2
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
2
Attack (ms)
94
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Out gain (dB)
3.5
35
Total Comp1
COMP
Knee
4
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
35
Release (ms)
447
Threshold (dB)
–18
Threshold (dB)
–16
Ratio ( :1)
4
Ratio ( :1)
6
Attack (ms)
8
Attack (ms)
11
Out gain (dB)
6.0
36
Total Comp2
COMP
Out gain (dB)
8.0
Knee
hard
Knee
Release (ms)
354
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
–23
Ratio ( :1)
20
Attack (ms)
15
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
15
Release (ms)
163
Threshold (dB)
–20
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
31
Out gain (dB)
2.0
1
342
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
26
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Knee
Release (ms)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Chorus
Ratio ( :1)
Release (ms)
Solo Vocal2
30
Threshold (dB)
Knee
29
Value
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
24
Parameter
1.5
Knee
23
Type
Ratio ( :1)
Knee
22
Title
Threshold (dB)
Release (ms)
Strings3
#
–12
Knee
21
Value
Threshold (dB)
3
331
1
180
151
Dynamics Parameters
The dynamics effects for each channel strip include a Gate section (only for Input Channels)
and a Comp section. The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types. The Comp section
includes Compressor, Expander, Compander Hard (COMP. (H)), and Compander Soft
(COMP. (S)) types.
GATE Section (Only for Input Channels)
GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level at which the gate effect is
applied.
RANGE (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when
the gate closes.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how fast the gate opens when the
signal exceeds the threshold level.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec
88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec
96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms
(160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open
once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how fast the gate closes once the
hold time has expired. The value is expressed as
the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
I/O Characteristics
Time Series Analysis
Output Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Level
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
Time
Time
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
Dynamics Parameters
152
Appendix: Parameter Lists
DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music
level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal
level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified
amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN)
required to activate ducking.
RANGE (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when
ducking is activated.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is ducked
once the ducker has been triggered.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
This determines how long ducking remains active
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec
88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec once the trigger signal has fallen below the
THRESHOLD level.
96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms
(160 points)
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
I/O Characteristics
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its
normal gain once the trigger signal level drops
below the threshold. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
Time Series Analysis
Output Level
Output Signal
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
01V96i—Reference Manual
Time
Time
Dynamics Parameters
153
COMP
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified
RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of :1,
reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually
exceeds the threshold.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to
trigger the compressor.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, :1
(16 points)
This determines the amount of compression, that
is, the change in output signal level relative to
change in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor returns
to its normal gain once the trigger signal level
drops below the threshold. The value is expressed
as the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (180 points)
This sets the compressor’s output signal level.
KNEE
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how compression is applied at the
threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is
applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
I/O Characteristics
(KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
Time Series Analysis (RATIO=:1)
RATIO
Output Level
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
Input Level
Output Level
Input signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
Input Level
Time
Time
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
COMP Section
154
Appendix: Parameter Lists
EXPAND
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to
trigger the expander.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, :1
(16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to
its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds
the threshold.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how soon the signal is expanded
once the signal level drops below the threshold.
The value is expressed as the duration required for
the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (180 points)
This sets the expander’s output signal level.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how expansion is applied at the
threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is
applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
KNEE
I/O Characteristics
(KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
Time Series Analysis (RATIO=:1)
Output Level
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
RATIO
01V96i—Reference Manual
Input Level
Time
Time
Dynamics Parameters
155
Output Level
THRESHOLD
0dB
Input Level
WIDTH
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1 0 dB and higher ...................................... Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold........................ Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width ............ Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum.
The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can
be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change
caused by the compression and expansion processes.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level at which compression is
applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has
been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor or
expander returns to the normal gain once the
trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the
threshold respectively. The value is expressed as
the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
–18.0 to 0.0 (180 points)
This sets the compander’s output signal level.
0–90 (91 points)
This determines how far below the threshold
expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold
and width.
WIDTH (dB)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: Parameter Lists
COMPANDER HARD (H)
COMPANDER SOFT (S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
156
Appendix: MIDI
Appendix: MIDI
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
1
2
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
Program
Change#
Initial
Scene #
01
44
02
45
44
87
87
45
88
3
03
88
46
46
89
89
4
5
04
47
47
90
90
05
48
48
91
91
6
06
49
49
92
92
7
07
50
50
93
93
8
08
51
51
94
94
9
09
52
52
95
95
10
10
53
53
96
96
11
11
54
54
97
97
12
12
55
55
98
98
13
13
56
56
99
99
14
14
57
57
100
00
15
15
58
58
101
—
16
16
59
59
102
—
17
17
60
60
103
—
18
18
61
61
104
—
19
19
62
62
105
—
20
20
63
63
106
—
21
21
64
64
107
—
22
22
65
65
108
—
23
23
66
66
109
—
24
24
67
67
110
—
25
25
68
68
111
—
26
26
69
69
112
—
27
27
70
70
113
—
28
28
71
71
114
—
29
29
72
72
115
—
30
30
73
73
116
—
31
31
74
74
117
—
32
32
75
75
118
—
33
33
76
76
119
—
34
34
77
77
120
—
35
35
78
78
121
—
36
36
79
79
122
—
37
37
80
80
123
—
38
38
81
81
124
—
39
39
82
82
125
—
40
40
83
83
126
—
41
41
84
84
127
—
42
42
85
85
128
—
43
43
86
86
01V96i—Reference Manual
User
Scene #
User
Scene #
User
Scene #
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
157
CHANNEL1
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
High
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
Mid
Low
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
158
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL2
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
NO ASSIGN
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
Mid
Low
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
01V96i—Reference Manual
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
FADER L
FADER L
NO ASSIGN
BALANCE
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
MASTER
MASTER
AUX7
AUX8
MASTER
STEREO
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
159
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL3
160
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL4
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
01V96i—Reference Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
161
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL5
162
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL6
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
01V96i—Reference Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
163
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL7
164
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL8
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
01V96i—Reference Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
165
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL9
166
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL10
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
01V96i—Reference Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
167
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL11
168
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL12
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
01V96i—Reference Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
169
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL13
170
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL14
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE H
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
LFE L
01V96i—Reference Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
DIV F
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1
ST-IN2
ST-IN3
ST-IN4
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
171
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
Low
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL15
172
Appendix: MIDI
CHANNEL16
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
High
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
LR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
FR
01V96i—Reference Manual
Low
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
#
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
High
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
SURROUND
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
Mid
Low
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
WIDTH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
DEPTH
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
ST-IN1L
ST-IN1R
ST-IN2L
ST-IN2R
ST-IN3L
ST-IN3R
ST-IN4L
ST-IN4R
173
MIDI Data Format
1. DATA FORMAT
The following data types of parameter change are used by the 01V96i.
Type (HEX)
1.1 CHANNEL MESSAGE
Command
8n NOTE OFF
rx/tx
rx
function
Control the internal effects
9n NOTE ON
Bn CONTROL CHANGE
Cn PROGRAM CHANGE
rx
rx/tx
rx/tx
Control the internal effects
Control parameters
Switch scene memories
1.2 SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE
Command
F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER
FRAME
rx/tx
rx
function
MTC
1.3 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Command
F8 TIMING CLOCK
FE ACTIVE SENSING
FF RESET
rx/tx
rx
rx
rx
function
MIDI clock
Check MIDI cable connections
Clear running status
1.4.1 Real Time System Exclusive
function
MMC command
MMC response
MTC full message
1.4.2.1 Bulk Dump
rx/tx
function
BULK DUMP DATA
rx/tx
‘m’
tx/rx
tx/rx
‘S’
‘L’
tx/rx
tx/rx
‘V’
‘U’
‘C’
‘P’
‘Q’
‘Y’
‘G’
‘E’
‘H’
‘R’
‘O’
‘N’
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
function
Scene Memory & Request
(compressed data)
Setup Memory & Request
User defined MIDI remote &
Request
User defined keys & Request
User assignable layer & Request
Control change table & Request
Program change table & Request
Equalizer library & Request
Compressor library & Request
Gate library & Request
Effect library & Request
Channel library & Request
Input patch library & Request
Output patch library & Request
Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request
1.4.2.2 PARAMTER CHANGE
Command
F0 43 1n 3E 0D … F7 RARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 0D … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST
F0 43 1n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 7F … F7 PARAMETER
REQUEST
* ‘tx’ indicates that the data can be transmitted from the 01V96i, and
‘rx’ indicates that the data can be received by the 01V96i.
2. Format Details
2.1 NOTE OFF
(8n)
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored)
2.2 NOTE ON
(9n)
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(1-127:on, 0:off)
BULK DUMP REQUEST
rx/tx
The following data types of bulk dump are used on the 01V96i.
Data name
function
Edit buffer
Patch data
Setup data
Backup data
Function (recall, store, title, clear)
Function (pair, copy)
Function (effect)
Sort table
Function (attribute, link)
Key remote
Remote meter
Remote time counter
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
1.4.2 System Exclusive Message
Command
F0 43 0n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
DATA
F0 43 2n 7E … F7 BULK DUMP
REQUEST
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
rx
rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these message are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control effects.
1.4 EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
Command
rx/tx
F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC
tx
COMMAND
F0 7F dd 07 … F7 MMC RESPONSE rx
F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx
1 (01)
2 (02)
3 (03)
4 (04)
16 (10)
17 (11)
18 (12)
19 (13)
20 (14)
32 (20)
33 (21)
34 (22)
rx/tx
rx/tx
function
01V96i-specific parameter change
rx/tx
01V96i-specific parameter change
rx/tx
General purpose digital mixer
parameter change
General purpose digital mixer
parameter request
rx/tx
2.3 CONTROL CHANGE
(Bn)
Reception
If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI OUT.
If [TABLE] is selected, these message are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON,
and will control parameters according to the [Control assign table] settings.
The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received if [Control Change Rx] is ON
and the [Rx CH] matches, and will control the parameter that is specified by the
four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, operating a parameter specified in the [Control assign
table] will cause these messages to be transmitted if [Control Change Tx] is ON.
The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control Change Assign
Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, operating a specified parameter will cause data to be
transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change Tx] is ON, using the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h,
26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter
List.
This data cannot be transmitted via control change to Studio Manager since
there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter
Change messages will always be used.)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
MIDI Data Format
174
Appendix: MIDI
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
2.8.2 BULK DUMP
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (0-95, 102-119)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
For DUMP DATA
F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data …] cs F7
If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn
01100010
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
01100011
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00000110
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00100110
0vvvvvvv
Bn
62
vv
Bn
63
vv
Bn
06
vv
Bn
26
vv
Control change
For DUMP REQUEST
F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7
NRPN LSB
LSB of parameter number
NRPN MSB
MSB of parameter number
MSB of data entry
MSB of parameter data
Control change *1
LSB of data entry
LSB of parameter data
(Cn)
Reception
If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed from MIDI
OUT.
If [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, these messages will
be received. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will be received regardless of the
channel. When a message is received, a Scene Memory will be recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table].
Transmission
If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when a scene
memory is recalled.
If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the
lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission to Studio
Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is
no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will
always be used.)
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
2.5 TIMING CLOCK
(F8)
Reception
It is used to control effects. This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter
note.
STATUS
11111000 F8 Timing clock
2.6 ACTIVE SENSING
(FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for an
interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such
as by clearing the Running Status.
STATUS
11111110 FE Active sensing
2.7 SYSTEM RESET
(FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g., by
clearing the Running Status.
STATUS
2.8.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL
DATA NUMBER
CHECK SUM
Reception
This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device
number included in the SUB STATUS.
When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified
memory.
When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmitted.
Transmission
This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the
[MIDI]-[BULK DUMP] screen.
A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump request.
The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight
words of 7-bit data.
Conversion from actual data into bulk data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
Restoration from bulk data into actual data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
2.8.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format (compress)
The 01V96i can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
(F0)
(MMC)
These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the
01V96i is operated. For details, refer to the MMC specification.
DATA NAME
01V96i—Reference Manual
DATA TYPE
A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a
01V96i.
CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT
(LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of this
sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
11111111 FF System reset
2.8 SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that
follow this, ending before the checksum)
Model ID
4C 4D 20 20 38 43 39 33
tt
mm mm
cs
Control change *1
2.4 PROGRAM CHANGE
Device Number
n
cc cc
Control change *1
*1) The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during
transmission. Reception must be implemented so that reception occurs whether or not STATUS is present.
STATUS
DATA
This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within
the 01V96i.
The basic format is as follows.
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01101101
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
6D
mh
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘m’
m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
MIDI Data Format
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
Receive is effective 1-99, 256, 8192
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Scene data of block[bb]
DATA NAME
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
2.8.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format
(compress)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that
is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the Edit Buffer will be bulk-dumped.
If this is 8192, the data of the Undo Buffer will be bulk-dumped.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01101101
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
6D
mh
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘m’
m=0-99, 256, 8192(Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
0mmmmmmm ml
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format
Of the setup memory of the 01V96i, this bulk-dumps data other than the User
Define MIDI Remote, User Defined Keys, User Assignable Layer, Control
Change Table, and Program Change Table.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01010011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
53
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘S’
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
DATA NAME
Setup data of block[bb]
EOX
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘9’
‘3’
‘S’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
4C
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘L’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User define layer data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
‘3’
End of exclusive
‘C’
2.8.2.6 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump request
format
‘9’
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
‘8’
2.8.2.5 User Defined MIDI Remote bulk dump format
‘C’
current block number(0-total block number)
38
43
39
33
53
02
00
F7
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
‘8’
2.8.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
EOX
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01010011
00000010
00000000
11110111
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
4C
00
bb
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘L’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
End of exclusive
2.8.2.7 User Defined Keys bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
175
176
Appendix: MIDI
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01010110
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
20
20
38
43
39
33
56
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
‘’
2.8.2.10 User Assignable Layer bulk dump request format
‘’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
‘8’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘V’
b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
User define key data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
2.8.2.8 User Defined Keys bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01010110
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
56
00
bb
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘V’
b=0-7(bank no.A-H)
End of exclusive
2.8.2.9 User Assignable Layer bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
55
00
bb
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
01V96i—Reference Manual
DATA NAME
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
55
00
bb
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘U’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
End of exclusive
2.8.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME 01000011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
43
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘C’
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Control change table data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
2.8.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request format
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘U’
b=0-3(bank no.1-4)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
DATA NAME
User assignable layer data of block[bb]
EOX
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01000011
00000010
00000000
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
43
02
00
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘C’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01010000
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
50
02
00
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
DATA
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
CHECK SUM
EOX
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01010000
00000010
00000000
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
50
02
00
F7
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘P’
No.256 = Current
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Program change table data of block[bb]
DATA NAME
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘P’
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
2.8.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 199:Library no.200,
256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 288:STEREO 1L – 295:STEREO 4R, 384:BUS1 –
391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
51
mh
ml
tt
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
current block number(0-total block number)
EQ Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
EOX
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
2.8.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format
‘3’
2.8.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request format
0bbbbbbb
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
0eeeeeee
11110111
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
51
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘Q’
0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),
256-(Channel current data)
End of exclusive
2.8.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 384:BUS1 – 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8,
768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
59
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘Y’
0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
COMP Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘Q’
0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),
256-(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format
177
178
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format
2.8.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 – 259:EFFECT4, 8192:UNDO
256-259 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (xx-127, 256-259, 8192)
(xx varies with the firmware version.)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
59
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘Y’
0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),
256-(Channel current data)
End of exclusive
2.8.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 – 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
47
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME 01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘E’
0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259(Effect1-4 current)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Effect Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
2.8.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
‘G’
0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351(Channel current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
GATE Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
45
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
DATA NAME
End of exclusive
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
45
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘E’
0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259(Effect1-4 current)
2.8.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format
EOX
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
2.8.2.23 Channel library bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
47
mh
ml
F7
01V96i—Reference Manual
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘G’
0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351(Channel current data)
End of exclusive
End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.0 – 128:Library no.128,
256:CH1 – 287:CH32, 288:STEREO 1L – 295:STEREO 4R, 384:BUS1 –
391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 – 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
MIDI Data Format
43
39
33
48
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
‘C’
2.8.2.26 Input patch library bulk dump request format
‘9’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
‘3’
‘H’
0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
256-(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
current block number(0-total block number)
Channel Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
2.8.2.24 Channel library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
48
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
52
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘R’
0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive
Universal bulk dump
2.8.2.27 Output patch library bulk dump format
‘L’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘H’
0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),
256-(Current data)
End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.0 – 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 01V96i, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256, 8192)
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
EOX
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
52
mh
ml
F7
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
2.8.2.25 Input patch library bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01001111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
4F
mh
ml
tt
bb
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘O’
0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
current block number(0-total block number)
Output patch Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
‘8’
‘C’
2.8.2.28 Output patch library bulk dump request format
‘9’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See
above)
‘3’
‘R’
0-32(Input patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
current block number(0-total block number)
Input patch Library data of block[bb]
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01001111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
4F
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
‘8’
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘O’
0-32(Output patch Library no.0-32),
256(Current data)
End of exclusive
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
0bbbbbbb
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
179
180
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.2.29 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number.
0:SLOT 1
The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than
the card that is installed in the slot.
The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
DATA NAME
01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0000iiii
0000iiii
0000jjjj
0000jjjj
DATA
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
0eeeeeee
EOX
11110111
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
4E
mh
ml
bh
bl
th
tl
0i
0i
0j
0j
ds
:
de
ee
F7
System exclusive message
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
‘L’
‘M’
DATA NAME
EOX
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
39
33
4E
mh
ml
F7
‘8’
‘C’
DATA *)
‘9’
‘3’
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
tt
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Data type
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
‘’
EOX
‘N’
m=0(SLOT 1)
current block number(0-total block number)
total block number(minimum number is 0)
Developer id (High)
Developer id (Low)
Product id (High)
Product id (Low)
Plug-in Effect card memory data of block[bb]
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be
transmitted.
2.8.3.1.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal
format)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
ee=(Invert(‘L’+…+de)+1)&0x7F
End of exclusive
DATA *)
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
tt
ee
System exclusive message
0ppppppp
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
pp
cc
dd
:
F7
Parameter no.
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Data type
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
Channel no.
data
End of exclusive
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be
transmitted.
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
‘L’
‘M’
‘’
‘’
2.8.3.1.3 Parameter request basic format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
‘8’
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011010
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
1A
tt
ee
‘C’
‘9’
‘3’
‘N’
m=0(SLOT 1)
End of exclusive
2.8.3 PARAMETER CHANGE
2.8.3.1 Basic behavior
Reception
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device Number
included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. A specific parameter
is controlled when a Parameter Change is received. When a Parameter Request
is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a
Parameter Change with the Device Number set to [Rx CH].
01V96i—Reference Manual
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
‘’
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number. (See
above)
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00111001
00110011
01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
2.8.3.1.1 Parameter change basic format
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
2.8.2.30 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
Transmission
If [Parameter change TX] is ON and you operate a parameter for which Control
Change transmission is not enabled, a parameter change will be transmitted
with [Tx CH] as the Device Number.
As a response to a Parameter Request, a parameter change will be transmitted
with [Rx CH] as the Device Number.
EOX
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Data type
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.1.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal
format)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
tt
ee
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Data type
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
MIDI Data Format
Consult your dealer for parameter address details.
2.8.3.2 Parameter change
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
(Edit buffer)
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
01
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Edit Buffer
2.8.3.7 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA
EOX
2.8.3.3 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
01
ee
(Edit buffer)
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
DATA
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
EOX
(Patch data)
System exclusive message
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Patch data
EOX
2.8.3.5 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011010
00000010
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
1A
02
ee
(Patch data)
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Patch data
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.6 Parameter change
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
00000011
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
03
ee
(Setup memory)
System exclusive message
DATA
EOX
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Setup data
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
(Backup memory)
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
00000100
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
04
ee
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
11110111
cc Channel no.
dd data
:
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Backup data
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011010
00000100
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
1A
04
ee
(Backup memory)
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Backup data
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
2.8.3.10 Parameter change (Function call: Library store /
recall)
Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. If
this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a Parameter Response.
Transmission
If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, and you store or recall a memory/library for
which Program Change transmission is not valid, this message will be transmitted with the Device Number set to the [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DATA
Setup data
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
01V96i
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
2.8.3.9 Parameter request
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA
(Setup memory)
System exclusive message
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
02
ee
F0
43
3n
3E
1A
03
ee
2.8.3.8 Parameter change
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Edit Buffer
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
00000010
0eeeeeee
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011010
00000011
0eeeeeee
Element no.
(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
Universal
2.8.3.4 Parameter change
:
:
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
00ffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
ff
mh
ml
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
function
number High
number Low
channel High
channel Low
End of exclusive
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
01V96i—Reference Manual
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.3.1.5 Parameter Address
181
182
Appendix: MIDI
function
SCENE RECALL
EQ LIB RECALL
GATE LIB RECALL
COMP LIB RECALL
EFF LIB RECALL
CHANNEL LIB RECALL
INPATCH LIB RECALL
OUTPATCH LIB RECALL
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x07
0x08
number
0-99, 8192
1-200, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
0-128, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
channel*1)
256
0-513
0-95
0-513
0-3
0-513
256
256
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
tx/rx
SCENE STORE
EQ LIB STORE
GATE LIB STORE
COMP LIB STORE
EFF LIB STORE
CHANNEL LIB STORE
INPATCH LIB STORE
OUTPATCH LIB STORE
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x26
0x27
0x28
1-99
41-200
5-128
37-128
xx(*2)-128
1-128
1-32
1-32
256, 16383
tx/rx
0-513, 16383 tx/rx
0-31, 16383
tx/rx
0-513, 16383 tx/rx
0-3, 16383
tx/rx
0-513, 16383 tx/rx
256, 16383
tx/rx
256, 16383
tx/rx
*1) 0:CH1 – 31:CH32, 32:ST-IN1L - 39:ST-IN4R, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8,
256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8, 512:STEREO
Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data item.
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the library data has been changed by a external cause (such as bulk reception)
(only transmitted by the 01V96i)
*2) Varies with the firmware version.
2.8.3.11 Parameter change
(Function call: title)
Reception
When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be changed.
If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be
executed, and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response.
Transmission
In response to a request, this is transmitted with the device number set to the
[Tx CH].
When the title is changed on the 01V96i, this message will be transmitted with
the device number set to [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
11110111
function
SCENE LIB TITLE
EQ LIB TITLE
GATE LIB TITLE
COMP LIB TITLE
EFF LIB TITLE
CHANNEL LIB TITLE
INPATCH LIB TITLE
OUTPATCH LIB TITLE
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
4f
mh
ml
dd
:
dd
F7
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
title
number High
title 1
:
title x(depend on the library)
End of exclusive
size
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
(Function call: title)
Reception
When this is received, a parameter change will be transmitted with the device
number set to [Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
01V96i—Reference Manual
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
title
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
2.8.3.13 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library
Clear)
Reception
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be cleared. If this is received from Studio Manager or Cascade Link, the operation will be executed,
and then the result of execution will be transmitted as a parameter response.
Transmission
When a memory or library is cleared on the 01V96i, this message will be transmitted with the device number set to [Tx CH].
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0110ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
function
SCENE LIB CLEAR
EQ LIB CLEAR
GATE LIB CLEAR
COMP LIB CLEAR
EFF LIB CLEAR
CHANNEL LIB CLEAR
INPATCH LIB CLEAR
OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
6f
mh
ml
F7
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
0x66
0x67
0x68
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
clear function
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
number
1-99
41-200
5-128
37-128
xx-128 (*1)
1-128
1-32
1-32
*1) Varies with the firmware version.
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the attribute of the specified memory/library will be
changed.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
*1) Varies with the firmware version.
2.8.3.12 Parameter request
10
4f
mh
ml
F7
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without
change.
number Low
number
0-99,256(0:response only)
1-200(1-40:response only)
1-128(1-4:response only)
1-128(1-36:response only)
1-128(1-xx(*1):response only)
0-128(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
0-32(0:response only)
EOX
00010000
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
2.8.3.14 Parameter change (Function call: attribute)
System exclusive message
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x46
0x47
0x48
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
11110111
function
SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
tt
tt
F7
0x00
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
attribute
number High
number Low
attribute(protect:0x0001, normal:0x0000)
End of exclusive
number
0-99(0:response only)
2.8.3.15 Parameter request (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
MIDI Data Format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
DATA
Universal
Function call
EOX
attribute
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
2.8.3.16 Parameter change
(Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the patch link data of the specified scene will be modified.
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ooooooo
0ooooooo
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
ih
il
oh
ol
F7
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
End of exclusive
(Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the
[Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
Source channel H
Source channel L
Destination channel H
Destination channel L
End of exclusive
channel
0x00
0x01
0x02
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010010
0000ffff
00000000
0ppppppp
00000000
0eeeeeee
11110111
function
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
*1)
*1)
*1)
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
12
0f
00
pp
00
ee
F7
0x00
0x01
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call Effect Event
function
Release:0, Press:1
Effect number (0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4)
End of exclusive
channel
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
0:Effect1-3:Effect4
• This does not activate when the effect type is different.
2.8.3.20 Parameter change
(Sort Table)
When scene memory sort is executed on the 01V96i, the memory sort table will
be transmitted to Studio Manager.
Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data.
If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort, it will transmit this data to
the 01V96i.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
number High
number Low
function
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending
on the effect type).
DATA
2.8.3.17 Parameter request
Function call Pair
2.8.3.19 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect )
outpatch
0x20
Universal
*1) 0:CH1 – 31:CH32, 128:BUS1 – 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 – 263:AUX8,
512:STEREO
Effect is 0:Effect 1–3:Effect 4
• In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing is possible.
• In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source Channel
as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the copy destination.
inpatch
number
0-99(0:response only)
7F
11
0f
sh
sl
dh
dl
F7
function
PAIR ON with COPY
PAIR ON with RESET BOTH
PAIR OFF
EOX
function
SCENE LIB LINK
01111111
00010001
0000ffff
0sssssss
0sssssss
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
Appendix: MIDI
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
183
DATA
End of exclusive
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
00010011
0000ffff
0ddddddd
:
0ddddddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
13
0f
ds
:
de
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Library sort table
Library type
Data
Data
End of exclusive
2.8.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy)
EOX
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified channel.
8-7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
F0
43
1n
3E
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i—Reference Manual
184
Appendix: MIDI
2.8.3.21 Parameter request
(Sort Table)
When the 01V96i receives this data, it will transmit Sort Table Data.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011010
00010011
0000ffff
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
1A
13
0f
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Library sort table
Library type
End of exclusive
2.8.3.22 Parameter change
(Key remote)
CH] at intervals of 50 msec as a rule (although this may not be the case if the
port is being used by other communication), for a period of 10 seconds.
If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted
immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key specified by Address is pressed (released).
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
00100000
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0ppppppp
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
20
kk
kk
kk
pp
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Key remote
Key address H
Key address M
Key address L
Release:0, Press:1
End of exclusive
2.8.3.23 Parameter change
(Remote Meter)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the
specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When
you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified by
Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a
duration of 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
:
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
21
mm
mm
mm
dd
dd
:
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
Data1 H
Data1 L
End of exclusive
* Meter data uses the unmodified DECAY value of the DSP. The interpretation of the data will depend on the parameter.
(Remote Meter)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, data of the specified address is transmitted on the [Rx
01V96i—Reference Manual
F0
43
3n
3E
1A
21
mm
mm
mm
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Count H
Count L
End of exclusive
2.8.3.25 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter,
the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you
want to transmit Counter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the
PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00011010
00100010
0000tttt
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
1A
22
0t
dd
dd
dd
dd
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Remote Time counter
0:Time code, 1:Measure.Beat.Clock
Hour / Measure H
Minute / Measure L
Second / Beat
Frame / Clock
End of exclusive
2.8.3.26 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter
change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the [Rx
CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be
halted immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without
change.
ADDRESS LL
2.8.3.24 Parameter request
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011010
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00011010
00100010
0ddddddd
F0
43
3n
3E
1A
22
dd
System exclusive message
Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
01V96i
Remote Time counter
0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console-Internal Parameters]
Model: 01V96i
Function...
Date: 26 Aug. 2011
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version: 1.0
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16
Memorized
Memorized
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
**************
OMNI off/OMNI on
X
X
Note
Number
True Voice
X
**************
0–127
X
Velocity
Note On
Note Off
X
X
O
O
After
Key’s
Ch’s
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Assignable
0–127
**************
0–127
0–99
Assignable
O
O
*1
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Prog
Change
0-95,102-119
:True#
System Exclusive
System
Common
:Song Pos
:Song Sel
:Tune
X
X
X
X
X
X
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
X
X
O
X
Aux
Messages
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Effect Control
Effect Control
Notes
MTC quarter frame message is recognized.
*1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC.
For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
C.S.G., Pro Audio Division
© 2011 Yamaha Corporation
110IP-A0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement